Home

User Manual

1. Gruber amp Petters GmbH Belvederegasse 11 A 2000 Stockerau 43 2266 62241 www qrupet at To do this place the directory containing the export files in a shared server folder or on a web server If you have an external web server FTP Upload you can automatically upload the data to the folder using an FTP application The following pages contain a detailed description of the options open to you for making adjustments to the Static HT ML output Static HTML tab After selecting an output configuration from the list in the Info Timetable dialogue and clicking lt Edit gt you can make changes to the settings for HTML output in the subsequent dialogue 266 gp Untis Info Timetable Static HTML Output Maximum number of weeks Standard The first tab 7 Static Substitutions Navigation Element selection HTM L z allows you to Static HTML Timetable give a name to the output configuration You can also specify how many weeks from the start date should be exported and in which directory the data Export directory should be stored C teme Weeks on the top directory level E You cannot export weeks beyond the end of the school year i e you can only export a maximum of 3 weeks if there are only 3 weeks left Please refer to chapter Navigation tab on p 272 for a description of the field Weeks on the top directory level Peri
2. Total for Hugo 3 20 00 10 10 10 10 2 10 18 2 Hugo Hl 2a igi strie 17 9 28 6 2 Hugo GEG 3a odde 17 9 28 6 2 Hugo GEG 3b Cui e Date Mo 17 9 2007 Hupo am gt a Ci ugo e 9 286 EN oy Calendar week 38 2 Hugo 312 231 9 v September October 2007 November December January 9B 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 JES February 10 14 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 JES 23 2008 March 8 9 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 13 April ADAG 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 MRA May E eee 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 eee ee June 17 a 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 MSMEs ESE General data Values for Count only school days Value calculation i School year Number of days 189 Number of weeks 38 Resut Lessons Number of days 90 Number of weeks 18 142 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable ba si S etti n g S 3 Hugo L Tea Lesson number For element Hugo b z Hugo 6 0 Periods week 8 000 Value units week L No Te Per RFD x U x U x U Lessons Timetable Codes Values Periods week HI Subject 2a Class es Teacher Subjeci Classes Subject room Home Room Value Val You can prevent fortnightly lessons being valued differently depending on whether they belong to week A or week B by entering group factors Using a gro
3. a 2 Periods week Alias name Te Subject Group Gauss Teacher Room Students M GA Subject Ps1 Home Room Students F or element Time range 0 17 9 aii z 4 Class es Total auss a Students Min Ist half of the Year Full name 1 2 To apere tatistical Code AAE 21 654 Value units week Text Student Course Nasarintion ine text zl Name Full name Marke Lock 1 Ignore From To L No Cl Te Per Teach Subjec Class Subjec Home Double From To Value Value Line value Subj factor Class factc AssiLes Grp Subject grou Ex Exercises o 179 12 0 463 Totalf 3 4300 5 5 5 4 4 S aaisa 4 o 5 E 1 E Sport Sport oO C 17 9 28 6 1 000 38 4 Gauss 3a R 4 500 4 500 1 105 4 000 48 lee Gauss GA 3b 58 71 Bil Gauss M 1 000 1 050 1 000 Te 1 050 1105 OO 179 1 2 0500 C 42 286 0 500 1st half of the Year o H2 2ndhalf ofthe Year C a 1 000 1 000 Gauss GA 4 Te 4 O NOOO Expressive Date Mo 17 9 2007 No lessons Legend Breaks Holiday Weekend fa Calendar week 38 Public Holiday LESS School year Different term
4. function with the same name in the lessons view Please refer to the gp Untis user manual for more information Extended de coupling The function invoked with this icon corresponds to the function with the same name in the lessons view Please refer to the gp Untis user manual for more information Lesson comparison There is a special section dealing with this function in this manual Settings Settings have already been described earlier in this chapter Save Settings Save As It is often desirable to display the lessons matrix in different ways for different tasks either the classes or the teachers in the lines sorted by subject groups or not with the values or the weekly periods You can save the display settings and simply switch between the different display possibilities via a selection list Please open the Demo2 gpn file and adjust the lesson matrix to display gt classes in the lines and teachers in the columns Please also activate total lines for lines and columns and Vvv set the display to periods week Planning Tools Now save these settings under CL LE Total Please note that the Gl Default v setting CL LE Total is now visible in the selection list of the main toolbar Save Settings Now adjust the matrix settings to display Save As gt teachers in the lines and gt subjects in the columns Please change the display of totals to values Now save
5. Tu We Th Fr 23 24 25 26 27 28 Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su EI September 2007 October November December January February es 29 2223 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 The time limitation of the lessons overwrite the time limitation of the lesson group 7 19 20 110 11 1 General data Values for Count only school days Value calculation School year Number of days 286 Number of weeks 41 Lessons Number of days 189 Number of weeks 38 Duration Eff time range 10 Last but not least you have the possibility of entering interruptions in the lesson group Keep the lesson time limitation and enter an interruption for lesson group H1 from 22 12 to 13 01 The figure on the following page shows that the interruption for the lesson group in contrast to its time limitation is taken into consideration The lesson value now changes as follows 2 weekly periods 10 length of the time limitation in weeks 41 weeks in the school year 0 488 A lesson time limitation overrides a lesson group time limitation but an interruption for a lesson group Is taken into consideration Lesson group factors override all time limitations Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable 137 3 Classes Cla BAE 3 Lesson Groups Gro BEX E 4 D Xx EAN 2l H 7 D ee ay Ra BHO KR SA O wre ala 8o Tass Timetable Val
6. Class 1a Gauss Per Teacher Subject Class es Subject room Home Room Double pers From To Value Line value Subj tactor Class factor Value 2 1a 1b 2a 2b Examples 117 Totals If you right click the column header in the grid view you will oe see a small menu giving you the option to display a total AORE CMN Wi i Adjust All Columns Strg E line Adjust all columns bo their content Strg F In the teacher lessons view the total in the Value column really is the total of the individual entries in this line In the class lessons view this value can be different The reason is that not only are the entries that appear in the grid view totalled but also the values of the indivuidual coupling lines which corresponds exactly to the value units that can be seen on the Values tab in the form view The figure shows the lessons of a class that has so far only been assigned two classes The value total equals six which is larger than the sum of the entries of the two lessons in the grid view X Class 1a Gauss L Cla AHA u wiBFOxK BY De OD A sae Lessons Timetable Codes Values 3 3 Value or Factor Line valus factor Total of the values Class 1a Gauss 7 Target perp in al coupling For element 4 000 Value units week A n Porinds fiaicol _ fines Value from the teacher in the first Teache Subjer Class es Subjec Home Room Male Female
7. Classes F ia x Status 27 07 2007 08 20 EN MA GEc RI MU EN PEG MA AR DE RE Gruber amp Petters GmbH Belvederegasse 11 A 2000 Stockerau 43 2266 62241 www grupetat Technical note Allow word wrapping You can also specify that this setting should be extended to apply to the whole width of the cell The setting causes a separate table to be created for each timetable field enabling it to be more precisely aligned Allow word wrapping If this option is activated a new line will begin automatically when there is not enough space in the HI ML output for text Application Notes 305 General HTML Settings In addition to format specific settings you can also define general rules for creating HTML pages You can find these settings under Irec School Data menu item Settings Miscellaneous on the HTML tab Calendar Print This option allows you to specify the position of the navigation controls Licence Data for the HTML output from the gp Untis standard application as well v Main Toolbar as the position of the footer for all HTML output gp Untis 2008 Timetabling Software Netscape DER a File Edit Yiew Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help e G0 oO Q fie Ha ult htm aj m A Home G Radio iy Netsca cape pe Ob Searct ch Bookmarke 9 Miscellaneous Settings gp Untis 2008 A
8. Element Test school DEMO For demo and test only me J ta J Timetable 2008 2009 0 Va id fom 10 October manana 27 07 2007 08 43 EN MA GEc MU EN PEG DE BI MA EN PEG DE 1a Class 1a Gauss Properties for the lt Body gt tag Properties for the lt T able gt tag 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Gruber amp PettersSoftware gp Untis 2008 Gruber amp Petters GmbH Belvederegasse 11 A 2000 Stockerau 43 2266 62241 www grupetat If you are acquainted with HTML you can define properties for the lt Body gt and lt Table gt tags in the HTML Timetables section of the window As soon as these input fields contain anything the corresponding tags will include only those properties that you define and the usual standard definitions will be ignored HTML Timetables bacolor greer Properties for the lt Body gt tag ENTERS Ee lt font size 3 faces Arial color 000000 gt i lt BR gt Properties for the lt T able gt tag lt TABLE cellspacing 1 cellpadding 1 gt lt TR gt If you are unsure what to enter in these fields it is advisable to leave them empty and use the standard gp Untis settings 306 gp Untis Info Timetable Application Notes Notes for Web Designers If you output HTML with the Info Timetable module HTML files will be used that store the l
9. Print C Full name 172 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 BF aox 3 Break Supervisions Bas v Minutes A TT portrait layout Minutes if AS 2O N Fi amp ey No Supervision 845 940 1035 1130 1225 13 20 Print OUW 8 555 950 1045 11 40 1235 13 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 Break Supervisions Corridor Teacher Gauss E Minutes 445 YVacant 110 Green lines denote supervisons for which the teacher is particularly 172 2 3 4 45 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 45 940 1035 11 30 1225 1320 14 15 8 55 950 1045 11 40 1235 1330 14 25 10 C Full name 10 10 10 10 W223 34 45 5 6 67 7 8 845 9 40 10 35 11 30 1225 13 20 14 15 855 950 1045 1140 1235 1330 14 25 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Block Teachers for Super visions The scheduler will generally attempt to take indivi dual teachers wishes into account when allocating supervisions For example this can be effected by blocking teachers for certain Supervisions Activate the Teachers tab in the supervisions dialogue Green in the table indicates all the supervisions that are particularly suitable for the corresponding teacher in the above example it is the teacher Gauss on the basis of his her timetable and in accordance with the weighting parameters set by you Manual sch
10. be scheduled Leave these fields empty for the time being lt is often advisable to search for teachers to supervise the longer breaks first This allows you to process the long breaks first which are more difficult to schedule and then to fill in the remaining gaps when you optimise the rest Use the Shortest Break field for this purpose Entering 15 in this field will result in only those supervisions of at least 15 minutes or longer being scheduled Leave this field empty for the time being as well This means that all supervisions will be scheduled The optimisation results in the Break Optimisation dialogue being filled Correction Run Frequently especially after timetable changes the Automatic scheduling 2541 3 Break Supervisions aox Corridor Teacher Bas v TT portrait layout Minutes 650 Vacant C Minutes 374 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 845 940 1035 1130 1225 13 20 1415 800 855 950 1045 1140 1235 13 30 1425 Monday Arist Cer Cer Tuesday Nobel New Gauss Wednesd Rub Gauss Curie Thursday Hugo Callas Callas Friday Arist Rub Cer Saturday New Ander Optimisation break supervision schedule should be retained as far All w Corridor as possible and only those unacceptable supervisions rescheduled By calling up the optimisation dialogue and setting the Delete poorly placed supervisions flag you can remove all those teacher entries where a weighting
11. Marked m Lock Q ignore From 173 Exercises Sport 1st half of the Year Pi Fi O M O O 2nd half of the Year o go O Fj oO Fi O Fi M 173 O 173 O 42 straight numbered week O odde odd numbered week O Fi 173 173 You can activate columns Week A and Week B in the grid view in the grid adjustment dialogue toolbar icon lt Grid Adjustment gt Class 3b is to be taught one week history and the next week geography by teacher Hugo The corresponding lessons numbers 18 and 40 must therefore be split into the two lesson groups Please assign lesson number 18 to the strWe group and lesson number 40 to the oddWe group 3 Hugo L Tea mef wo AED ATA De LOA oa FRO n Lessons Timetable Codes Values 2 Periods week Lesson number 40 S Alias name Subject Group Students M For element A x Hugo Hugo 20 0 Periods week 12 854 Value units week l Moes ale Bee GEc Subject 3a Class es Class es Subject room Home Room Value Ve Hugo Teacher Room 10 Students F Total Students Min Students Max Student Course AssiLes Grp 2 L No Per Teacher Total for Hugo 20 00 10 0 18 Hugo Hugo Hugo Hugo Hugo Hugo R2a R3a Ra Ra Ra Ps1 stre oddyVe 17 9 26 6 3 12 231 0 Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable 141 Depending on whether you have selected the
12. BS Max the BS Max value is displayed on a red background as a warning a Enter 0 in the BS Max field if a teacher is not to be assigned to supervisions kal D Al Nobel S 13 918 Vat Marked mj _ Ignore ij Lock gt Gauss Gauss New Huge Ander Arist Callas Teachers Tea P A xU U xU BS Max 50 50 50 50 40 40 55 40 40 30 0 Name Full mame BS Newton Hugo Andersen Aristoteles Callas Noire Rubens Mobel Cervantes Curie elk l fi ex BLE 8 Preparatory Inputs 2441 ax b E Altetn room Rm Weight Off site codes Room capacity Dept Corridor Break supery SY N N Supervisions week FF Grid Adjustment 242 gp Untis Break Supervision Specify Supervision Areas You can obtain a summary of all break supervision minutes pi o gs so far allocated by activating the total for the column BS Max under lt Grid Adjustment gt and printing the master Ander Andersen 50 10 man H data see figure Callas Callas f sofao Subjects Cer Cervantes 4080 3 Subjects Sub It is sometimes not desirable for Es ane D Fe es E Subject Timetable Values Subs teachers to be EM akeam C Ignore i Science Subject Group allocated break supervision Otw EIM Main subiect C Don t Print N Time Requests C F Fringe period when they
13. E mail message There are fields available for the e mail subject and message You have the possibility of using the following wildcards gt d timetable date e g 13 9 2007 a current date and time e g 15 03 2008 09 33 s teacher student short name N teacher student long name teacher student first name vY VvV V Y Yy t teacher s title 288 gp Untis Info limetable Sending Timetables by E mail Clicking the lt Send gt button launches the e mail dispatch process Any errors that might occur are recorded in the log file You can view this file by clicking on the lt Log File gt button The log file contains the following information 1 Date send date and time 2 Short name short name of the teacher or student to whom the e mail was sent 3 Recipient s e mail address 4 Subject line of the e mail 5 Transmission status ok or if applicable error number and error message in the case of problems Including Additional Attachments Settings Time Grid You can attach any file you wish to the e mail in addition to the le HTML timetables These files must have the teacher s short name as name and can have any extension e g Holmes pdf for a teacher Licence Data with the short name Holmes All files that are to be sent as attachments Miscellaneous Settings must be in the directory specified for E Mail attachments on the Directories tab HTML EMal
14. File New School Year you can choose which term the new school year should be based on i e which data should form the basis for the coming school year Combining several Time Limitations 187 Combining Several Time Limitations The following principles apply when several time limitations are in effect for one lesson Overlapping term with lessons groups and From to constraints Lesson groups and From to constraints have an effect irrespective of whether terms are defined or not Term 1 Lesson data can be saved on a term spectic basis as described in chapter Changing Data ina Term If there is a time limitation for a lesson in a term in which this is not defined the lesson will never take place Term 1 Term 2 Lessons only in period 1 available From To a Overlapping lesson groups and From to constraints The principle of lowest common denominator applies to overlapping lesson groups with From to constraints If there is no overlap the lesson will never take place 188 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Combining several Time Limitations t u Class From To SSS asson Group U Sam Class From To TA Lesson Group le Class From To 4 Group If there are conflicting lesson group and From to constraint entries the From to limitation of the lesson will apply Class From To Lesson Group Yea
15. Sending Substitution Messages by SMS E Mail 000 290 Database EPON isinin a 293 gp Untis in Info Mode oes cece sienna dene ccdanetus tees dieccansens 294 FCO CNN NUS srcctseiscrceninir oes saiedrsecnincewsaduhedantgdincanmesanntcuvancqsesusadubedenieanintenenseies 295 Setting up Window Groups ccccceeccceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesueeeeesseueeeeeeseaaeess 295 Setting p the into lerminal sicexsasevessesencadecceceaswstemst encenvacadessnoesyuesanteareemaeadvens 297 Creating a SHON CU seesicencstestindeatsocatennedannduscnesnsnceadslatenstdnabenindionaptansstesnteeaseSvarieaveleeds 297 Changing the displayed window group sssseeccesececesssseseseececeessssssasessseseeeees 300 SWHCHING Off DHINMING cascecesrsccssasatassannaptdaanscesssahsnnadedaaadesadeeavandsapenietataasersesandensenets 301 gp Untis MultiUser in Info MOde ccccccceeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeessaeeeessaaeees 301 Application Notes ere ccseccescesiccctexcunsvenesceneosevecteecesectseeuscrwcosmesenecewenecs 302 HTML Settings in the Timetable ccccccccsseceeceeeeecceeseeeseeeeesseeeeessneeseas 302 General HTML Settings ccs sececaseestncreeyomsnetecsactvaseesencteseeasatenceeueatwcetaesactansennse 305 Notes for Web Designers es iccccisesetceencenessaccreuanixnoncenstudcortidmencdeesatddexmsccousicetees 306 Output files for Statie HIML ses scccvezwssetesacce oeiaedinat noniedeahpctebtasassieueedteenenieseanieeseaeed 307
16. la Arist Rla ja Arist Rla ja Callas Ala la Callas Ala la Nobe Ala la Rub Ala ja Cer Ala 2a Hugo Aza 2a Calas R2a 2a Calas R2a 2a Nobe R2a 2a Cer R2a 2a Cer R2a 2a Cer Ra 2a New R2a 2a New Gym 3 Year s Planning in Terms j xx YY Periods week Sub Cla Tea Rm Stude Total Min Max UnSc 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ul 1 b ot C Respect the selection in the right pane 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 1 2 2 1 i 1 2 1 7 1 Nd This even distribution of lessons over the individual weeks Is not always desirable as it does not accord with the educational concept and it can result in an unfavourable allocation for the teachers For this reason it is possible to make the following entries Specifying the number of periods per term The desired minimum and maximum number of periods per week can be specified in the Min Max column A 12 period lesson block is to be taught for four periods per term The correct entry in this case would be 4 4 If nothing is entered it could be that of the 12 periods only 1 period is held in some weeks and 5 in others Year s Planning in Terms 201 Example A 28 period block of lessons is to be taught for at least 6 CZD but at most 8 periods per week The correct entry in this case would be 6 8 The 28 periods would be divided up into 6 7 or 8
17. Design modifications using CSS cccisiectccaccenedsssdiosnnctncnone vaiscercninedeastace anesGuedeeccienus 307 Qutput iles for Monitor HTML soanstsss etctadecensegacaee cave encesvotaceonssexeSeanseaeesbeeseneteae sce 307 Technical Description of Database Export ccccsseceecseeeceesseeesaeeeessaaeees 309 Add Ons Timetables on Handhelds cccceccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeees 314 10 Lesson Planning and Value Calculation gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Introduction This chapter is not just intended as an introduction but also as a reference manual for the Lesson Planning module and it therefore contains a description of everything required for lesson scheduling All gp Untis users will benefit from the first three sections of the Teachers Work chapter They contain everything required by a timetable scheduler who also is responsible for planning the deployment of teachers The Teacher s Yearly Work feature described in the final section of this chapter is currently used mainly in the Netherlands Many planning functions such as Lesson Comparison or functions for the automatic assignment of teachers are certainly very useful but have been skipped in the initial section covering familiarisation with the system and are described later in the Planning Tools chapter Lesson planning becomes really challenging when lessons are evaluated and weekly perio
18. ES 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 School year Lessons Number of days 282 Number of weeks 41 Number of interruptions 0 Number of days 208 Number of weeks 39 Duration L Group 20 If the first week of school is to begin with week B you can change this under Settings School Data 22 09 2008 J 30 06 2009 v 2 a Weekly Periodicity A 1st school week A B 158 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Lesson Groups By clicking on the lt Lesson Group Calendar gt toolbar icon once you can switch to the weekly display and see when week A and week B are activated over the whole school year 3 Lesson Group Name weekA kg Date Mo 22 9 2008 No lessons Legend id Calendar week 39 Public Holiday Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo September 26 October November December 1 2 3 January February March 2009 jAi May Number of days 282 Number of weeks 41 Number of interruptions 0 Number of days 208 Number of weeks 39 Duration L Group 20 General data Values for Count only school days Value calculation Apply School year Lessons In the example week A is coloured yellow and week B is coloured Colour coding green The colours can be changed by clicking on the icon of the same name This lesson group can now be assigned to the lessons in question see chapter Assigning Lesson Groups to Lessons on
19. In the following example the a classes yellow are assigned to the mechanical engineering department the b classes green to t he electrical engineering department and the c classes red to the structural engineering department 220 gp Untis Department Timetable Department Processing The starting point is an empty timetable In the first figure on the left optimisation has been performed for the electrical engineering department Accordingly only the lessons of those classes belonging to the electrical engineering department are scheduled In our example this is class 2b ME Mechanical Engir v All 2a Class 2a Timetable Kla40 N EE Electrical Enginee E rao Seg Oe a Time range v I 2a J Timetable comparison a 10 Periods week BC LJ Active JO Unscheduled pers 44 9 2000 6 7 2001 z SE Structural Engine si ME Mechanical Engineer x Monday 3 2a Class 2a Timetable Kla40 EEA 2a 2b 2s 2a I E 82 ot a Ra 2 oe TI amp Pale Time range Timetable comparison T 2 H D Periods week E Active SE Structural Engine 4 4 ws TT c Teone e PE ohn roe EE SE Structural Engineeri gt fi nn a 2p os a rr i rttw fo ee kal A E O l l m we e ga ime range Timetable comparison Y Tt a E B Oaie Emm nel H 4 ow ms r I M_M a eJ
20. Teacher Class Subject 5 2 Gauss 4 80 2 nder Curie 4 166 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Lesson Groups Now launch optimisation by selecting Scheduling Optimisation The two lessons are now scheduled for Tuesday 7th period This is displayed in the details window You can also display the name of the lesson group in the timetable in order to A L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Ti see which lesson is taking place atwhat GARAT time Curie TX CL 4 Tip Display simultaneous lessons You will have a clear overview in the school year timetable if you order simultaneous lessons next to each other The procedure is described below Check the box Timetable Set F Label couplings with a dot tings Layout 2 Separate C Label locked periods with a mark rr periods in case of clash Separate periods in case of clash wa Setti ngs L Sort periods Select Timetable Settings Per Cover Plannina iod window New f e d a n d C h e C k 3 Layout 01 Period window Contents fields of a teaching period olx Lesson group Type of Timetable Clas hh ay dents OT Arrange the subject and lesson group boxes under C Start and end time one another oe Scale 5 1 Lesson Groups 167 The periods will now be displayed together with the name of the lesson group Tip Lesson group colours Just as for master data and lessons colours can be defined
21. _ 50 00 1 gs 100 00 100 00 1 000 1 000 100 00 100 00 Values from the Class Perspective We have so far considered values from the teacher perspective From the class perspective different values can result for coupled lessons depending on the configuration and extent of the coupling Without factors Please open the Demo2 gpn file and deactivate all factors Now look at lessons number 76 and 77 for class 1a under Lessons Value Calculator Classes without Subject Factor without Teacher Factor o l I without Class Factor Date limits for classes or membership of a subject group that you enter with the Multi week timetable module can affect the values described below Examples 113 Two different values are frequently shown for class lessons in the grid view and the form view when lessons are coupled The grid view will only show the value of the lesson from the perspective of the teacher who is actually displayed whereas the form view will show how many proportionate number of value units the current class costs the school The first of the following two examples shows a case where the values in the grid view and the form view match The second example demonstrates a case where this is not so Teacher Hugo takes a total of four classes for lesson number 76 4i Class 1a Gauss L Cla SEE M 0xK BY Dem OA oe oo Oe e Lesson number Lessons Timetable Codes Values Value or Fact
22. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ai Callas A2a 12 12 Callas RA2a Nobe RA2a Cer Ada Cer R2a Cer R2a New R2a PH 2b New Gym iji Tip Carrying over periods from the lessons window Ifyou have already entered periods in a lessons window and now wish to transfer these to the to year s planning in terms use the mouse to mark the Total column enter a and confirm with lt Return gt Year s Planning in Terms PEG 1a1b Arist SH2 DS 1b3b Ande PL PEB F 2b 2a Rub SH1 TX D 2b 2a Curie CLPL GA 2a2b New R2a ARM 3a 3b Callas R3aF lt mT CH M 2a 2b Callas R2ak T 1a1b Ande PLCL b Arist F GA 2a 2b New R2a M 3a 3b Callas R3aF HTT NN WO WN IN Manual Allocation You can now enter which lessons are to be held with whatever number of periods for the terms that have not been blocked with 3 195 196 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Year s Planning in Terms Entering weekly periods per term You must enter the number of weekly periods for each term in the appropriate column of the left window pane Two periods of Bio take place in terms 1 and 2 and four periods in f Example terms 3 and 4 Five periods of D take place all year while E is held for six and four periods 3 Year s Planning in Terms DS T 1a 1b Andei PL CL PEG I 1a 1b Arist F SH2 Arist Rila Arist Rila Callas Ala
23. Aristoteles j 46 1 000 25 000 28 000 10 363 31 953 Callas Callas i 46 1 000 25 000 28 000 4512 27 252 Nobel Nobel 46 1 000 15 000 18 000 0545 14567 Rub Rubens k 47 1 000 25 000 28 000 4471 29 471 Cer Cervantes i 47 1 000 25 000 28 000 7737 30827 The table columns have the following meanings B Subject In this column enter the subjects or subject groups that that the teacher in question may teach The figure shows that an explicit subject group Science as well as two implicit subject groups PE for PEG and PEB as well as M for all subjects beginning with M have been defined The input here is case sensitive An m entered for Mathematics or Music would be interpreted by gp Untis as a new subject group m Element Rollup Subject AE Teach qual o EE Educa z Subject Level German Tip Element Rollup Element roll up allows you to EEEE pe Geogarty and enter subjects using ees drag amp drop Subject Group 30 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Teachers Work Level Use this column to define the school levels in which the teacher may teach the subject concerned For example entering 1 4 would limit the teacher qualification for this subject for classes at school levels 1 to 4 You can enter the school level in the Class level field on the Class tab under Master Data Cl
24. CH M 2a 2b Callas R2aF 105 1 1a 1b Ande PL CL PEG 1a 1b Arist f SH2 PEB 2b 2a Rubs SH14 TX D 2b 2a Curie CLPL 2a 2b New R2a Arist Rila Arist Rla Callas Rla Callas Rla Nobe Rla Rub Ala Cer Ala Hugo R2a Callas R2a 1 GA MA EN MU AR RE DE BI Deleting weekly periods ANNANN NGA S Use the lt Delete allocated periods gt toolbar icon to delete periods lt Delete allocated that have already been allocated Periods allocated in locked terms periods will not be deleted Excluding lessons from planning Use the lt Exclude lessons from planning gt function to exclude individual lesson from term planning for the year Automatic Allocation Exclude lessons from planning Allocating periods to the individual terms can be performed with a special optimisation procedure If no supplementary entries are made optimisation allocates the periods as evenly as possible over all the available terms 200 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Year s Planning in Terms Optimisation is launched with the lt Optimise gt toolbar icon The figure below displays the allocation of periods for class 1a without any additional entries In this example one term corresponds exactly to one week amp c H Number of Terms 54 CH M 2a 2b Callas R2a F DS T 1a 1b Ande PL CL PEG 1a 1b Arist F SH2 f PEB F 2b 2a Rubs SH1 TX D 2b 2a Curie CL PL 2a 2b New R2a
25. Callas Ala Nobe Ala Rub Ala Cer Ala In schools where one term corresponds exactly to one week the CED allocation could look like this The 8 hours of GEc are to be held in terms 1 to 4 4 periods of lesson number 6 subjects CH MA EN are to be held per term 4 or 6 periods of lesson number 78 subject DS are to be held per term 3 Year s Planning in Terms maf Ou B KK YW R 46 Number of Terms _ Respect the selection in the right pane Periods week aA Sub Cla Tea Am Stude Total Min Max UnSc 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 2 GEc lab Hugo Ala 8 222 CHM 2a 2b Callas R2aF 24 4444 4 4 DS T 1a 1b Ande PL CL 446666666 6 6 DS 1b 3b Ande PL PEB 2b 2a Rubs SH15 TX D 2b 2a Curie CLPL GA 2a 2b New R2a ARM 3a 3b Callas R3aF PEG 3a 3b Arist F SH2 lt 4 2 The UnSc column displays the current number of unscheduled periods for this lesson Year s Planning in Terms Minimum Maximum number of periods per term The desired minimum and maximum number of periods per week can be specified in the Min Max column This is particularly important for automatic scheduling but can also serve as a means of checking manual scheduling If the lesson with the subject GEc is to be taught for at least 4 but for no more than 6 periods per week you can enter the value 4 6 in the Min Max field Year s Planning in Terms Ou
26. Curie 1 CL Mia coupling line 1 2 New Tx la CL Fila AS 118 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Examples Only by looking at the details window or at the Values tab for lesson number 86 do we see the reason for this As explained in the previous section the grid view only takes account of the teacher in the first coupling line In the case of lesson 86 this is teacher Curie Teacher Newton also contributes two value units to this lesson resulting in a total of 4 which corresponds to the entry on the values tab The entries in the total line for the Teacher Subject and Class es columns do not reflect the number of lines in the grid view where entries have been made but the number of coupling lines where this is the case Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable 119 Value Calculation with the Multi Week Timetable Module The multi week timetable module enables you to put date limits on lessons in a variety of ways This has a considerable effect on value calculation as the examples on the following pages demonstrate In this context it is particularly important to realise that value calculation relevant at a time when no lesson scheduling has taken place e g when assigning subjects uses the number of weeks in which lessons can be held on at least one day i e when lessons can theoretically take place It is of no importance how many school free days occur in such a w
27. Finally select those reduction reasons for which all reduction reasons should be deleted from the beginning of the new school year Clicking lt OK gt closes the window and makes the modifications to the reductions Updating from older versions of gp Untis to gp Untis 2007 or later As already mentioned subjects where the i code has been set are automatically adopted as reduction reasons However this can lead to problems because the i flag is also used on other occasions Subject Subject Group Alias name M Main subject Reduction C F Fringe period C 2 More than once a day C 0 Optional subject C G Not a fringe period Double periods C D Respect double periods C E Double pers span breaks C P No break supervision before after For this case there is the Reduction flag on the Subect tab under Master Data Subjects If you open a file from an earlier version with version 2007 or later all subjects with the i flag will also have this flag set i e gp Untis assumes initially that they are reductions Remove the Reductions flag from all those subjects where the i flag was set for another reason These subjects will continue to be ignored but they will not be used for reductions All subjects from which you remove the Reductions flag will be deleted from the list of reduction reasons Caution The Reduction code is only used for u
28. Lesson Groups Lesson Table Syllabus In the case of classes you can distinguish between different school types by entering lesson tables Classes Cla HED x did FRe liza 340 Class Timetable Values C Marked m Ch Students Class teacher 12 Male C Ignore fi CI Lock fx CI Don t Print N Time Requests Lessons table Class 2a Hugo Full name Previous year s name Text Dept Description Class level Statistical Code Regular school A lesson table is a list of subjects with an indication of the minimum and maximum number of periods that should be taught in the corresponding classes On the one hand it serves to check whether the classes of one school type have the desired number of lessons in the subjects and subject groups defined on the other hand you can use the lesson tables to create lessons automatically Not all subjects need to be entered in the lesson table just those that you wish to check The distribution of periods in accordance with the lesson table applies to all the classes for which you have entered this particular lesson table in the master data You can access the lesson tables via Lessons Lesson Table Syl labus The lesson table window is divided into two parts on the left you can see alist of your lesson tables on the right the table of subjects of the currently selected lesson table The table of
29. Lessons Timetable Codes Values Lesson number a 2 Petiods week Alias name Te Subject Group Students M Students F For element Gauss 0 Total v a Gans Students Min 13 0 Petiods week Students Max 22 020 Value units week C AAEE oe I ma tovt Ef L No CIl Te Per Teacher Subject Class es Subjectroom Home Room Yale Line value Eff time range Value Les Groups Assi Les Grp Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable Les Groups field Only the assigned or active lesson group that is entered in the Assi Les Grp column is relevant If you now delete the group factor for the H1 lesson group i e enter a 1 in the relevant field the value for the lesson will change once more It is now 0 976 This value takes the time limitation for the lesson group into account 20 weeks including school holidays and is calculated in the same way as a lesson time limitation 2 weekly periods 20 length of the time limitation in weeks 41 weeks in the school year 0 976 A time limitation on the lesson overrides any time limitation for the 3 Lesson Groups Gro x U A l i HHD xZ 4 ff TE 2 al H1 Groups C Marked m Change C Ignore i 1 000 Factor itenupton To C Lock x Time range From 1st half of the Year Full name 1 2 To Name Full name Marked m
30. New Gauss ETETA up Gauss Curie Thursday Hugo Callas Callas Friday Arist Re Jer Saturday New Ander Reports Settings M New Newton Of ai 8 45 19 40 i039 1130A 1225 a00 855 3 501 114 401235 ea a a a Tuesday J Bas J Wednesday Thursday Friday a J lat _ Gauda Bas aa _1 Settings A Emergency list Access report selection via Reports Selection In the Break Supervision section there are additional output possibilities available for individual days or a weekly summary Presentation and Printing 253 ER Weekly summary Break supervisions a a Az MeT Arist Calas Pub fh Hugo 3 Report selection BC Loading Statistics J Classes I Teachers B Rooms B Free Periods Classes E Teachers E Rooms W Students SC Subject Periods Report B Classes W Teachers W Subjects Time S Periods Report W Teachers Subjects W Subjects Teache amp Ma Break Corridors W Teachers B Days E Weekly summary Th 6 Callas Frei Aist Rub Mew Fr z Nobel Fr 3 Rub Ander New J Substitution Statement B Canc Days g Cover Overview SC Exam Schedule J Teacher Exam Schedule Display in Timetable You can display and print a teacher s supervisions together with his her timetable Open the timetable settings for a teacher s timetable and on the General tab click on the
31. enter a 1 in the Fr field and a 5 in the To field Periods week You can also specify in the Fr and To fields a range in the week that interests you If for example you wish to exclude periods on Mondays enter Tu 1 in the Fr field so that the report will only include lessons starting in the first period on Tuesdays Date section Values 101 This is where you can limit the dates of the lessons listed in the report gt Calendar week Only the calendar week set in the date input fields will be included gt Total schoolyear The complete schoolyear will be taken into account You are free to set the dates yourself In this case the selection made in the selection fields just described will be revoked Clicking on the lt Details gt button in the print selection dialogue displays the Print details dialogue window The following entries can be made gt With yearly totals as well This field determines whether the entry Target per yr on the values tab under lessons is taken into consideration If this box is checked the plan values the actual lessons and the difference between the two are output gt Number of timetables per page Use this field to limit the number of timetables per page In the teachers report entering a value of 2 in this field will result in the lessons of a maximum of two teachers being output on one page
32. gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable Please delete the time limitation that you entered for lesson 58 and enter a time limitation from 02 12 to 23 01 for class 4 The shortest time limitation for this lesson is now that of class 4 but the interruption for the lesson group is taken into consideration The lesson now has the following value 2 weekly periods 5 length of the time limitation in weeks 41 weeks in the school year 0 244 3 Gauss L Tea Ex ous AED Ara De LODA os FRC al Lesson number Lessons Timetable Codes Yalues A 58 v Value or Factor ine yalue factor For el t 0 244 Value units week Gauss Gauss Target per yr 13 0 Periods week 18 044 Value units week Factor Subject 1 050 Class es 1 000 Jig eee L No Cl Te Per Teacher Subject Class es Subjectroom Home Room Yalue From To Value Les Groups Assi Les Grp Eff time range 13 00 5 if 4 1 0 0 8524 1 z Fi Gauss 3 4500 4 500 17 9 286 Gauss ares 17 9 28 6 Gauss eg Fs lela Gauss U fou 312 31 0 Gauss J 17 9 28 6 At the end of this manual you will find a table listing how time limitations on lessons lesson groups and master data elements influence and override one another Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable 139 Periodicity All the time limitation examples shown so far assume that lessons take place once a wee
33. 2007 v 29 02 2008 v 95 Name Full name From To Lockec Days Parent term School year Totalschoolyear 17 9 07 286 08 94 Term 1 10 07 29 208 95 School year 143 144 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable Value Calculation without Subject Factor without Teacher Factor without Class Factor Termi 1 10 29 2 v Total school year 17 9 28 6 Termi 1 10 29 2 Count only school days For the sake of simplicity all factors should again be deactivated Now create a new lesson in this term teacher Gauss teaches 3 periods of mathematics to class 1b Since the lesson is treated in the same way as lessons during the whole school year this results in a value of 3 as you can see from the figure Gauss L Tea HDX Lessons Timetable Codes Values Lesson number B3 B 3 Periods week Subject Group Gauss Teacher Students M Students F For element Subject Home Room udents 0 Total Students Min A Gauss Class es Les Groups Gauss 16 0 Periods week Aei Students Max 20 967 Value units week Text Student Course L No ClTe Per Teacher Subject Class es Subject room Home Room Value Les Groups AssiLes Grp Eff time range Value Total for Gauss 3 16 00 6 6 1 5 1 1 1 6 111 448 6 Gauss MA 3a R3a 4 500 17 9 288 cans GA 3b Ra New lesson only exists 7 9 28 6 auss GA 4 Ps 12 231 0 in the
34. 242 Number of weeks 41 Duration L Group 33 The interruption in the lesson group is then displayed in the form view Lesson Groups s1 Lesson Groups Gro HHD st 8 Fe alate iz Groups C Marked m Change F C Ignore i 1 000 Factor C Lock fx Time range 229 From anomalous time perioc Full name 3 6 To The following figure contains an example of an irregular lesson group CD The technical draughtsmen in classes 10A and 12A have one week of lessons every 2 to 4 weeks 3i Lesson Groups Gru BD x S ag o wR e Factor vWeek amp WeekC WeekB Week D To Td01 12 9 77 19 9 21 6 1 000 26 9 28 6 1 000 410 1811 1 000 12 9 14 6 1 000 199 21 6 1 000 26 9 28 6 1 000 26 9 1811 1 000 O00 00 NOOOOOOOoO NOOOOOOOoO NOOOOOO NOOOOOO Im134 Industrial mechanic 134 3 Lesson Group Name Technical draughtsmen 104 124 No lessons Breaks Holiday Date Weekend fa yy Calendar week Public Holiday LESSIG E Interruption Different week 27 28 29 30 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 a ao 3 28 29 30 25 26 27 General data Values for Count only school days Value calculation Apply School year Number of days 320 Number of weeks 46 Number of interruptions 10 Lessons Number of days 226 Number of weeks 46 Duration L Group 15 161 162 gp Untis Multi Week Timetab
35. 439 2 10 22 1 S502 Pst Di epee e MAMo 4 420 17 9 28 6 The appendix contains a table that you can refer to when using different time limitations to see which are used for value calculation CZB Lesson number 2 in the Demo2 gpn file is used here as an example This is a coupled lesson with two teachers Rubens and Aristote Dea les and two classes 2a and 2b without Subject Factor without Teacher Factor without Class Factor For reasons of simplicity teacher class and subject factors are not considered in this example 3 Classes Cla MFO Ke std RUR The following date limits are now entered for the classes under Master Data Classes 340 Gisss Timetable Vaues fOr Class 2a from 01 11 to 28 02 and for class sae Students 2b from 22 09 to 30 05 In this case the Fie 12 Male shortest time limitations are those for class C Dont Print N Time Requests 16 Female 2a This period of 18 weeks including school holidays is used in the calculation of lesson number 75 Class 2a Hugo Full name Time range 1 11 From 28 2 To Text Bas Description Ctaticheal Cade Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable This results in the following value 3 weekly periods 18 41 distribution time factor 1 317 3 Rubens L Tea aAA w vVBFOK BYR he ORF RB 8 Fao Tee Lessons Timetable
36. 855 950 1045 1140 1235 13 30 14 25 In the lower half of the window use the cursor to select those breaks for which you wish to assign supervision for the selected area Now click on the lt Supervision gt button The 2 symbol will now be displayed in the selected cells to indicate that the supervisions have in principle been scheduled but that no supervising teacher has yet been assigned These supervisions are called vacant supervisons Repeat this process for all supervision areas You can deactivate unnecessary supervisions by selectign them and clicking on the lt No Supervision gt button Specify Supervision Length In principle the length of each supervision is automatically taken from the general timetable Settings Timetable You can however modify these entries manually in order to give a special rating to not particularly pleasant supervision areas and or breaks or in order to add the missing supervision period before the first lesson Vacant supervisions 243 244 gp Untis Break Supervision Specify Supervision Areas To do this simply check the selection box Minutes Now select the area for the supervision before the first lesson and enter the vaule 20 minutes The displayed total of supervison minutes to be scheduled changes accordingly from 490 to 550 and 3 Break Supervisions Corridor Teacher Bas v TT portrait layout
37. 8yY Se De LOUN 6 soa 8 Lesson number Lessons Timetable Codes Values 25 2 000 Value or Factor Line value factor For element 1 073 Value units week New v Newton Target per yr amam L No Cite Per__ Teach Subjec Class e Subjec Home Double From To Value Line value Subj factor Class factor Value A Total f 3 26 00 10 ie 0 1 1 1 0 2 11 New ER New ma 110 29 2 2 000 2 New PH 1 000 2 New PH i 1 000 C Count only school days 126 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable Value Calculation C without Subject Factor C without Teacher Factor C without Class Factor While the fixed value overrides all factors including the number of weekly periods the date limit remains effective This means that the value is calculated as follows fixed value lesson weeks weeks in the school year 2 22 41 1 073 Entering the fixed value preceded by an equals sign means that it is an absolute value that is taken exactly as it is i e it also overrides the date limits 5 Newton L Tea mex w JAHD x BYR Le SEO caf oa HR Lesson number 25 For element a v Newton l L No Cl Te Per Teach Subjec Class e Subjec Home Double From To Yalue Line value Subj factor Class facte Value a 3 26 00 10 10 10 5 0 1 1 1 0 10 10 32 961 22 11 New GA 1 050 1 000 23 e m
38. B KK YW gt C Respect the selection in the right pane 46 Number of Terms ae Cla Tea Rm Stude Total ai M 2a 2b Calls R2aF DS T 1a 1b Ande PL CL PEG 1a 1b Arist F SH2 DS 1b 3b Ande PL PEB 2b 2a Rub SH14 lt M Please note that with term planning for the year the number of weekly periods entered under Lessons Classes or in any other lessons view has no relevance in this planning phase In the following example 2 periods of the lesson with subject GEc are to be held each week The column entry is 2 2 If a value greater than 2 is entered for a week the number will be displayed red with warning that there is a discrepancy between the two input values ak 3 Year s Planning in Terms Qa B KK Y T x amp 4 Number of Terms _ Respect the selection in the right pane Periods week e Tea Rm Stude Total Min Max UnSc 1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2 Sub Cla 4 GEc 1a1b Hugo Rla 220 2 2 2 2 245 2 2 2 CH M 2a 2b Callas R2aF 46 42 DST 1a 1b Ande PLCL 68 34 PEGI 1a 1b Anst F SH2 34 lt 22 34 197 198 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Year s Planning in Terms tae Lock Terms Week overview per term The right window pane of Year s Planning in Terms provides an overview of how the periods are allocated over the individual weeks Here you can see the period totals for the individual e
39. C Use alias Lesson number Footnote reference Special text Description O Time en After clicking lt OK gt to confirm your timetable should look something like the following see figure below left group Break supervision abe 5 ETET rom Pee lessons If you have assigned different colours to the various corridors in the master data they will be displayed in the timetable correspondingly 5 New Newton Isaac Timetable Tea1 ARA eo aga 2 HTML Output New rjg Time range Timetable compe a Periods week H d The aa supe rvision reports Print selection can be output as Teacher 1 10 HTML via print PS ie el sel a selection HTML 4 m 2 m m S ee e one seel output with the info 5 m timetable is also a possible see u E o chapter Info Timetable Interaction Interaction with other Modules and Functions The folowing section deals briefly with the way break supervision interacts with other subject areas Please refer to the appropriate chapters or to other manuals for more detailed information Terms Timetable Break supervision scheduling is fully integrated with the Terms Timetable module This means that you can create a break supervision schedule for each term When opening a period the supervision plan of the mother term is valid Cover Planning If a teacher is absent when he she is due to perform supervision a break supervi
40. Calculation and Multi Week Timetable Please look at lesson number 58 for teacher Gauss This lesson with a value of 2 000 is not currently assigned to a lesson group Assigning the lesson to the lesson group H1 results in the value of 3 Gauss L Tea aox cus AED BYE De SOOM aoa HBS I on number Lessons Timetable Codes Values 58 2 Periods week Alias name Te Subject Group Gauss Teacher Room Students M For element Ga Subject Hat Gausd s 4 Ciass el 0 Total Gauss Students Min 13 0 Periods week ee Students Max 23 020 Value units week Text ee Caa PV wc wets tion ine taut z L No Cl Te Per Teach Class Subjec Home Double From To Value Line value Subj factor Class factc Value Eff time range Totalf 313 00 5 5s h l4 h lo 5 5 13 500 5 38 4 Gauss 3a R3a 4 500 1 105 1 000 4 500 17 9 26 6 aa 4 2 h Gauss GA 3b Ra 14 1 050 1 000 1 000 17 9 28 6 ss Bi caussca 4 Ps1 O1 1 050 1 000 2 000 Da 286 z 61 24 GaussMA 4 1 105 1 000 4 000 17 9 28 6 the lesson changing to 1 000 There is an indication that a time limitation is present due to the lesson group but it is not the distribution time factor arising from this that is multiplied with the number of weekly periods but the factor of 0 5 from the lesson group Please note that you can enter more than one lesson group in the Gauss L Tea Ek es THEN Ayra Dea SOOH a WR e
41. Codes Values 2 Value or Factor Line yalue factor Padi 1 317 Velo uea Rub 3 Calendar of the Tye Target per y pats ona eu Facio f Calend Subject 0 955 Classfes Teacher 1 000 aaa Rub ges Rub gas Rub Rub Rub Rub Rub Rub gas Rub General data s School year Number of days 286 Number of weeks 41 Results Lessons Number of days 120 Number of weeks 18 0 439 N 18741 20 43904 If you now define time limitations for the lesson e g 01 10 to 30 03 26 weeks these date limits will apply to the whole coupling All other time limitations will be overridden The calculation will now use a different distribution time factor 3 weekly periods 26 41 distribution time factor 1 902 Rubens L Tea ES M FOx 8YS Dea 00 Ff RB 8 Fee Lesson number Lessons Timetable Codes Values Rub lt v Value or Factor al Lige value factor F ae 1 902 Value units week Rub Calendar of the Rubens Target per y 28 0 Periods week Date M Factor m w Calenda S02 Value unks wook Subject 0 955 Class es Teacher 1 000 September L No Cl Te Per Teach Subjec Class Subjec Home Doubk From To Value Line value Subj factor Class tact Value Saba 2 b220 Ru 2b 2a SHI R2b 0955 1 000 2007 November 6 22 3 Rub 3a 3b SHI Ra 0 955 1 000 De
42. Count only school days or not the values of the periodic lessons will be calculated in different ways If the option has not been selected i e if the whole school year H Count only school days including school holidays is to be taken into account the value that the lesson would have if it took place every week Is simply divided by the number of weeks in this example two type A and type B Both lesson number 18 and lesson number 40 have the value 1 000 However if the Count only school days is active the actual number M Count only school days of weeks with lessons is used Lesson number 18 is given the value 1 053 and lesson 40 the value 0 947 As usual the distribution time factor is used to calculate these values For lesson number 40 this is e g 18 weeks of lessons 38 weeks in the school year 0 4737 Hugo L Tea mef e JAED ZY Lea JONA S HRS LS ry Lesson number Lessons Timetable Codes Values 40 o 2 Peniods week _ Alias name Subject Group Hugo Teacher o Room i Students M For element GEc Subject R3a Home Room Students F Hugo 3a Class es oddwe Les Groups j Lo i Students Min Hugo Lt 20 0 Petiods week Seon oa Students Max 12 365 Value units week Text SEn DA ia l Recoctation ina hawt zl O L No Cite Per Teacher Subjeci Class Subject room Home Room Vali Value Les Groups Assiles Grp Eff time range 4
43. Couplings with Time Limitations If the individual elements of a coupling are limited to certain dates the shortest time limitations apply to the whole coupling This could be atime limitation on an individual element or if there are overlaps the average of the overlaps as shown in the figure Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We A BEERE c eea 192021 22 23 24 25 26 zia 29 30 31 B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 smmm 2021 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 manim 202 a Nes eas e 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 mmp 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 128 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable Tip Display time limitations in lessons The actual time limitations used for the lesson can be viewed either in the school year calendar or in the grid view of any lessons e Grid view via the lt Grid adj lt Grid adjustment gt toolbar icon Adjustment The source of each time limitation is indicated in parentheses I means a time limitation arising from the lessons c points toa time limitation due one of the classes and g means atime limitation due to a group of lessons L Mo Cl Te Per Teach Subjec Class Subjec Home Double From Ta Value Eff time range Total f 3 113 00 5 Se Soe eS E sama MA O Ra o o o 0 333 1 10 1810 c 4a J12 J1 Ra 1 41 240 2 2 0
44. Delete ESY er E Arist EEJ 2 228 gp Untis Department Timetable Importing Dept Data into School File Importing Department Data into School File After you have created the individual departments in your timetable the department files are given to the planner for the overall timetable whose job it is to integrate them back into the overall school file Please re open the demo gpn file If you have not entered a 53 AES PER DER licence key and were not able to save your changes you will have to re define which classes are assigned to which departments in the class Class 2b Andersen master data Class 3a Aristotle D117 Class 3b Callas Class 4 Nobel TE Now select Modules Department Timetable Import and click on the lt Import all Departments gt button Cover Planning Department Timetable Import Multiple Terms i Department D1 Student Timetable i Classes 3 Course Scheduling j Lessons 11 F C dep_test D1 Department Timetable Export es vai Break Supervisions Merge scheduled lesiins L Info Timetable C include teacher data i TN D1 gpn Import all Departments a This imports all department files into the overall file Now open a class lessons window and a class timetable Importing Dept Data into School File 229 You will see in the class lessons window that all the changes made inthe D1 gpn file have been carried over Deleted lesso
45. J J S lt In the centre timetable further optimisation has been performed with the selection of the mechanical engineering department The periods of the department first scheduled are not affected by this Please note that the LUK lesson Tu 5 that is assigned to the ME department through the first coupling class 2a has also been scheduled in this step In the final timetable the remaining periods have been scheduled by selecting the SE department The periods of the other departments already set have again not been changed Department Processing 221 Cross departmental resources Please also note that rooms used for lessons of various departments are considered to be cross departmental resources The scheduling of cross departmental resources is performed according to availability i e according to the principle of first come first served In the example above the gym SH1 is a cross departmental resource SE Structural Engine vw P35 SH1 Sports Hall ME Mechanical Engineer b EE Electrical Engineerindi fe Bk ia x EF SE Structural Engineerin feu Z a Time range SH1 vis ME Mechanical Engir All z aiff Sports Hall Mf copy EE Electrica 12 Periods week eal El erin AF i 12 or or Engine v Stet feet 11 Sports Hall ME cay ck shera pat eet El Ot lt gt sy ome A SH1 a4 Time range 39
46. Lines Columns and Teachers selection fields are not available in the lesson matrix Lesson comparison between two terms amp Lesson You invoke this type of lesson comparison from a lesson window Comparison e g Lessons Classes via the lt Lesson comparison gt toolbar icon This icon is only active when you have defined terms T Those fields are always compared that you have activated with the justment lt Grid adjustment gt function After clicking on the lt Lessons comparison gt icon a dialogue window is displayed in which you can specify which term the current term is to be compared with Otherwise the window of this dialogue is identical with that of the lesson Select two colours for the ditferences comparison between two files o Tema Foreground Lesson comparison Please select a term for the comparison Term 25 9 30 6 O TemB Background Differences between the two terms are displayed on a line Aaaah e aii by line basis with the fields activated in the relevant view being compared Please note that the details window is Da also included in the comparison C Only show different columns C Only show different rows Aristotle f Lesson comparison Term 2 Term 1 Planning Tools 75 Seles Cl Te Per Teacher Subject Classless Subjectroom Home Room Double pers From To Line value Value 22 3 Arist PEG 2b2a SH2 R2a 22 3 Arist PEG 2b2a SH2 R2a Ey Aris
47. Lock X Ignore i From To Factor d 179 286 0 463 17 9 286 1 000 oO go m 17 9 1 2 dl d d Ei dl O 42 286 F d oO Alias name Room For element lesson group Enter a time limitation for the lesson from 04 12 to 28 02 Only this time limitation will be taken into consideration when the value is calculated It is now 2 weekly periods 13 length of the time limitation in weeks 41 weeks in the school year 0 634 L No CI Te Per Total f 3 13 00 5 5 5 4 4 1 0 3 4 Gauss MA 3a R3a 4 500 Please look at the figure at the top of the following page GA Subject P DM Students F EX 4 cs Hi Les Groups sales Gauss E Students Min 13 0 Periods week ie Students Max 21 972 Value units week Text Teacher Subject Class es Subjectroom Home Room Value Line value Eff time range Value Ma Te Subject Group Students M Student Course Les Groups Assi Les Grp 5 12 452 1 1 1793 286 4 500 17 9 286 1 000 17 9 12 0 H1 17 9 286 4 000 17 9 26 6 2 000 135 136 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable Maok HHD x Bre De ODA od oa AR Lessons Timetable Codes Values Gauss L Tea 3 Lesson Groups Gro Gauss v AED sh Shef Bir Lesson number z Groups 58 C Marked m C Ignore fi C Lock
48. Mail Multiple Terms Autolnfo Internet If your Internet connection has a proxy server you can enter the necessary settings on the Internet tab under Settings Miscellaneous Proxyserver Direct connection Proxy from system settings Proxy Host Port Sending Substitution Messages by SMS E mail 291 3 Teachers Tea E ja x x The colleagues telephone numbers can fm m a u a be entered in the mobile telephone iO KB 21 a co 8 number field in the teachers master data Mame Full name E Mail AEE telephone number O Gaus Gauss qauss provider Corn 4306991 234567 Mew Newton The format for entering the mobile Hugo Huge telephone number e g country code area code number depends on the individual provider Please contact your nearest gp Untis partner if you require assistance The actual transmission of SMS and or e mail starts when you click the lt Messages gt toolbar icon If this icon is not displayed right click on the main toolbar to activate the Info Timetable toolbar You will now see a list beginning from the set calendar date showing all changes in the timetable Substitution messa ges LTeacher SMS E Mail sent LT ext el 23 9 06 3 Per stitution 4 Fi 38 8 06 4 Per F 47 Geman Rib T Tu gp Untis automatically generates a text for each substitution which you can Ere ETN IR chen if you wi
49. Miscellaneous Settings HTML E Mail Multiple Terms Autolnfo Internet Auto save Directories Timetable Customise Value Calculation Warnings Value Calculation C without Subject Factor 3 Decimal Places C without Teacher Factor C without Class Factor Value Calculation Yearly Values _ Count only school days 1 00 Yearly value 100 The values that now appear in the Value column are calculated as follows factors weekly periods number of weeks in the year Whether school free time is included in the calculation depends on whether the Count only school days option on the Value Calculation tab under Settings Miscellaneous has been activated Caution It must again be stressed that for value calculation all weeks in which lessons can theoretically take place have the same value irrespective of whether they have school free days or not The Demo2 gpn file is again used to illustrate this Select the yearly values option on the Value Calculation tab under Settings Miscellaneous Deactivate all factors as well Now view lesson number 4 for teacher Newton As the factors are now ignored the calculated value for this lesson is 41 0 This value is the product of the number of weeks in the school year 3 Newton L Tea JAHD BY De LONA Ch a Re Lesson number Lessons Timetable I Codes Values 4 Value or Factor ine value
50. Multiple Terms Autolnfo Auto save Directories Timetable Customise ValueCae under Setti Ngs Miscellaneous When Type of file Path sending e mails gp Untis checks this Data fles gyn C Programme gp Untis folder and attaches any files it finds with Version 14 x files apu i Back up files the corresponding short name of the teachers that are being sent an e mail HTML files Teacher Holmes therefore receives not ip T l just his timetable data but also the file NESNESE Holmes pdf sending Timetables by E mail 289 Hol Prof Holmes Sherlock Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Hol jpg Hol pdf Wat Prof watson Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Wat pdf Including attachments to all teachers students In addition to timetables you can also send any files you wish to all teachers and students To do this first create a folder teacher for teachers and student for students containing the files that you wish to send These two folders must be in the directory specified for E Mail attachments on the Directories tab under Settings Miscellaneous ee nes Wat prot watson Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday rules of the house pdf 1 47 MB 4 My Computer rules of the house pdf 290 gp Untis Info limetable Sending Substitution Messages by SMS E mail Sending Substitution Mess
51. SS Me 565 8 FFF oe A 2iNobel 1iCallas 4 3 Cer 2Rub 2Hugo 4 Gaus 2a E9 Fie Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Type a question for hep M F X 2iNobel 1 Callas 4 2iHugo 2 Hugo 4iNew 1 Gaus 24i z i Snagtt ey Window Mg B gt gt 4 0 3 nd Review 2Nobel 1 Callas 6Hugo 3 Cer 2 Hugo 2 Hugo 4 2 Gaus 2 a Al X f RE GEG BI 1a 2 Nobel 5 Rub 5 Arist 2 Hugo S Arist 2 Cer 2 Callas 2 Curie 2 Curie 1b 2 Nobel 6 Rub VAnder 2 Hugo 6 Arist 2 Cer Callas 1 Curie 2 Curie 2 Nobel 1 Callas 4 Cer 4 Cer 2 Hugo 2 Hugo 4 New iNew 2 Cer 2 New 1 Callas 2 Curie 2 Nobel 1 Callas 5 Callas 2 Rub 2 Hugo 5 New 1 New 2 Cer 2 New 2 Callas 2 Curie 1 Curie 2 Nobel 1 Callas 4 3 Cer 2 Rub 2 Hugo 4 Gauss 2 Cer 2iNew 2 2 Nobel 1 Callas 4 2 Hugo 2 Hugo New 1 Gauss 2 Cer 3 New 2 7 1 Curie 1 Curie 42 Nobel 1 Callas 4 Hugo 1 Cer 2 Hugo 2 Hugo 4 2 Gauss 2 Rub 2 Arist 1 2 Curie 2 Hugo 2 Cer Gauss 2 Callas 18 19 M 4 gt ot Sheet1 Sheet2 Sheet3 Ready You can follow the example below yourself using the Demo2 gpn file In the upper section of the window you can set which pe rea EE master data elements you wish to display in the lines Classles Subiect Teacher v columns and the individual cells Ra Nobel The figure on the next page displays the lesson matrix H lite ie from the Demo2 gpn file The lines indicate the subject the colum
52. Shortcut from the context menu The shortcut target must be the gp Untis program An additional parameter must be entered in order for the application to run in info mode gp Untis in Info Mode E Window Groups 297 298 gp Untis Info Timetable gp Untis in Info Mode gt Select lt Browse gt and Create Shortcut create the shortcut to ret prog fies E T hers t h e f l e U n t l S 5 e X e sabre of the item A te rn at j V e y y O u C a n rogram Files gp Untis 2008 Untis exe enter the path manually aiea Provided you did not change the default path when you installed gp Untis the path oe PE for the 2008 application version should look like C program files gp Untis 2008 Untis exe In order for the application to run in info mode the path to the desired file and the name of the window group must be added This could look as follows C gp Untis Demo_Info gpn Infol The complete path is therefore as follows C program files gp Untis 2008 Untis exe C gp Untis Demo_Info gpn Infol where C gp Untis Demo_Info gpn is the name including path of the file that is to be displayed and Infol is the name of the window group that is to be used for display Please note that there is no space before the Infol parameter If you did not install gp Untis in the default path proposed you must enter the path you defined instead of C program files gp Untis 2008 Untis exe gt Click on lt Con
53. Teacher Classes Rooms Students Generally the total number of periods to be allocated mri TRE are distributed evenly over the weeks available Unimportant Important Students should have the same number of lessons Eve a ene ems pele per week e g 30 and not 25 one week and 35 the A Observe Plan week next Observe Min Max 0 Min Periods per week On the other hand it is often desirable if a a teacher can hold his or her lessons in a block e g 20 periods a week instead of 2 periods each week 0 Max Periods per week Meeting weekly targets Threshold values for the corresponding weekly targets ahs for individual master data elements can be entered in the Min Max and Ideal columns of the right window pane You can thus specify that e g a certain teacher should ideally teach 15 periods per week Year s Planning in Terms fc fe BK x Gm Gm xx VT x Casses Penods week Name Total UnSc Mi ideal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 15 F OO 37 37 37 37 35 36 37 35 38 37 E 36 37 36 36 36 39 Sr 204 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Year s Planning in Terms Taking account of Min Max You can enter general minimum and maximum weekly values for master data elements A minimum of 30 periods per week and a maximum of 32 for classes means all classes should not be taught for fewer than 30 periods
54. Test school DEMO For demo and test only Region Country School year Fr To 22 09 2008 w 30 06 2009 w 2 Weekly Periodicity A w 1st school week A B School number Type of school C Activate daily time grid Lesson Groups 157 Creating Lesson Groups You create lesson groups under Lessons Lesson Groups Lesson groups are created just like master data elements with name and GPF DER full name In the example two lesson 418 D amp 8 2 groups wA and wB have been roups created C Marked fm C Ignore i 1 000 Factor C Lock Time range In the case of lesson group wA the Week A box has been checked while the Week B box has been checked for WB 22 9 O 29 306 O 229 306 Clicking on the lt Calendar gt toolbar icon shows you when lessons with this lesson group will be held In the example of lesson group WA week A lessons take place every fortnight beginning with the first week of school School holidays are displayed i Calendar in orange while public holidays are displayed in red Lesson Group Name weekA mef Date Mo 22 9 2008 fa w Calendar week 39 Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr September October November 16 19 22 December HRA 22 January 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 February 16 17 March April 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 May 2 3 14 15 16 17 June
55. Text 2239 3 gp Untis MultiUser The user rights system in the multi user Cover Planning Multiple Terms users may view which department data For Course Scheduling this select Modules MultiUser User Department Timetable Minutes Timetable administration Users and make the Break Supervisions Info Timetable appropriate entries in the Departments Login column gt version allows you to selectively define which gt gt Active users External elements User rights User administration Store in database 235 236 gp Untis Department Timetable Effects on other Modules Departments Departments EDV Sesscsssscsssscsscsssscscsscsssscessssssssssssssssssssssssesssseseseee ID Name Usergroup Last login 1 Administrator Administrator 24 7 2007 11 34 None P 2 Mr Snape timetabler 24 7 2007 11 33 None e T TT If a user now logs in and wishes to select a department from the departments combo field for which he she does not possess the required authorisation a message will be displayed informing that he she is not allowed to switch to the selected department You do not have sufficient rights For the selected department Sp Break Supervision gp Untis Break Supervision Introduction In many schools students must also be supervised during the breaks This often unpopular work must be shared fairly among the available teachers It must
56. The teacher teaches aes mae yalue factor hath of the two 3 000 Yalue units week Sges Ja 4 gt 3 cla v Class 1a Gauss Target per yr AA N Poin de J 2 ol L No ClTe Per Teacher Subject Classfes Subject room Home Room Double pers From To Yalue Line value Subj factor Class factor Value 76 412 Hugo GEc 1a 1b 2a 2b Ria 2 3 Bi cuve TO tat 11 a Wom olan ace Zz a ma 1 050 0 990 0 9 ppa Las sache ubjec Clas i ome E aara Se toe Line value Linetext 2 Teacher Teacher allocat 1 TX 1a 1b Textiles Wi G E DS 3 Metallarbei Holzarbeit G Tip Reorder Coupling Line You can use drag amp drop to move other teachers up in the coupling line 115 116 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Examples With Factors If you now wish to use teacher class and or subject factors the values mentioned above will just change by being multiplied with the relevant factors Lesson number 76 will be used as an example to illustrate how class teacher and subject factors are taken into account This results in the following value 2 weekly periods 1 4 0 990 class factor 1 050 subject factor 1 000 teacher factor 0 520 Class 1a Gauss L Cla a JAHD BYR De CO oh a Re Sl sson number Lessons Timetable Codes Values iad 76 z k o Value or Factor ine value factor For element i 0 520 Value units week a A v Target per yr
57. Total fin Max UnSc 1 Mx ldeal 1 2 3 4 5 11 GEc lal Rila 10 36 10 29 6 CHA 2a2 R2aR2b 10 36 10 1b 182 182 30 7 DS 14 1 PLEL 12 a 2a 197 197 33 read PFR 121 SH CH1 4A AG 4A Ph 195 198 Aa If each term corresponds to one week you must enter the exact number of school weeks in the school year Alternatively you can use the special function Carry school weeks over from calendar A gp Untis term then corresponds to exactly one week He The labelling of the terms can be changed in the window displayed i Settings with the lt Settings gt toolbar icon under Heading Terms Year s Planning in Terms Settings Display in the left pane Respect the selection in the right pane Show the selected elements of the right pane marked in the left pane C Only show selected elements of the right pane in the left pane Do not show selected elements of the right pane in the left pane Heading Terns Number l l C indicate the exceedance of the masimum number Pe of weekly periods time grid holidays o gt tp Ignore the student course choices during the optimization and the creation of the terns Combine courses of one cluster Cancel C itemise the master data by subjects O Name calendar week Number This is the default The first term is number 1 the second term is number 2 etc From To The terms are labelled with the actual dates The actual date can be changed
58. _ Filter _ Filter Hugo Arist Callas Subjer Class es Room Home Room Male 2a 2 2a 3i2b Female Line text seme HI 2a R2a lt Planning Tools 57 Settings By clicking on the lt Settings gt toolbar icon you open a window offering a Settings numerous display possibilities for the lesson matrix Elements of the matrix Settings Subject Groups instead of subjects a sf hee If the element type Subject is in the C Subject Groups lines or columns subject groups can a scsi aad nn be displayed instead of subjects If you ee Sean have defined the element type Dekaan O Display lesson numbers Subject for cells this option will have no effect on the way in which the i A Selection of the week ss Lines E lesson matrix is displayed Figs ye _ Supress empty lines when filtering Group classes by C Consider couplings for the totals gt Lesson Tables School forms instead of classes if the element type class is in the lines or columns lesson tables can be displayed instead of classes In this case the individual cells in the matrix display the lessons of all those classes that are assigned to the corresponding lesson table gt Departments instead of classes if the element type class is in the lines or columns departments can be displayed instead of classes In this case all the classes belonging to the department in question will be displayed in the indiv
59. a blocked period Use this setting to prevent supervisions directly before after a blocked period Automatic scheduling 249 250 gp Untis Break Supervision Automatic scheduling Optimisation L Hy Optimisation All v Cordo B 0 to Break 0 Shortest Brea C Delete poorly placed supervisions Max break superv day This setting determines how important it is to comply with the maximum amount of supervision per day entered in the corresponding field NTP prior to after break supervision It is sometimes desirable to give priority to scheduling supervisions before or after non teaching periods Confirm your input with lt OK gt Optimisation Break supervision optimisation assigns the most suitable teacher to each vacant supervision This means that gt supervisions already allocated will not be modified How which teachers are rated as most suitable for a specific supervision gt is based on the weighting parameters that you set Launch the automatic scheduling of break supervisions with the lt Optimisation gt button You can use the selection box to limit the optimisation to one supervision area Keep the option All for the time being Use the from Break and to Break fields to limit the optimisation to specific breaks For example specifying from break 1 to break 2 would mean that only supervisions before the first and second periods would
60. all terms The following data cannot be held for individual terms i e any change automatically applies to all terms Time grid Weighting settings Reduction reasons and reductions Departments Corridors School year calendar Master Data School Holiday Absence reasons Lesson tables syllabus YYYY YYYY Y View layouts e g master data lessons window timetable Term Overview The term overview window Lessons Term Overview displays all changes to the individual terms in a single window and allows period specific changes to be made Checking the Only differences box results in the display of only those terms where changes have been made Terms 179 The figure shows the term overview for teacher Curie in the first and second halves of the year There are 7 differences between the two terms in the non Z Tere EIEEE Mony dteence teaching periods the lunch break and the periods per day Attributes in different terms Overview Sele Locking terms You can lock terms to protect them from unintentional modifications Name Teim2 ose Tem Full name Term is locked no changes possible Fr To Schooldays 06 10 2008 v 30 06 2009 230 Name Full name From To School year Total school year 22 9 08 30 6 09 Termi Term 29 9 08 30 6 09 Term2 30 6 09 lv Lockec Days Parent term 6 School year Term2 6 10 08 Ter
61. as HTML see chapter Info Timetable the comet tineta bfine as Type Element Test school DEMO For demo and test only secssssessuecsscsecssvecssssessseessseeeseseeesey Timetable 2008 2009 Valid from 10 October iv isi v Break Supervisi Bas Status 05 07 2007 09 05 Bas Break Supervisions 22 9 2008 28 9 2008 Monay 8 00 Callas 9 40 9 50 Cer 14 15 14 25 Gru Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Curie Arist Callas Curie Rub New Cer Gauss Arist ber amp PettersSoftware Friday Cer Arist Cer Saturday Hugo Hugo Arist Gruber amp Petters GmbH Belvederegasse 11 A 2000 Stockerau 43 2266 62241 www qrupet at Info Timetable gp Untis Info Timetable Introduction Introduction The timetable is the organisational focus of any school That is why it is important to keep all teachers and students informed of any changes that can be caused for example by blocked rooms or absent classes and teachers The traditional means of informing those affected was by notices i e printed lists posted at central points in the school accessible to everyone involved Since most schools nowadays have computer networks it is possible to publish up to date timetables i e timetables with changes due to illness or other reasons a lot more quickly and efficiently The Info Timetable module is a set of software tools with which you can publish a schoo
62. as a weekly lesson As the scheduling dialogue always displays the scheduling situation from the point of view of the current lesson you can schedule time limited lessons in the usual way If two lessons do not block each other due to different time frames they can be scheduled for the same slot In the example below a lesson has already been scheduled for Mo 1 for class 3A However this only takes place once a fortnight in week A In week B therefore L 57 can be scheduled for Mo 1 for class 3A without any risk of a collision 3 Les 57 B Scheduling Dialogue DAR tH B8 HAN A a Unscheduled Information History Chained swaps Periods 261 L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time St MS GZ R3a 3a AA 3 om a Terms Term timetable functions are generally used in the following cases gt timetable change during the school year e g at the end of the school half year when one or more teachers are absent for a considerable period etc School Year Term 1 l Term 2 gt atime limited course system e g all classes have ten weeks of lessons School Year Term 1 Term 2 Term 3 Term 4 With a term timetable the school year is divided into several periods of time and a timetable can be created for each of these terms independently of each other You could of course save each timetable in a separate file but you would then have to accept a number of disadvant
63. at any time after the terms have been created see chapter Opening a new Term on p 172 Name calendar week The numbers of the calendar weeks in the year that the term covers will be displayed This is also the short name of the term which can be changed later under Modules Multiple Terms Multiple Terms see chapter Opening a new Term on p 172 Blocking Terms In some circumstances certain terms are not available for the whole school or for individual lessons This occurs particularly when each term corresponds to one week and there are holidays in this week or teachers are not available during this time These terms must be blocked in order to avoid lessons being accidentally assigned to these periods of time 191 192 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Year s Planning in Terms Manual blocking BI If lessons cannot be held in certain terms select the terms in 4 Block l l i ma T question with the mouse and use the lt Block terms gt toolbar icon to block them If this applies to the whole school select all the lessons for the school Year s Planning in Terms Oo BP K X T Y xz Bs Number of Terms LC Respect the selection in the right pane Periods week la Sub Cla Tea Am Studej Total Max Coc UnSc 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 F GEC jaib Hugo Alas 10 36 O O O O l l CH M 2a 2b Callas A2a F 3 6 os DST 1a 1b Ande PL CL 3 6 PEG 1a 1b Arist F SH2 5 46 DS 1b 3b
64. been exported Department Timetable gt Export Minutes Timetable Import Break Supervisions Merge scheduled lessons Info Timetable MultiUser gt Depariment Timetable Export Department D1 Classes 3 Lessons 11 C dep_test D1 gpn Export Department Departments 3 Total number of Classes 6 Fil Departments have been exported Skip Department Seane bo a q E port all Departments le eee Cancel Caution The department files are automatically assigned the short name of the respective department Any existing files with the same name will be overwritten without any prompt being displayed 224 Tip Changing the location of department data By default department data are saved to the gp Untis program directory You can change this with the Settings Miscellaneous option by defining a different import path for department files on the Directories tab gp Untis Department Timetable Distributing Department Data Miscellaneous Settings HTML E Mail Multiple Auto save Directories Timetable Data files gpn Version 14 x files gpu Back up fles Optimisation results Import Export kal Department files E Mail allachimery No classes with departments When department data are distributed sole importance is attached to the assignment of individual departments to classes If you have not defined any departments in the Dept column of the class master data you wil
65. before optimisation Clicking on the lt Team Optimisation gt button results in gp Untis searching for teachers who can be exchanged between the indivi dual teams in order to reduce the total number of teams When the search ends all the exchanges found are displayed as well as the new number of teacher teams Team Optimisation Ed Team Optimisation Planning Tools 79 pce Scheduling Timetab Classes Teachers Matrix Term Overview Locked Lessons Reductions Weekly values Teacher Assignment a fi Team Optimisation ie Team Optimisation Ai before optimisation 9 Teams after optimisation 7 Teams Subject Classtes Teacher Teacher before Cancel Clicking on the lt OK gt button accepts the team optimisation clicking on lt Cancel gt retains the original teams Reducing the number of teacher teams results in more scheduling options being available for the optimisation process This makes for better timetables Automatic teacher assignment during optimisation gp Untis allows teacher assignment to be changed during optimisation This means that gp Untis may replace the teacher that you have entered for a lesson with another who is more suitable from the scheduling point of view Such replacements will of course Arist Curie Rub Arist Hugo Rub Cancel 80 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Planning Tools only be performed for lessons where yo
66. biology collection has been entered Please note that reduction i ann reasons can be grouped together into categories with the aid of the ament Description field This can be very helpful in the event of a subsequent statistical selection of reduction reasons The reduction reason Term Overview sina Class Teacher has been created from an ignored subject as already Descriptions outlined above Alias Names selina Reductions that were entered according to the old method i e as armor women lessons are also displayed here however they are displayed ona Display Master Data grey background and cannot be modified jer Reduction reasons Anr 46 GHD x ei 4 a Class Teacher Full name Full name Head Teacher Yearly Balance Library Physics Inventory Chemistry Inventory Age Reduction Delegated Reduct Of Working Hours Guidance Counsellor Supervision Of Trainees supervision of the Biology Collection Reductions themselves are entered in the Lessons Reductions windows 3 Reduction Reduction Teacher 2 910 Reduction 21 661 Lessons 24 591 Total 25 000 Plan 0 409 Actual planned Statis Less Descriptic 1 310 19 9 5 Man INr Reason Value From Until Test The figure shows you the reductions for teacher Hugo For his mentoring duty as class teacher he is credited with 1 910 value units if you work without value calculation the
67. but also to export the department data fully automatically to separate gpn files in order to work on them individually These files are then later merged into one single overall file 213 214 gp Untis Department Timetable Data Entry Eee Lessons Sche Classes Teachers Rooms Subjects Students All Elements Element R olup Term Owmerview Corridors l Grid E Adjustment Data Entry This chapter deals with the definition of departments as well as assigning them to individual master data elements These entries are the starting point for working on a departmental basis and for splitting the data up into individual gpn files Entering Departments You create departments just like any other master data element with name and full name Please open the demo gpn file Nowselect Master Data Departments Three departments have already EATA EREA been defined Create a new uf ae KS 21 R department electrical engineering with the abbreviated name ET 3 Department 1 Alternatively you can click on the Department 117 lt New gt button and then enter Technical Department electrical engineering name and full name As with all other master data you can define as many departments as you wish in this way Assigning to Classes Once you have defined departments you can assign them to classes Select Master Data Classes click on lt Grid Adjustment gt and activa
68. could be scheduled for another day This can be seen from the entry Duration Eff time range on the General data tab This shows the number of weeks in the time period in which at least one day of lessons can be held In this case 4 in spite of the public holiday If there were a week s holiday within the time limitation period e g from 11 02 to 15 02 this possibility would no longer exist In this case the lesson could only take place three times within the time limitation period Calendar of the school year Lessons 86 Date fa yy Calendar week Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th ua Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr SaSu September 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 2007 October 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 13 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 j i penema L H can take pale HX cannot take ees can take nae 7 can take place December 31 January 12 3 February J CLELE gt March PPT 22 23 8729130 31 I beets 15 f 2008 el a at 0 yo Ta 14 15 16 17 oer Dy 2 23 24 Ata 28 29 30 May ara 4 8 Jon 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 3T June 1 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 General data Values for Count only school days Value calculation School year Number of days 286 Number of weeks 41 Lessons Number of days 189 Number of weeks
69. es Value Value 11 222 Teacher Subject Class es f Value Value 5 5 5 Gauss 3b GA Gauss DS 2 28 Gauss BS ib GA 4 Gauss Lesson 48 in the first line is a pseudo lesson that has been assigned the fixed value of 1 Pseudo lessons were used prior to version 2007 to balance out too few periods in the previous year From gp Untis version 2007 onwards reductions are used for this purpose these are described in the Teachers Work chapter of this manual A fixed value of 5 has been entered in the second line lesson number 3 The original value of this lesson 1 862 has been overwritten by this new value and the individual factors thereby overridden In the third line you can see the entry of 1 125 for the lesson number 77 The value of this lesson was previously 1 826 which multiplied with the factor results in the value displayed of 2 054 In the fourth line lesson number 58 the original value of 2 100 has been increased to 2 200 with the entry 0 100 As the second line is the currently active line you can see the value entered in the Values tab of the lesson You can find a more detailed description of how values are calculated in the Examples of Value Calculation chapter on p 105 The modifications and entries described always have an effect on lessons as a whole For example entering a fixed value for a coupled lesson that is held by two teachers can have an e
70. few physics teachers If teacher Gauss has already been allocated so many maths lessons that he has met his target number of periods there could be a bottleneck in physics as there are not so many qualified teachers In this case it would make sense to allocate teacher Gauss fewer maths and more physics lessons in exchange The Subject Bottlenecks function invoked under Lessons Subject Bottlenecks is used to determine and display the following data for each subject gt Name Short name of the subject gt Per Number of periods that the subject should be taught for the whole school gt Open Number of periods that have no teacher entered again for the whole school gt Teachers Number of teachers for whom a qualification for this subject has been entered gt Max Available The total number of vacant periods of all teachers with the qualification for the subject in question Vacant here means the number of periods that are missing to make up a teacher s target contractual hours gt Available This column displays the available periods of the qualified teachers distributed over the open lessons of those subjects for which they are qualified gt Bottleneck Bottleneck Index This column displays a number between 0 and 999 with O indicating that there are no Teachers Work 33 Scheduling Timetab Classes Teachers Term Overview Locked Lessons Reductions Weekly values Subj
71. file into which you wish to oa import the data and select Modules Department Timetable mutpie terme Merge scheduled lessons Navigate to the file from which Student Timetable you wish to import data and click the on the lt Open gt button gt gt gt gt gt Department Timetable Export Minutes Timetable Import Break Supervisions Info Timetable MultiUser gt When merging files gp Untis proceeds as follows gt All master data are imported The additional data for elements that already exist such as time requests are not merged gt Lessons are imported in their entirety If there are overlaps with the lesson numbers the imported lessons are automatically assigned a new number gt Timetables are also imported in their entirety Collisions occur when times in the existing schedule and in the imported schedule overlap gt General settings such as time periods and school holidays are not transferred Effects on other Functions The department timetable module also influences other gp Untis modules This is described in the following sections Cover Planning With the department timetable module you also have the possibility of restricting gp Untis cover planning to a specific department using the Departments combo field 234 gp Untis Department Timetable Effects on other Modules Substitutions window The substitutions window only displays cases of substitution where t
72. for a class Please open Master Data Classes in the demo gpn file You can enter the desired time limitation on the Class tab or in the From and To columns If nothing is entered in a column the beginning From or the end To is assumed Classes Cla ma MD Ke Slt TUR ala lt 30 Class Timetable Values d Marein Students C Ignore i 10 tae ale C Lock Alias nam C Don t Print N Time Requests 16 Female 26 Students Class teat Lessons t Class 4 Nobel Full name Tse Previous Text From Dept Ady Description 6 To 4 Statistical Code Class leve Regular gt Name Room Main subj Jc Consec Lessons table Factor Prev From Ria O2 100 0 1010 1010 1010 33333 33333 33333 1 000 3a If conflicting time limitations are entered for a class and for a lesson group the period of overlap applies If there are any other cases where time limitations conflict the lesson time limitation applies You will find more information in the chapter Combining Several Time Limitations on page 187 Time Limitation and Value Calculation If a lesson is time limited irrespective of whether this time limitation stems from a master data element e g class or whether it was entered directly for the lesson it is automatically included in the value calculation Thus a two period l
73. gt There are duties that do not appear in the timetable but which are part of the weekly working hours school management subject mentoring library administration etc Such duties are taken into account in the form of reductions A teacher must be found with the appropriate teaching qualification for every lesson that is to be held In order to guarantee the students continuous education a teacher should if possible accompany a class over several years B The workload must be distributed among all the teachers fairly and evenly This applies both to teaching as well as to those duties that are included in the working hours in the form of reductions gt When scheduling the task of calculating the workload is often complicated The value of a lesson frequently depends on the subject class level or on the teacher s contract of employment B Screen masks and reports should give insight into the details but at the same remain as clear and as comprehensible as possible The Lesson Planning module from gp Untis assists you with this task by providing the following functions gt gt gt gt Teaching qualification You can enter those groups of subjects for every teacher that he she is allowed to teach Teacher suggestion For each lesson you can have gp Untis propose teachers who are eligible to teach it Teacher assignment You can also have gp Untis automatically perform the assignment of teachers Subjec
74. gt Timetable periods With this setting you can see in the Lesson column how many periods this teacher has actually taught in the week in question Holidays are taken into consideration by the Plan value being divided up over the week If there is one day s holiday in a 5 day week a Plan value of 25 would be reduced to 20 On public holidays that are flagged as such under Master Data School Holidays the planned lessons count as having been taught 3i Weekly values Teacher short name Teachers weekly values Yearly average 10 195 Timetable f periods w Compressed Scheduled lessons Bi weekly lessons correct by the week gt Timetable values In contrast to the previously described setting this options outputs the values of the scheduled periods 3i Weekly values Teacher short name Teachers weekly values Yearly average 21 703 Gauss Cl Compressed Lessons and reductions Scheduled aiii lessons correct by the week Actual planned 0 000 589 808 13 896 9 520 235 416 1 584 13 896 9 520 25 416 1 584 20 000 13 996 9 520 24 416 1 584 1 10 7 10 gt Cover plan periods If you work with the Cover Planning module this option will display the number of cancellations and substitutions Weekly values Teacher short name Teachers weekly values Yearly average 10 171 Gauss v Cover plan peri
75. if the box is checked your entries ina matrix cell will lead to the creation of a new lesson Existing entries will be retained unchanged Planning Tools 60 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Planning Tools gt Suppress empty lines when filtering in certain cases e g when columns and lines display teachers and subjects filtering can lead to a large number of empty columns and lines Checking this selection box results in only those columns and lines being displayed that actually contain data This function is especially useful for large schools with a high number of master data elements in order to guarantee clarity _ Supress empty lines when filtering Supress empty lines when filtering PEK EL M Cells Lines Columns 7 Lines Columns L S Subject W Teacher Class es Subject Teacher Classfes Gauss Gauss Fiter CI C Fiter C Fiter 11b 4a 8 3a 10 2a 42b gt Font this button allows you to select a different font for the lesson matrix Planning Tools 61 Entries in the lesson matrix The lesson matrix is not just for display purposes you can enter values into the individual cells When entering values there is a special help window a so called dialogue available Open the Demo2 gpn file and close all windows Now access the lesson matrix In the lesson matrix in the figure classes are displayed in the lines and
76. in the master data should not be taken into consideration and lessons should take place between 01 10 and 29 02 In these circumstances a value of 2 146 results Looking at the school year calendar you can recognise how this value was calculated Newton L Tea E td EFOK BYB Ta SOR cae ca HR 0 Lessons Timetable Codes Values Value or Factor Line value factor Polskt 2 146 Value units week New Newton Target per yx L No ClTe Per Teach Subjec Class Subjec Home Double From To Total f 3 2 0010 10 10 5 9 0 1 1 02 11 New GA 2a 2b R2a 1 050 1 000 New MA 2a Date Mo 17 9 2007 Nok fa oy Calendar week 38 ES School year Different term Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 September 2007 October alia NS HO A A134 November Fae a a oe 13 14 15 16 E20 2 22 023 2425 22 23 jiza i25 25 27 jaa iad December January l A S S ee S S OS OS aS S ee eee ae February 23 24 l oon March 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 April 1 2 3 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 May 1 7 8 June 4 5 General data Values for Count only school days Value calculation School year Number of days 19
77. is now multiplied with the number of weekly periods for lesson 25 the result is 2 The One week setting The Lessons Teachers view also allows you to display how lessons and subjects are distributed for a certain week For this select the lt Settings gt toolbox icon and then the One week option Activating this option makes an input field available next to the name i Settings of the element e g teacher s name where you can select the week of the lessons to be displayed Gauss U Leh Settings Set One week P Lessons i Gauss Show inherited codes C Show total Gz For element Gauss 3b i Gauss 18 0 Periods week The One week setting only applies to the lessons window that Is currently active For example if the teacher lessons window is currently active this will have no effect on the class lessons window As in the previous example lesson number 25 is to be held in the period from 01 10 to 29 02 The lesson will now only be displayed if a week is specified in which it actually occurs If you have specified a week and entered a time limitation that is outside the week in question the lesson will still be displayed until the window is updated again e g when changing to another teacher 124 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable Value Calculation without Subyect Factor without Teacher Fact
78. lt Period window gt button Cer Cervantes Miguel Tim gt Layout 01 Individual timetable with days across the top mfx General Selection range Layout 1 Layout 2 HTML View Teal Teacher 1 Font size in Lot Layout 01 Individual timetable with days Per overview 100 Layout across the top Coupl legend 100 a P Heading 100 Gates roe Rib R3a 3a 3b 2a R3a I Ra Tea Subj Rm Cla Time ill gt x 254 gp Untis Break Supervision Presentation and Printing Then click on the lt New field gt button and select the field type Break supervision 3 Layout 01 Period window Contents fields of a teachi fox Type of Timetable Field type Class O Class TT Students Max characters Teacher TT O Room TT i Newtield J Change field ate Align fields C Bold Class Arial 9 0 400 Font size as a percentage 100 x 50 500 You can now position the new field depending on the format to overlap the left format 10 or top C Start and end time E PR 4 z Wire sae ne edge format 01 of the period field The break Scale 5 1 Right aligned supervision field is the only one that is displayed between two period fields O Centred New field Field type Type of names i Class Short name Teacher Room O Full ame O Subject
79. made Double periods Lesson number 11 teacher Hugo and subject GEc is held in terms weeks 1 6 in some weeks for 2 periods in others for 1 period By default these periods are automatically scheduled as single periods If wish this to be different you must specify it here The entry for double periods line Double pers is a from to range Entering 1 2 for a 4 lesson block would mean that the lessons should be held in one or two double periods In this example the lessons should be taught exclusively in double periods The correct entry in this case would be 2 2 for 4 lessons and 1 1 for 2 lessons Attributes in different terms Overview mef Alternatively you can also make these entries in a lessons window gt Lessons la GEc f 11 On differences Coupling Line School year Termi 11 4 1 2 Hugo GEc la la Rla Rla O 06066 see next chapter Term4 Tem5 Term6 11 11 41 4 1 2 2 Hugo Hugo e oe a a os Carrying over changes to subsequent terms Year s Planning in Terms You can change data in a lessons window in addition to the terms overview window However you must take the following into account Changes made in the Total school year mother term e g change of teacher for a lesson can be automatically carried over to the following terms Otherwise it would be necessary to make any subsequent changes manually in each term in the exam
80. more easily between subjects and subject groups This is especially useful when similar names are used This setting has no effect outside the Teach qual tab You can display and print the teaching qualifications for any teacher S by opening the teacher master data window and clicking on the Print Preview appropriate buttons Select the list type Teaching qualification amp Print Clicking the lt Selection gt button allows you to select those teachers whose teaching qualifications interest you Print selection gp Untis 2008 Timetable 20002009 Testschool DEMO 11 Yalid tom 10 October For demo and test only Teacher Teacher 1 11 Gauss Teaching qualification Sub Subj Grp From level fo level Per ihe scence 7p Joo Teaching qualification S E20 Data field c P eE New Teaching qualification Monthly statement Period time requests Surplus Activities Teacher teams Teaching qualification Unspecified day requests ValueCorrection Subj Subj Grp Pe level Per 9 0 ELN The above figure shows a list of teaching qualifications sorted by teacher In a similar manner it is also possible to display and print teaching qualifications sorted by subjects For this the subjects master data window should be currently active when lt Print Preview gt or lt Print gt is selected 32 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Teachers Work E Substitute Suggestion a2 Teacher quali
81. new timetable file is created for each department with the name lt name gt gpn where lt name gt stands for the department s short name The file contains the following data gt gt gt gt All the classes of the department All the lessons of the department All the classes which occur in the lessons of this department All teachers rooms subjects and departments of the school Department files are basically completely normal gp Untis data files However they are flagged internally as department files Distributing Department Data 223 The work steps necessary for distributing a file will now be CZD illustrated using an example Please open the demo gpn file Classes Cla Sees DORP St OL FT Using Master Data Departments you can see that only three departments have been defined in this file ail DAPENA Please open Master Data Classes activate the Class 1b Newton display of the Departments column in the grid and R cnr assign the departments to the classes in accordance 3a Ciass 3a Aristoteles i Class 3b Callas with the figure a Now select Modules Department Timetable Export Click on the lt Export all Departments gt button This launches the export of the data of all departments in Cover Planning one go Following export a window is displayed indicating how many departments and how many desidi gt classes have
82. number of periods for the week are used He Is also credited with 1 value unit for supervision of the physics collection reduction reason PhS If you wish to display the reductions for individual teachers as is the case in the figure using the corresponding selection list you will see how many value units have already been allocated to the teacher For teacher Hugo 2 910 value units in the form of reductions and 21 681 value units of lessons have been assigned This results ina total of 24 591 value units Hence 0 409 value units are missing from his total weekly target of 25 value units Temporary reductions You can also limit the time for which reductions are valid Let us assume that a teacher looks after the library for a semester and benefits from an appropriate reduction In the following semester he she hands over this task to another colleague The reductions Teachers Work 21 Scheduling Timetab Classes Teachers Matrix Lessons Term Overview Locked Lessons weekly 22 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Teachers Work must be entered for both teachers together with the corresponding from and to dates Reduction Reduction BEEJ 5 gt 24 591 Total 25 000 Plan 0 409 Actual planned Value From Until Text 1310 19 9 1 000 19 9 The time limitation distributes up the reduction value evenly in the comparison of the teacher s actual and target
83. of timetables in a vertically One timetable for each week C One timetable for each week C New page for each element Lessons Lesson display Placement of lessons 0 Number of weeks School week No lessons v Abbreviations Type of abbreviation No abbreviations v Coupling legend footnote Placemt of the legend a Placement of abbrev No abbreviations Number of columns Use alias C Print frames 1 Number of columns C Print frames Please refer to the chapter Application Notes on page 302 for furt her details on adapting an existing format Substibutions Navigation Stabe HTL Timetable fonmets Classes Teachers Aion C Subjects In addition to the information supervised by which teacher C Students reak Superviss Corridors gp Untis 2008 Timetabling Software Netscape a File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help Timetables vath substitution dal about which timetables should be exported in which format for the Break Supervisions module you can also launch a special export displaying which corridor is Term 22 9 28 9 Test school DEMO For demo and test only Timetable 2008 2009 Valid from 10 October Status 25 07 2007 09 21 Bas Break Supervisions 22 9 2008 28 9 2008 Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday 8 00 Calla
84. only a small number of icons gt No toolbar is displayed in any of the individual windows gt The master data windows have no form view Communication between the individual windows works in the same way that you are accustomed to in gp Untis If you click on a teacher in the the master data view you will see his her timetable displayed in the teacher timetable You are familiar with almost all the icon functions in the toolbar from the Untis mode the only new icon is lt Refresh screen gt which restores the windows to their original positions e g after windows have been closed If substitution mode is active this also sets the date to the current date automatically There is a small difference in the print functionality In info mode it is only possible to make general settings in the print selection dialogue For example you can choose between portrait and landscape format but you can only print the current timetable Changing the displayed window group You can specify any window group between Info1 and Info9 or InfoA and InfoZ as the info parameter gt Right click on the shortcut just created and select Properties from the context menu gt Onthe shortcut tab change the entry in the target field to C program files gp Untis 2006 Untis exe C gp Untis Demo_Info gpn Info5 and confirm with lt OK gt gp Untis in Info Mode 301 gt Now restart gp Untis in info mode by double clicking the Info
85. others At Austrian high schools for example English is weighted with a value of 1 167 while sport has a value of only 0 955 gt Periods week Here you can see for how many periods per week this subject is taught at the school gt Value units week This value indicates what the periods displayed are worth at the school Depending on whether you selected the Yearly Values option in the settings for value calculation or not the value indicated here refers either to a week or to the whole school year You can find these settings on the Value Calculation tab under Settings Miscellaneous please refer to the Value Calculation Settings chapter on p 95 gt Yearly value The value over the whole year is displayed here If you have selected Yearly Values option in the settings this value will correspond to the preceding one gt Free without a teacher The value displayed here indicates the total value of lessons in the current that have still not been assigned a teacher Master Data Classes It is not just teachers and subjects that influence the value of lessons but also classes Values 34 0 Periods week 1 000 Factor 33 981 Value unite week 1533 3 Yearly value 0 000 Free without a teacher J38 Weeks of lessons gt Factor Here you can specify how a lesson in this class should be weighted e g lessons in the sixth form could be valued higher than in the lower grades
86. output for departments If the Department Timetable module is used it is possible for each department to perform its own cover planning with its own department file Each department can then of course create monitor output from its own data If necessary these individual outputs can also be integrated into a shared display For the integration of the individual monitor outputs it is first necessary to create the gon department files by exporting them with the function Modules Department Timetable Export In this case the department name is displayed in the gp Untis title bar gp Untis 2008 Substitution schedule Netscape amp gp Untis 2008 Substitution schedule Netscape File Edit Yiew Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help Y file C finfo_steve 2 subst_001 htm Q Q Q file C info_steve 2 subst_001 htm a yy Home GQ Radio My Netscape Qy Search FJBookmarks a amp Home GD Radio My Netscape Q Search Bookmarks 280 gp Untis Info limetable Monitor HTML Output For the export of the monitor HTML files a directory must be created to which all departments must have access and which contains a sub directory for each department with the department s short name from gp Untis as name 3 L webserver As an example a school with the departments Electro Purchase Departments and Metal must therefore create the following directory structure Electo you are free to choose the name and location of the Depar
87. parameter set to Extremely important has been 0 from Break 0 to Break _ Delete poorly placed supervisions J overridden Incidentally poorly placed supervisions are displayed with a red background in the Break Supervision dialog Deleting Supervisions If you wish to delete certain teachers from specific supervisions select the supervision in question in the Break Supervision dialogue and press lt Del gt 252 gp Untis Break Supervision Presentation and Printing Delete break supervisions Lys JL No J WM Deleting Supervisions Delete all break supervisions In order to delete all supervisions in a block select the lt Delete supervisions gt button If you invoke this function when there are no supervisions in the selected block you can delete all your school s break supervisions Presentation and Printing There are various ways of outputting the break supervisions printing the break supervision window reports display in the the timetable HTML output Printing the Break Supervision Window The supervision schedules displayed in the break supervision dialogue on the Corridor and Teacher tabs can as is usual in gp Untis be printed using the lt Print gt button Print output can be effected according to Supervision areas or teachers Reports Bas Basement ais 45 56 a45 9 40 10 35 i 13012 25 855 950 10 45 11 40 12 35 Monday ana Cer Jeer Tuesday Nobel
88. per week and no more than 32 Creating terms Once all the total periods have been allocated to the individual terms clicking on the lt Create terms gt button results in the terms being created in the system and the Year s Planning in Terms window closes automatically The display of lessons in the lessons window now corresponds to the allocation of the individual terms By default terms of equal length are created If terms are to have different lengths the dates can be changed in the terms window 3 Year s Planning in Terms Aha B xx YY xz Q 6 Number of Terms C Respect the selection in the right pane Class es C Create Terms 3 Periods week A Les Sub Cla Rm Total din Max UnSc 1 2 2 GEc 1a 1 Rla 10 3 6 5 29 CHA 2a 2 R2a R2b 36 30 31 32 DS T 18 1 PL CL 3 6 33 33 33 32 32 PEG 1a 1 SH2 SH1 46 33 32 33 33 34 32 31 DS 1b3 PL 3 6 32 33 3233 33 31 31 PEB 2b 2 SH1 SH2 46 32 33 31 32 33 32 30 TXE 2h I Pl 46 f 34 33 32 34 34 34 34 5 6 2 29 3 3 30 28 3 3 9 2 22 43 33 Modules Multiple Terms Multiple Terms You can also change the names of the terms short name and full name in this window Year s Planning in Terms 205 E Terms Name School year Delete New term from mother term C Locked Total school year Full name F To School days l 22 09 2008 7 30 06 2009 36 Locket Seni Totalschoolyear 22 9 08 30 6 09 3 11 08 14 12 08 School year 15
89. period You can find the necessary download programs as well as further information at www roesel at Index Symbols amp join 280 Format 280 P No break supervision before after 242 A Absences Overhead 47 Actual Planned 87 Actual planned 19 Actual Target Difference 35 Additional Duties 18 Additional duties 46 Additional HTML Files Integration 278 Application Notes 302 Allow Word Wrapping 304 Coloured Background 303 HTML Settings in Timetable 302 Attachments E Mail 288 Autolnfo Messages Prior to Export 282 Automatic Allocation Year Planning in Terms 199 B Back to back lessons Year Planning in Terms 202 Break Supervision Off site Buildings 256 Break supervision Upper limit for teachers 241 Break supervision area 240 Index 315 Break Supervision Substitution 255 Break Supervisions Delete all 252 Menu Item 242 Break Supervisions dialog 242 C Calendar of School Year 112 Calendar Week Timetable 180 Carry School Weeks Over from Calendar 190 Class Factor 98 Clipboard 53 69 Code V 82 Control Window 261 Correction Run 251 Corridor 240 in Timetable 254 Coupling 54 111 Time Limitation 128 Course System Term Timetable 152 Cover 97 Cover Planning 72 255 and Break Supervisions 255 Cover Planning Import 185 Creating Terms Year Planning in Terms 204 Cross departmental Resources Optimisation 221 CSS 307 Customising the Toolbar 190 D Data Protection 273 Data Security 295 Database E
90. period lesson block is to be taught for four periods in three terms It would be unfavourable if the first four periods took place in term 6 the next four lessons in term 11 and the final four in term 14 as the long interruptions would break up lesson continuity In order to schedule lessons in a block mark all the lessons in the block with the mouse and click on the lt Back to back lessons gt Icon Back to back lessons Optimisation will then schedule the three time four periods in consecutive terms e g 6 7 and 8 ip Year s Planning in Terms ME E a Number of Terms an Periods week Sa ee an IE Les Sub Cla Am Total tin Max UnSc 1 2 al 4 5 6l 7l el slion helalisisienrzie 11 GEc 1a1 Ala 10 3 6 5 5 B CH h 2a 2 Aa 10 3 6 DS 1a 1 PLE 12 PEG 14 1 SH2 14 me DS ioa FL i 75 PEB 2b 2 SHI 14 9 4mm S XC 22 CLP 14 ee ing i Seles eee BEP Respect the selection in the right pane CJ Humber of Terms Petiods week N Les Sub Cla Am Total tin Max UnSel 1 2 3 4l s el 7 el sioi hehahaishielirie GEc Ws Rila 10 3 6 5 5 CHA 23 2 Aza Year s Planning in Terms 203 Optimisation settings Various settings can be made for master data elements for automatic period allocation Weighting ranges from 0 to 5 with 5 being the highest priority Distribute periods evenly Optimisation g
91. subject music class 3a as Is the case in the teacher is retained Lessons where a teacher was entered for class 3a e g in the subject CH this is also retained Having a teacher entry for lessons in a gpn file that you used in the previous year will not be very common in real life When subjects correspond the teacher from the previous year Is adopted This happens for example in the subjects HI and BI In addition you should take note of the coupled lesson no 1 Coupling takes in classes of different ages As the Teacher gt function has deleted the teachers from all classes assigning the previous year s teacher is not possible When you have completed this for one year go to the next in our case classes 3a and 3b Only now should you delete the teachers from these classes as you no longer need this information and can assign the teachers from 2a and 2b respectively with the lt Last year s teacher gt function When you have done this you can continue with the two second year classes In this way itis only for the first year classes that you need to enter all the teachers for the first time Overview of the upgrading process from the previous year Lesson proposal Step 1 enter the Previous year s name under Materdata Classes Step 2 start with the highest Class level e g level 4 For all classes of a level Step 2a MESE level 4 teachers delete
92. subjects consists of the following columns 3 Lesson Table Syllabus Less Dx Gak wR Name Full name Nana N Copy subjects into the lesson table Lower level Full name Cee _ _ gt Subject Here you can use both the subject short names as well as implicit or explicit subject groups When subjects or explicit subject groups are entered the system checks to see whether the element exists in the master data Tip Element Rollup You can use element roll ups to include a whole list of subjects in one go by right clicking on it and dragging it into the subject table Subject ajx Full name Religious E ducatior 3i Lesson Table Syllabus Less Dx 2 bGeek A Ra Full name hie Lower level lz Create ess fa Advanced level _ Change _ Copy subjects into the Lower level Full name Subjec Per Doub Block 1a MA RE 22 DE 3 4 EN 33 Class Teacher Planning Tools 67 Element Rollup 68 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Planning Tools gt Per In this column enter the minimum and maximum number of periods per week separated by commas which should be taught for this subject in the classes in question The entry 3 4 in the DE line in the figure means that this subject should be taught to lower level classes 1a 1b etc for a minumum of 3 periods per week and a maximum of 4 If the minimum and maximum values are the
93. subjects in the columns In this example the cells do not display the periods but the lesson numbers Lines Columns Class es v Subject Teacher i la Science C Filter _ Fiter C Filter Class 1a should be allocated 2 periods of science from teacher Callas Click on the appropriate cell in the matrix Please note thatthe button appears at the right of the cell Click on the amp J button The following dialogue window will open Science Language EN HI 1a 2Nobel B Ro sirist 1b 2MNobel 2 Cer 6 Rub 1 Ande 24 2Nobel SfCallas SiNobel 5 Rub 2 Huge 2b 2 Nobel S Callas 6 Nobel 1 Rub 2 Rub 3a 2Nobel SiCallas S Nobel 4 Rub 2 Rub 2 Hugc Create a new lesson 1 How many periods does the lesson have per week i Which teacher do you want to enter for the lesson Now select 2 periods and teacher Callas for the input fields 3i Lesson matrix Periods K mah R h Create a new lesson Lines Columns Cells L No Per Class es Subject v Teacher v mm C oom Filter Filter Filter How many periods does the lesson have per week Which teacher do you want to enter for the lesson RE DE EN Hl 2 Nobel ub 5 Arist A new lesson with lesson number 102 is _2INobel 6 Rub 1Ander created The L No Per field displays the a O O E T 2Nobel 1 Callas 6 Nobel 1 Rub 2 Rub number of periods entered 2iNobel 1 Callas S Nobel 4R
94. take place in the same slot Lesson Groups 165 For class 4 Graphics GA and Design DS are to be scheduled as CZD alternating lessons in a fortnightly cycle Please open the demo gpn file and create two lesson groups for week A and week B as described on page 157 Assign week A to the GA lesson L No 5 and week B to the DS lesson L No 80 Class 4 Nobel L Cla wHFOK BYR Dea OUT a ClTe Per Teacher Subject Class es Subjectroom Home Room Doublepers Block Les Groups EM cass EO Ps2 0 1 Hugo GEc 4 Ps2 Ho Hugo Ps2 F Hugo Ander Arist Callas Nobel S amp FNWH NNNN NY SN WN Mii Ti Ce amp FSFE SF KH SF HS SS You must now specify that both lessons should if possible be scheduled in the same slot Open Lessons Lesson Sequence and set the contents of the combo box to Simultaneous lessons Now enter the lesson numbers of the two lessons that you wish to schedule simultaneously 5 and 80 Alternatively you can double click on the relevant lesson numbers in a lessons window or use the lt Add gt button The name of the simultaneous group G1 is a random default value and can be changed at any time by double clicking on it amp Lesson Sequence Lesson Sequence G1 Delete Simultaneous lessons vi Lessons Remove Help s0 Add Display Lesson number Subject O L No Subject a L No L No L No L No Per
95. the Include Elements section you can restrict export to a Static HTML Output List students by class Students v Type 273 Classes Element Oban Talisker Lagavulin Laphroaig Scapa GlenOrd Clynelish Bladnoch Fettercairn Ardbeg Bowmore Bunnahabain Standard Static HTML Substitutions Navigation Include Elements Al v Department Exclude Elements with code N do not print n with statistical code password in order to be accessed must be stored in one directory When exporting Static HTML to the selected target directory the system automatically creates sub folders The folder frames is used to store all graphics needed for navigation while the data with all the timetables and lists that the user wishes to export are stored in other folders The Weeks on the top directory level check box can be used to influence the structure of the stored data PY Timetable Element selection 274 gp Untis Info Timetable Static HTML Output If this box is checked a sub directory will be created for each week s output the directory name is equal to the number of the week in question This weekly directory then contains further folders named C class timetables F subject timetables G substitution lists for corridors R room timetables S student timetables T teacher timetables V substitution lists for teachers and W substitution lists f
96. the new solu term default IS C Locked Term1 Fr To School days Enter Pi 13 03 2004 10 07 2005 215 meaning eed Tad stoves ou n7w EY ae name an u name for the New Term new term e g Name H2 and Ond 2nd half of the year Full names half of the year and click lt OK gt to confirm Terms You can rename the orginal term Total school year e g 1st half of year Now use the calendar to change the start Fr and end To dates The length of the individual terms will then be displayed in the Days column The Parent term column displays which term the new term is based on In the current example we have created an identical copy of the Total school year term Master data lessons and timetable can now be modified in accordance with the new conditions E Terms Name l P H elete Print After you confirm by clicking lt OK gt the a terms window closes me em fom make D Locked 2nd half of the year Full name r r Fr To School days Anew combo box is displayed inthe main toolbar s02203y sa0s2009 128 displaying the Cu rrent term and allowing you to Full name From To Lockec Days Mother term 1st half ofthe year 229 08 30 6 09 114 switch terms 128 HI Tip Width of term combo list Toolbar You can change the width of the term combo list under Settings Ahoa eooo E Miscellaneous Multiple Terms Y
97. the system may exceed the value defined under Maximum number of minutes break supervision per week in Master Data Teachers Lesson before after the break Move the slider control to the right if the teacher should have a lesson immediately before or after the supervision Lesson in the corridor before after the break Use this parameter to determine if those teachers teaching before or after the break in a room on that corridor i e a room where the master data contains an entry for this corridor should be favoured Not before 1st period of the day Supervisions before the first period of the day are generally unpopular Use this setting to prevent teachers being scheduled for a supervision before their first lesson of the day Not after last period of the day Just like supervisions before the first period of the day supervisions after the last period are not particularly popular Use this parameter to prevent teachers being scheduled for a supervision after their last lesson of the day No supervision double period breaks Use this parameter to control to what extent the teacher can be scheduled for supervision in the breaks between double periods No consecutive supervisions This is where you specify whether it is important for you to avoid consecutive supervisions for a teacher Not before after time request There are reasons for blocked times time request 3 It can often be that a teacher is not in the school for
98. the term Reductions Target teaching lessons Open the view Master Data Teachers and select the Values tab ValueComection i Subs Break Supervision Teacher Timetable Values Teach qual Weekly values pe n Periods week 1 000 Factor vi 0 0 Reductions oO Week School year 29 000 Plan week Plantear P a ff Targ Week Max Target ear flax 22 748 Value units 3 Yearly value 2252 Actual planned j Actual planned sda Free for this teacher i Y r O oe ee ri i 0 The values entered and displayed in this window are principally concerned with value calculation and are described again in detail in the corresponding chapter If you do not use the value calculation part of the Lesson Planning module that is if you have not entered any factors for subjects classes or teachers the number of periods per week and the value units are equivalent for gp Untis At this point just one input element and three of the displayed values are important _ Periods week Here you can see how many lesson periods have been scheduled for the teacher D Reductions The actual weekly value does not just include lessons held This will be explained in more detail in the following chapter Reductions Plan Week Enter the desired workload for the teacher in periods per week e g 25 periods per week Value units The scheduled weekly periods for a teacher can differ from th
99. the term specific data as has already been shown However it can be useful in some cases to make a change to the mother term for example in the master data and then transfer these changes to the child terms In other cases for example for the school year calendar it would not make sense to make term specific changes Otherwise it could happen that 1st May is defined as a public holiday in one term but not in the other If you have already created more than one term and you change data the modifications are valid either a for the current term only or b for the current term and all child terms or c for all terms The following overview describes how you can manage the data Term specific applies to current term Changes to the following areas only apply to the current term and cannot be automatically transferred to existing child terms Changes in the timetable Changes in time requests Changes in the master data All Elements window Alias names Colour settings for master data and lessons Substitutions grid YY YYYY Y Lesson sequences Transferring a timetable to other terms Use the Paste special function if you wish to transfer the timetable of one term to another Ina lessons window select those lessons whose timetable is to be transferred with the mouse and select Edit Copy Change the term and select the element whose timetable including lessons is to receive the transferr
100. these are the first four weeks after the beginning of the school year Lessons gp Untis 2008 Timetable 2008 2009 gp Untis 2008 Timetable 2008 2009 12 Valid from 10 October 12 Valid from 10 October la Class 1a Gauss Class 1a Gauss gp Untis 2008 Timetable 200872009 gp Untis 2008 Timetable 2008 2009 12 Valid from 10 October 2 Valid from 10 October 1a Class 1a Gauss 1a Class 1a Gauss 181 182 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Terms You also have the possibility of outputting overview plans for indivi dual weeks The example shows a part of the room overview plan for the Physics lab The timetable format used here Roo11 can be found under Timetable List All Views PL Physics lab Timetables in format 11 can also be output on a term by term basis Timetable Settings Layout 2 Format 1 One column per term Terms Statistics about Terms Statistics can be output either for a calendar week for the whole school year or for a single term You can find the reports under Reports Selection The loading statistics and subject periods reports will serve as brief examples Loading statistics Loading statistics for classes teachers and rooms can also be output on a term by term basis BC Loading Statistics J Classes Teachers a Free Periods J Classes I Teachers E Rooms 9 Students S Subject
101. to e g mail my school org and a corresponding mail address 284 gp Untis Info limetable Sending Timetables by E mail Miscellaneous Settings e g plan my school org Select Auto save Directories Timetable SMTP as mail system and then HTML E Mail Multiple T i EA __ enter mail server and sender SimpleMAPI e g Outlook Express Keep address in the corresponding input SAHAP ee Duloh iw fields If your server requires authentication before sending you can also enter the user name and password on this tab mail my school org Mailserver plan my school org Name of the sender V Mail server requires auth before sending User Activating the Keep a log file option results in gp Untis writing a line with the most important data for each e mail sent in a log file On modern operating a systems such as Windows XP M gp Untis writes the log data by default to a file named untis mail log in the directory C Documents and Seittings lt username gt Application Data gp Untis lt username gt is your user name in the system Under older operating systems you will find the untis_mail log file in the gp Untis program directory eeece Password Miscellaneous Settings Auto save Directories Timetable Customise HTML E Mail e Autol nfo Transmission of E Mail Keep a logfile Logfile C Programme gp Untis 2007 Untis_Mail log Mailsystem Sim
102. toolbar icon A dialogue window Is displayed in which you can specify which file you wish to compare with the currently open file Lesson comparison For the lesson comparison gp Untis has to be started a second time D ata tile C Programime gpo Untissupportpeday Holl with the current file C Programmegp Untis Cemo2 gpr Do vou want to start gp Untis now In the subsequent window you can specify how the differences should be displayed Planning Tools 73 gt File A File B Use these buttons to define the colours Retake indicating different lessons in the files Select two colours for the diferences ree MO Foreground gt Foreground Background This is where you decide E Oon whether the letters foreground or background of a cell should be displayed in the set colour Seslendi V Differences bold i C Only show different columns gt Also use the colours in the printout If you wish you eee can also use the colours defined for the differences when printing Furthermore you can also output the differences in bold type and limit the output to those lines columns of the matrix where differences occur gp Untis is now launched a second time on your computer just like for example with the Timetable comparison function You will see that the number of lines in the lesson matrix has doubled as a line is displayed from the comparison file for each line in the current file If di
103. values see Value Calculation chapter Caution Reductions extend over term boundaries If you wish to limit the proposal to one term in the period you must enter the corresponding from and to dates Reductions with negative values Reductions can also have negative values Let us assume that teacher Rubens took 24 weekly periods in the previous school year but that he was paid for his full contractual commitment of 25 periods A 3 oaee J change Underemployment prev year Full name In order to compensate for this underemployment he should teach 26 periods this year but be paid for 25 Ful name periods as in the previous year Class Teacher Head Teacher Yearly Balance You can now make this adjustment with the help of a Library Physics Inventory reduction by simply assigning it a negative value Chemistry Inventor Age Sine Delegated Reduct Of Working Hours Guidance Counsellor Supervision Of Trainees Underemployment prev year Teachers Work Reduction 4 Reduction 1 000 Reduction 25 471 Lessons 28 471 Total 25 000 Plan 3 471 Actual planned _ Yy Ean A Urti Tert Statis Less Description 32 UE 1 acc tores 06 33 232 OR Printing gp Untis reductions are designed to organise the teachers actual vs target period accounts in a transparent manner For this reason you can see the effect of reductions everywhere t
104. vath at least one day of lessons Count only school days The first line on the General data tab indicates the number of days and weeks in the complete school year In the second line you will find the number of school days as well as the number of weeks in which lessons take place on at least one day SISTE agea lf you activate the Count only HED ATEA De LOUDA aH FRO school days option on the nee Lessons Timetable Codes Values Value Calculation tab under Is La Settings Miscellaneous i gt weeks in the school holidays will CA Tae pey no longer be taken into r 7 L No Cite Per Teacher Subject Class es Subject roo Home Room Double per From To Value Line value Subj factor Class factor Value CO n S d e rat l O n Total f 3 26 00 10 10 10 I 9 0 o o jo o 10 10 1 2 4 24 1 New Gz 2a 2b R2a 1 050 1 000 39 0 25 4 New Mat 2a R2a 1 105 1 000 156 0 26 2 New Ph 2a Phys R2a 1 050 1 000 78 0 A y h d 28 _ 2 New PA 2b Phys R2b 1 050 1 000 78 0 S you can see in t e calendar 36 5 New Mat 2b R2b 1105 1 000 195 0 f h h h 33 2 New 3a Phys R3a 1 050 1 000 78 0 O t e SC OO year t e re a re 4 1 weeks with at least one day of lessons This results in a value of 41 for lesson 4 if the factors are ignored If the option Calculation of the yearly weeks using single days pea is also activated the number of school weeks will be calculated
105. 0 0 990 0 913 z at Coc Line value Linetext 2 Teacher Teacher allocat Metallarbei Holzarbeit G Textiles Wi G In the case of lesson number 77 two classes are taught by three teachers This means that this lesson uses a total of six periods of teaching work However these six periods are distributed over the participating classes This means that in this example with two classes each class accounts for half the teaching work required 3 teachers 2 weekly periods 2 number of classes 3 You will see this value in the form view on the Values tab The amount of teaching work is viewed separately for each teacher The grid view shows the value of the lesson for the class from the perspective of the teacher in the first coupling line The figure shows the teacher For lesson number 77 this teacher is only responsible for class 1a The class does not have to share this teacher in the coupling with another class The value of the lesson that the teacher gives to this class is therefore 2 In lesson number 77 teacher Curie is responsible for both class 1a and class 1b These two classes must divide up the teacher s work 2 periods between them the lesson that teacher Curie gives to class 1a therefore has a value of only 1 from the perspective of the class 3 Class 1a Gauss L Cla Examples VBFOK BYR De OOF a Hae EEE kE Lessons Timetable Codes Values mo P Value or Factor
106. 0 Number of weeks 38 Lessons Number of days 95 Number of weeks 19 197 A 0 5000 a 121 122 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable Settings Time Grid School Data Calendar Print Licence Data Count only school days The school year extends over a period of 41 weeks including holidays However there are only 22 weeks available for lessons Dividing one value by the other total weeks lesson weeks gives a distribution time factor that is used to multiply the value of the lesson The following calculation is performed 4 22 41 2 146 As already mentioned this calculation included weeks with school holidays If you wish to exclude this you can also activate the Count only school days option on the Value Calculation tab under Settings Miscellaneous Doing this means that only those weeks are included in the calculation in which lessons occur on at least one day If the Count school days option is activated the value will change from 2 146 to 2 000 The Values for count only schooldays tab in the calendar for the school year contains the explanation for the changed value Deducting the school holidays from the school year leaves 38 weeks Newton L Tea HFOK BYS De SOF amp Ha Lessons Timetable Codes Values Lesson number 25 Value or Fac
107. 000 1105 1 000 New 1 050 1 000 New 1 050 1 000 2 310 v New You can enter factors as well as values Factors are entered with the prefix but do not override date limits or any other factors If factors have been deactivated in the settings please uncheck the box now If you now enter the factor 2 lesson number 25 is given the value 5 218 Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable 127 3 Newton L Tea Sl jw HEATA De SOOT oH SR Lesson number Lessons Timetable Codes Values 5s g 2000 Value or Factor Line value factor For element 5218 Value units wee New Newton Target pes yr l annam e s fL No cl Te Per Teach Subjec Class Subjec Home Double From To Value Line value Subj factor Class facte Value Al Toat 25010 10 10 5 9 OF 14 14 1 o 10 10 32 961 B211 New GA 2a2b _ R2a 1 050 1 000 1455 R2a 1105 1 000 R2a 1 050 1 000 R2b 1 050 1 000 This value is calculated as follows entered factor weekly periods teacher factor subject factor class factor lesson weeks weeks in the school year 2 4 1 100 1 105 1 000 22 41 5 218 Entering 2 provides an additional factor that can be used to upvalue certain lessons If you activate the Count only school days option the time factor changes so that the weeks of the school holidays are not counted Instead of taking 22 41 the examples above would use 19 38
108. 000 Lessons of external teachers 0 000 Participation in other schools 203 337 School balance gt Value totals for all teachers This is the total of weekly and yearly values of all teachers entered in the teacher master data gt Ignored lessons total This is the total of all ignored lessons v Open period values without teachers This is the total of all lessons that have not been assigned a teacher gt Planned Periods for all teachers This figure represents the total of all planned periods for all teachers gt Total Planned Actual if gt 0 for all Teachers If a teacher s Planned Actual value is greater 0 this means that he she has not yet fulfilled his her teaching commitment This is the total of the Planned Actual values of all teachers where this is the case If this value is 0 then none of your teachers has a workload below his her contractual target Values 105 Examples of Value Calculation The preceding chapters described the input possibilities associated with value calculation This manual will use examples to explain how gp Untis actually calculates the values and how the factors you enter influence the calculation Values from the Teacher Perspective Depending on the perspective lesson values may be interpreted in different ways For example a period with one teacher and two classes counts as 1 value unit for the teacher but for each cl
109. 00000n0annnneennnaannannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnnnrne 100 SCD A EAEE EE TEE E eer ee 105 Examples of Value Calculation cccccsssseecesseeseeseeseeneessenes 107 Values from the Teacher Perspective cccsscccceeeeceeeeeseseeeaeeeeseeeeseeessaeeens 108 Teacher Class and Subject factors cccccccceccccsseecccsceeeecesssesececseececessaeeeeseneees 108 E E S EEE EAE EN E hats a noe ES A AE A T 109 Yearly IS seses ioriirirrineen iriri ar EEn EENEN EE A EEn Er ERER 111 Percentage Factor yearly values cccccccssesseccsncesccccsesseesnacseeesseauesensaeaesssaaaases 112 Values from the Class Perspective ccccccsseeecceceeeeceeseeeeeeeesseeeeeessaaaeeees 114 WINO TACIONS aeamenteaseasin sass Enin nE AEE EE PA Ar a eaa aipe 115 WN FACON sepsin iin e ie E E ES 118 TO E E E E E E E E E E 118 Value Calculation with the Multi Week Timetable Module 120 Date Time Limitation on Lessons crssincnseuiectueredachiveeicdarneninvtsincysavessausauiansctsns 121 Value calculation with time limitations ccccccccccsseeecccsseeeeecnsesesecsnansesessensssenaaes 122 The One week setting sscesasasivsiceacaveccuensanciadcensstocessiessaeedesmebundeiotienatebearteeeeapenedet 124 Fixed values and factors with time limitations cccccccccsssesseceeeceneessseeeeeensanstenens 126 Couplings with Time Limitations w ccccccccsssseeesececccccceccsesseseseecceeesessaeeseeeeeeeeesssaees 128 Y
110. 082009 Testschule DEMO 11 Gilt ab 10 Oktober Fir Demound Test Yearly york Yearlywork 2006 2007 Gauss Gauss Yearly Plan Periods 0 000 Lessons 1 000 1 Overhead 120 500 99 Lessons Supplement Plan 121 500 Lessons Overhead 0 500 Yearly Plan O verhead 0 000 Value Overhead 120 000 Rub Rubens Yearly Plan Periods 1300000 Lessons 1 000 Overhead 290 500 100 Lessons Supplement Plan 1508 200 Lessons Overhead 0500 Yearly Plan O verhead 180 000 Value Oyverhead 110 000 50 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Teachers Work Reports settings Emergency list 3 Report selection You can output a detailed list by clicking the lt Details gt button in the print selection window and subsequntly checking the Details option If you also check the Lessons option the list will include the value units resulting from the lessons Alternatively you can use the Yearly work Teacher list that you can find under the menu option Reports Selection Hex E Subjects Time E0 Periods Report E Teachers Subjects E Subjects Teachers J Emergency list J Break Supervision J Corridors i Teachers E Days Weekly summary Substitute Scheduling E Substitution Statement E Canc Days i Cover Overview BJ Yearly work Yearly works Teacher g early workT ask J real work Overview Ej Exam Schedule E Teacher Exarm Schedule A Rub Rubens Yearl
111. 12 000 12 3 12 9 12 25 000 13 000 12 000 13 10 12 16 12 25 000 13 000 12 000 14 17 12 23 12 25 000 13 000 12 000 15 24 12 30 12 0 000 0 000 16 31 12 61 0 000 0 000 17 7 1 13 1 20 000 13 000 7 000 18 14 1 20 1 25 000 13 000 12 000 19 24 1 27 1 25 000 13 000 12 000 20 26 1 3 2 25 000 13 000 12 000 a 25 000 13 000 12 000 Eam Eai sooo 13 000 8 000 m 20 000 13 000 7 000 Yearly average 21 897 25 000 13 000 12 000 25 000 13 000 12 000 25 000 13 000 12 000 25 000 13 000 12 000 25 000 13 000 12 000 25 000 13 000 12 000 597 760 25 000 13 000 12 000 25 020 1 25 000 13 000 12 000 25 020 1 25 000 13 000 12 000 23 020 1 980 25 000 13 000 12 000 34 5 5 11 5 25 000 13 000 12 000 35 12 5 185 25 000 13 000 12 000 36 19 5 25 5 25 000 13 000 12 000 37 26 5 1 6 25 000 13 000 12 000 38 2 6 8 6 25 000 13 000 12 000 39 9 6 15 6 25 000 13 000 12 000 40 16 6 22 6 25 000 13 000 12 000 41 23 6 28 6 25 000 13 000 12 000 93 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Values Gauss Gauss Carl Friedric ZJ Gauss Gauss Carl Friedric a a Time range ETE A Time range G auss auss j Periods week 17 03 2007 a 11 Periods week 17 09 2007 Ni i 2 Unscheduled pers 17 9 Week 1 38 2 Unscheduled pers F 21 9 Week 1 38 Teacher v Teacher v ia
112. 12 08 25 1 09 School year 26 1 09 8309 School year 93 09 194 09 O School year 20 4 09 306 09 School year You can switch between terms in the term combo list op Untis MultiUser 2008 demo Test school DEMO Timetable 2008 2009 File Edit MasterData Lessons Scheduling Timetable Reports Settings Modules Windows Cee A MNA LEen B BY P Tota school year 229 211 Total school year 22 9 2 11 Term2 3 11 14 12 nN 2 Teri 15 12 25 1 Alternatively you can switch to the next or previous term by clicking on gt or lt in the status bar display with Settings Status bar Caution Once terms have been created you can no longer use the year s term planning optimisation Create terms can only be used once From now on these toolbar icons are disabled and displayed grey For this reason do not create terms until you have finished work on term planning for the year You can of course make manual changes to the year term planning at any time 206 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Year s Planning in Terms Entering Data after Term Creation It is sometimes necessary to change lesson data after terms have been created Term overview The term overview window Lessons Term Overview allows you to easily modify data after term creation This gives you a term based overview of every master data element or every lesson and also allows changes to be
113. 26 0 Periods week 0 0 Reductions Week 25 000 Plan Wweek 28 000 Tatg Week Max 29 471 Value units 4471 Actual planned 9 336 Free for this teacher Tab Yearly work The Yearly work tab in the Master Data Teachers window allows you to make all the necessary inputs and provides an overview of the yearly data The individual fields are described below Teachers Work 45 46 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Teachers Work Additional duties table This is where the duties are entered that a teacher performs in addition to lessons The table consists of the following columns gt Additional Duties Enter the name of the additional duty e g Training Value Enter the absolute number of periods for the school year If you make an input here you do not need to enter anything into the other two columns Percentage Enter a percentage of an existing value The value is determined by the entry in the of column Entering a value here automatically calculates a value and displays it in the Value column of Clicking on this column displays a dropdown list fron which you can choose the basis for the percentage value in the column Yearly Plan Periods or Lessons The figure below shows a concrete example in which the following entries have been made gt The 50 lessons overhead for teaching results from additional Yearly Periods 1
114. 38 Duration Eff time range 3 You can determine for yourself whether or not holiday weeks should a influence value calculation by using the Count only school days School Data option on the Value Calculation tab under Settings Miscellaneous Calendar Print R Licence Data Caution All the following examples were calculated for the 2007 2008 Count only school d i im d n as school year For time limitations the turn of the year can have major consequences A time limitation that in one school year lasts from Monday to Friday can in the next school year if the from and to dates remain the same last for example from Friday Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable Value calculation would calculate in the first case with one week and in the second case with two This would result in different values for different school years The information on the tabs Value Calculation and Values for Count School Year only school days in the school year calendar is useful for understanding the individual calculations You can invoke the calendar for the school year using the appropriate toolbar icon in any lessons view Calendar Value calculation with time limitations Value Calculation The following example shows how values are calculated if lessons Stearate are date limited Please look at lesson number 25 inthe Demo2 gpn M without Class Factor file The factors
115. 79 Calendar WECK ccccccccccccceccencceessssccescuseeecesssausussecsessaeeesecessssaesesesssnsaeeseeesseaanes 180 WhO TOT essiri a aa E E E 181 Timetable PDrnNUnNg saeaea tas aieteccisnctene oseencinaesouenncd ae seeseoasatennaecnddadgatenntenteatendsan eee 181 Statistics about POLIIIS ccananncaucennnseasuayevsesnsentaenersesaneieures aamnaerm seer ET 183 Terms and Cover Planning cc ccccccccceeeseceeeeeeeceeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseaeeeeeseaeeees 184 New School Year 0 cccccecececcececececcccececececcucesecscuccucucatsceeaccucesecseacauausenseseas 186 6 gp Untis Contents Year s Planning in Terms iiscseiiccesstaseccssicenavcnndestescctisecssecereonvecavesteus 189 General Input s dedecisiietenscssoedaondssdaudmcecedsaniienttnsaihubeassdsendesisesdnoessdaauiiees en sendseeete 190 Nombper My 49 eormrente ren Meee en emer ters ome one e e gees teens 190 Blocking Terms sastetemisitansucasninensuatnnecdeayatuccadannedmenannticsiteneandussnstienssamiechadiapdcasvensanidien 191 Entering total total weekly PCiOOS cccccsseseseccccnssesseeecssnaeeesecessanaueesesessauenseeess 194 Manual Allocation ccc nccsnccsyececesceatiedemedbonaccesdeesencasehe anata nadanetanesaaaeeastaganeedundies 195 Entering weekly periods per term sssccccccsseeecccsneeecssansncessaeneeetsnaenesesaensessaaanes 196 Minimum Maximum number of periods per term cccccecccesneseeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 197 Week overview per LOLI scce
116. 800 000 Yearly Plan Periods 931 230 Lessons 755 61 Supplement 113 160 Lessons Supplement Plan remedial education overhead The value of 465 61 is automatically calculated on the basis of 50 of teaching Sean gt The teacher attends Additonal Duty skill enhancement training for 10 of the Administrati i faa i 180 00 10 Yearly Plan yearly plan i This Lesson overhead 465 61 50 Lessons results in a value of 180 00 Overhead 465 61 Lessons Overhead 180 00 Yearly Plan Overhead 110 00 Value O verhead 0 00 From absences Copy tasks to other teachers 3 68 Open Lessons Week 38 Weeks of lessons 45 Minutes Lesson Teachers Work 47 gt Anadditional 70 periods are added for administrative work gt Supervising the theatre group takes up another 40 periods Yearly Periods The Yearly Periods section gives an overview of the yearly workload mix and indicates deviations from the planned value gt Yearly Plan The teacher has a yearly target plan of 1 800 periods gt Lessons The yearly total of lessons to be held in periods According to this the teacher has a total of 1 004 800 value units for the year gt Supplement The supplement of 792 40 is the total of percentage and absolute additional duties The breakdown of this value is displayed in the Overhead window section gt Lessons Supplement Plan The difference between the actual number of value units and the year
117. 9 2007 No lessons fa Calendar week 38 Public Holiday General data Values for Count only school days Value calculation School year Number of days 286 Number of weeks 41 Lessons Number of days 152 Number of weeks 22 X 22 7 41 0 5366 T 146 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Appendix Appendix Entered values Lesson factors Input Value Meaning Effect 4 50 fixed value overrides teacher class and Subject factors but not time limitations 4 50 absolute value overrides all factors and time limitations 4 50 value factor does not affect other factors or time limitations additional factor which can be used e g to upvalue certain lessons negative value overrides all factors purpose compensate for under employment in previous year Calculation of values if time limitations are used What can be time limited Element class teacher Lesson Lesson group What is the effect of a time limitation on the value calculation when the Count only school days option is activated value with time limitation value without time limitation distribution time factor distribution time factor number of lesson weeks number of weeks in the school year Appendix 147 Which time limitation is effective Eft te all important for value calculation E if several elements are time limited or if the time limitations o
118. Andei PL 3 6 PEB 2b 2a Rub SH1 f 46 TX D 2b 2a Curie CL PL 46 GA 2a 2b New A a 46 ARM 3a 3b Callas A3a F 46 PEG 3a 3b Arist F SH2 46 DSH 3a 3b Ander PL HE 3 6 MA 1a Arist Ala 4 6 Arist Ala 4 6 Callas Alta 4 6 Calas Rla Nobe Ala Rub Ala Cer Rla Callas Alb Ander Alb Arist Alb Callas Alb If individual lessons in certain terms cannot be scheduled you can also block just those lessons individually Year s Planning in Terms g Number of Terms C Respect the selection in the right pane Periods week a Sub Cla Tea Rm Stude Total Max CorUnSe 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 10 36 10 GEc 1a 1b Hugo Ala CHM 2a 2b Callas A2aF 10 36 10 DS T 1a 1b Andei PL CL 12 36 12 DS 1b 3b Andei PL PEB 2b 2a Rub SH1 ji ji Year s Planning in Terms If a teacher is not available for certain terms you can easily select and block that teacher s lessons using the filter Year s Planning in Terms j xx Y Filter Subject gE Number ol Sub Cla Tea Am Stude Tot PEB F 2b 2a Rubs SH1 BI 4 Rub Ps2 CK 4 Rub Ps2 HI 3a Rub Ria HI 2b Rub Rab f Terms in the right pane a ay 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 m Filter Students Filter Only lessons E Teacher x Filter Only courses J Rub Ala age gt q RE 4 Nobe Ps2 i l Anders
119. Caution The only important thing is that it is basically possible for a lesson to be scheduled in a particular week Entering Values and Factors Each period automatically has a value of 1 unless you set a different value You can change this default value if you wish The following section explains the possibilities in more detail Values 85 Master Data Teachers disi Data The most important parameters and entries for value calculation Rooms cc E bj can be found on the Values tab n gt Periods week Here you Values can see how many lesson 7 oo ce i 1 000 periods have been 35Reductons 1 000 Factor scheduled for the teacher Week School year 25 000 Plan Week Plan Year gt Reductions This is the to 28 000 Targ Week Max Target Year Max tal of reductions entered for 20 742 Value units 419 4 Yearly value the relevant teacher under 4 258 Actual planned 419 4 Actual planned Lessons Reductions 0 000 Free for this teacher gt Factor Depending on the teacher s seniority the periods that he teaches are weighted The value that you enter here will be multiplied with the number of periods per week Week Section gt Plan Week This is where you enter the lesson value units that the teacher must take each week to fulfil his teaching commitment gt Targ Week Max This field is important for variable teacher assignment during optimisation When the optimisation process as
120. Classes cccceeccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeseaeeeeseeaeeeeesseeeeeeesaaeeees 214 Assigning to Teachers and ROOMS cccsssccceeeeceececeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesueesseeeess 216 Department Processing c cccsesseeesceeseeeseeeeseeeseeenseonseeoneeoeneseasens 216 Departments Combo Field cccvecsacnseceteceoncneiesamerntenses selcewasast pldveaeaencnertecoece 216 Master Data and Lessons asuscscmeceesanntecanuesbas semcesacntacmecteeonninenrestentanixectsueieds 217 Man al PIANINO cscs E E E 219 Son E AG OM EE E A E A 219 Cross departmental LESOUCES u ccccccccccccseseeceecsccceseeessuesseseseeccesesessueaseesseeeeeseeseas 221 Fe TTDI ees cesar E E EE teeta EE AEE aus 222 Distributing Department Data cccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 222 Exporting Individual Department ccccsscccsscecesseeceseeceeseeeeeeeseesessaeeeness 224 Restrictions in demo files o cccccccccccscsccecccccccecenscccenseaesecseaesuceeaenscecaenscstnenseesnenses 225 Contents 7 Creating Department Timetables cccccceeseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeneeeennees 225 Importing Department Data into School File ccsssseeseeee 228 Importing Individual Departments iiccenavecsancuveneteasaceseucesianarasacteaaenssssteeweciese ns 230 importing Master Dala chien ercoseaucnoecectananlansunesenct uuacheesannemantesntenaiaaeieasncnaseniter 230 Importing teaches rss sree spectetoceaeaehebaseeeecenedinebocstiiecedoseuteete
121. E Teachers Subjects B Subjects Teachers E Notfall Ausgabe S Break Supervision E Corridors fm Teachers E Days W Weekly summary S0 Substitute Scheduling J Substitution Statement fm Canc Days J Cover Overview BCJ Exam Schedule B eacher Exam Schedule gt Selection Here you can select the master data elements that interest you gt Range Use to define atime period for the the report A further dialogue window Is displayed that is described below gt Font Selecting this option allows you to define the font to be 100 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Values gt gt used to output your report Details Clicking on this button displays a further dialogue window that is described below Page setup You can use this button to select several options for the report layout page orientation and margins Clicking on the lt Range gt button displays the Range periods dialogue window Range periods Range penads Fr To oat Mo t Fms te ee Date 17 09 2007 vi 78 06 2008 w Calendar week Total school year Monday 38 Calendar week 1 School week The various input fields are as follows Range periods section gt Period Number In the input fields Fr and To you can enter the range of school periods that interest you If for example you are only interested in morning periods according to the timetable periods one to five
122. ND Ki at T z 9 a 7 73 E 78 2 E e4 216 gp Untis Department Timetable Department Processing The following rule applies a lesson has the department of the class assigned to it If more than one class is involved in a lesson the first class in the sequence determines the department As lessons 11 7 and 73 in the above example involve a coupling of classes 1a and 1b and as 1a is the first class entered the lesson belongs to the department of class 1a Assigning to Teachers and Rooms Assigning departments to teachers and rooms works in the same way as assigning to classes However these entries have no effect on the department that the lessons belong to this is determined exclusively by the class Department Processing gp Untis allows you to restrict the work within one gpn file to a specific department Departments Combo Field All the departments that you define are displayed in a toolbar combo field Department Timetable Departments Sele IO x amp Sl pee All ME Mechanical Eng EE Electrical Eng SE Structural Eng V Mechanical Eng Electrical Eng Structural Eng Department Processing 217 If this field is not displayed you activate it by right clicking on the v Main Toobar main toolbar v Course scheduling Info Timetable Window Groups v Department Timetable This allows work in gp Untis to be limited to a specifi
123. Output files for Static HTML The contents of the individual files are as follows default thtm Definition of the frame used fuss thtm Footer containing by default the address of Gruber amp Petters logo thtm Logo displayed at the top of the page navbar01 thtm Navigation bar at the top or on the left of the page navbar02 thtm Navigation bar for class by class student selection title thtm Header containing the gp Untis version used the school name and the export date welcome thtm Home page with welcome message Design modifications using CSS As the HTML pages assign each day to a class whose definition is stored centrally in the file untisinfo css you can quickly and easily make modifications to the design of Static HTML for all HTML files Output files for Monitor HTML subst_monitor thtm structure of all content using style sheets CSS You can specify a different template file for each monitor output format by copying the file subst_monitor thtm and renaming it to lt formatname gt thtm lt formatname gt must correspond to the name of the output format Application Notes 307 308 gp Untis Info Timetable Application Notes By modifying these files you can easily influence the way the HTML output is displayed and so for example tailor it to match the layout of your school s website A modification of the font size for Monitor HTML output is also a simple matter as the follow
124. Peria B Classes W Teachers In the example the loading Statistics for the IT rooms show a lower utilisation for the term beginning 13 9 than available in the weekly timetable The reasons for this are time limitations on the lessons meaning that these rooms are not utilised evenly W Subjects Time S Periods Repa Z O Calendar week SC Break Supervision Samed Male Total school year Corridors ld I Teachers Days Weekly summary BC Substitute Scheduling J Substitution Statement I Canc Days J Cover Overview BC Exam Schedule Whole Term qeUntis2008 qp Untis 1 Tedlizenz Gruber amp Petters Loadine Statistics Room Loading Statistics _ g 3 9 2004 10 7 2005 179 Schogifa mT Lar Full name ne a Allocated pers Hrs Mi A pilable Allocated pers sea a l Room1 o Aa a 74 1790 1163 969 B4 IT Room 2 Ee Ta IT Room3 1790 649 540 26 Prater oa bast Lanett 1 V b A precondition for the comparison is that the option With yearly totals as well is checked in the Details window during print selection Print selection Room 13 13 Print details 183 184 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Terms The subject periods report The subject periods report contains a comparison of target yearly periods with actually scheduled periods over the terms The example shows an o
125. Periods week vv Po A Optimisation of the JL department ME M 4 a Tejo 5 aj al Eef Ex 7 ror ror ror Por a oF Optimisation of the _ eta department EE _ li S por an Ha ror 6 anol Ha Ha 7 ror por PoF Por Jon of te Pe oe Optimisation of th department SE The ME department begins the creation of the the sports timetable all the periods in the timetable are available for optimisation The EE department is then optimised all periods excluding those occupied by the ME department are available In the final step the SE department s timetable is created with the remaining vacant periods of the room SH1 222 ciie e Ha i E gp Untis Department Timetable Distributing Department Data Classes Kla BED xe Ath Name Full name 1a Class1a 1b Class 1b Class 2a Printing The departments combo field has a direct influence on the printing functionality of go Untis When printing from all master data timetable views only those elements are presented that are assigned either to the currently active department or to none at all 1c Class 1c Timetab MES a b A Ai Sog SE Structural Engine E Class es Print selection Name Full name Class es 1 5 Class 2s 3c Class 3c 4c Class 4c class 5a Distributing Department Data When department data are distributed a
126. Supervision 243 Notes for Web Designers 306 Number of Periods 82 Number of Periods per Term Min Max 197 Year Planning in Terms 200 Number of Terms 190 O Off site Buildings 256 Off site Rooms and Break Supervision 256 Optimisation 240 Supervisions 248 Year Planning in Terms 200 Optimisation over Several Terms 207 Optimisation Settings Year Planning in Terms 203 Output HTML 260 Static HTML 263 Tab 261 Overall Timetable 213 Merge Department Data 228 Processing 231 P Path for Info Mode 298 Percentage Factor Yearly Values 112 Period Timetable and Break Supervisions 255 Period specific Data 177 Periodic Lesson Group 156 Periodicity 139 Periodicity and Holidays 158 Periodicity Specification 156 Periods 66 86 88 Periods per Week 18 68 Plan Week 87 Plan Year 45 113 Planning Tools 52 Previous Year Class 40 Previous year name 37 Previous year teacher 37 Print Selection Info Mode 300 Index 319 Printing Info Mode 301 Several Weeks 181 Q Qualification 78 F Reduction 19 Reduction reason 19 Reductions 92 Refresh Screen Info Mode 300 Refresh Time 277 Remove Filter Year Planning in Terms 193 Resources 213 Restrict Substitution Day Static HTML 271 Rooms 213 S Scheduling Dialogue Time Limitation 170 School Data 108 School Days 98 123 142 School days 111 School File Merge Department Data 228 School Levels 30 School type 66 School Year Calendar 121 123 133 Lesson Groups 157 Schoo
127. Teachers B Rooms S Free Periods fm Classes fm eachers B Rooms B Students Subject Periods Report B Classes B Teachers B Subjects Time ECI Periods Report E Subjects Teachers E Notfall Ausgabe Break Supervision f Corridors E Teachers W Days E Weekly summary SCJ Substitute Scheduling fm Substitution Statement J Canc Days J Cover Overnew aJ Exam Schedule B Teacher Exam Schedule Teachers Subjects Teacher 11 11 Ops dnt ata 7 With ignored lessons With classes Cancel With ignored lessons On the Codes tab under lessons you have the option of ignoring lessons Ignored lessons are counted in the calculation but are not scheduled 98 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Values gt With classes Checking this option results in the report being extended to include classes The teachers subjects report will then additionally list for each subject the number of periods the teachers take and the relevant classes The same applies to the subjects teachers report gt Font You can click on this button to select the font to be used to output the report gt Page setup You can use this button to select several options for the report layout page orientation and margins A sample teachers subjects report gp Untis 2008 Timetable 2008 2009 Testschool DEMO 11 Valid from 10 October For demo andtestonly Teachers Subjects Teachers Subjects Per Value units New Isaac 25 0 32 604 M
128. Terms 199 Factors 86 88 90 91 110 115 118 Class 88 Date Limits 126 Entering 85 95 fixed 95 Subject 87 Teacher 86 Filter Year Planning in Terms 193 Filters 55 Finnish Term Planning 208 Focussed Learning 189 Following Terms Transfer Changes 178 Form View 116 125 Fortnightly Optimisation 164 Fortnightly Lesson 156 From To 154 G General HTML Settings 305 Graduating Class Time Limitation 154 Grid Display 125 Grid View 116 119 Group Factor 96 133 H Healthcare Vocational Schools Year Planning in Terms 189 HTML 260 Footer 305 htmlipath 308 Tab 303 Template File 307 Timetable Settings 302 HTML Settings in Timetable 302 HTML Template Parameter 281 Info Timetable HTML based 259 Info Mode 259 294 Changing the Reload Time 299 Data Security 295 gp Untis MultiUser 301 Setting up Info Terminal 297 Setting up Window Groups 295 Index 317 Switching Off Printing 301 Timetables in the Network 294 Info Modus 299 Info Terminals 294 Requirements 295 Info Terminal 294 295 Setting up 297 Info Timetable 299 Application Notes 302 Control Window 261 Database Export 293 Delete Output Folder 263 Dialogue 261 E Mail Distribution 282 HTML Output 260 Info Mode 294 Menu Modules 261 Output Setting 262 Output Settings 262 Start Date 262 Static HTML 263 Teacher Terminals 262 Toolbar 291 Info1 296 Interruption 86 132 K Kombination mehrerer zeitl Befristungen 187 L Label Ter
129. The class factors are often used to upvalue evening school lessons gt Periods week The number of periods per week that this class is taught Values Master Data Teachers N Roos Subjects Students All Elements Element Riobup Term Overview 87 88 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Values Value units week The total value of the lessons taught in this class Yearly value The total value of the lessons taught in this class over the whole school year Free without a teacher The total value of lessons in this class that have not been assigned a teacher Weeks of lessons The number of weeks in the school year in which this class is taught Lessons As with the master data you will find a tab labelled Values in all the individual lesson views e g Lessons Teachers that gives you the following opportunities to display and enter data Values Value or Factor Line value Tactor 1 826 Value unitsweek Target per gt Factor Subject 0 913 Classless Teacher 1 000 40 Weeks of lessons Value or Factor You can enter an additional factor in this field or an absolute value that overrides all other factors Please refer to the more detailed description in the Appendix Line value factor Whereas the first input field affects the whole lesson you can enter values here that influence a single coupling line Values 89 gt Value units week This en
130. Time Cla Rm Tea Text Monday 6 00 6 45 3a R3a Rub Monday 6 00 6 45 3b Ra Hugo Monday 9 50 10 55 4 R3a Hugo Tuesday 11 40 12 25 2b R2b Rub Wednesday 6 55 9 40 2a R2a Hugo Wednesday 9 50 10 35 2a R2a Hugo Wednesday 9 50 10 35 3a R3a Rub Thursday 8 00 6 45 3b Ra Hugo Thursday 6 55 9 40 4 R3a Hugo Thursday 10 45 11 30 2b R2b Rub Friday 6 55 9 40 1b Rib Ander GEC Geography and Economics Day Time Cla Rm Tea Text Monday 6 00 6 45 3a Hugo Monday 8 00 8 45 3a Hugo Monday 8 00 8 45 1a 1b 2a 2b Hugo Monday 6 55 9 40 3b Ra Hugo Wednesday 8 00 6 45 1a 1b 2a 2b Rla Hugo Wednesday 10 45 11 30 4 Gym Hugo Thursday 9 50 10 35 3b Ra Hugo Friday 10 45 11 30 4 Gym Hugo Gruber amp Petters Software Subjects Time Subject 19 19 Details Fort Page setup pK Cancel 104 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Values School Data Settings You can view the following information on the Values tab under the Time Grid menu option Settings School Data Calendar N Miscellanequs Print School Data Licence Daka General Overview Values 261 040 Value totals for all teachers w Main Toolbar w Toolbar w Status bar 14 920 Ignored lessons total 26 730 Open period values without teachers Light Mode 230 000 Planned Periods for all teachers 22 297 Total Planned Actual if gt 0 for all Teachers School balance sheet 203 337 Annual average without external teachers 0
131. Timetable icon Switching off printing You only need to check the corresponding box in the window groups Window window in order to deactivate printing gt Select the menu item Windows Window Half Groups gt Check the box No print out Info for e g Infot Full name No point out Info Num i i Diagnosis Timetable Diagnose L This results in the lt Print gt icon being removed from timetable Timetables the info timetable toolbar infol Infol Teachers Info Info Classes CesDistib Lesson distibubon _ sched Dial Scheduling dialogue C Man Sched Manual scheduling Standard Standard co 07 Of e oo Pa s gp Untis MultiUser in Info Mode Info Mode also works when you use the multi user version of gp Untis Whereas the single user version requires the path to the file ii in the command line the multi user version requires the school sie ia school year and version separated by and preceded by DB Logn Instead of a a C gp Untis Demo_Info gpn Infol Mal you would enter ae lee DB myschool11 2008 2009 1 Infol aD 1 DB 903066 2007 2008 1 op 2 DB 903066 2005 2006 1 1 3 DB 903066 2006 2007 1 1 4 Demo Info gpn 5 DSe11 2007 2008 1 6 D8 200190 SRB 2005 2007 3 7 DS 200190 SRB 2006 2007 1 8 DB 200190 SRB 2006 2007 2 3 C Programmeap Untis derno app This is the same name that can be found in the list of most recently opened file
132. U x L I OQ D User Mnaual G Rm o dS OSU Modules GisvanWirelalerl esson Planning Multiweek Timetables Department Timetables Break Supervisions Info limetable GRUBER amp PETTERS SOFTWARE 0 Untis Modu User Manual Lesson Planning Multiweek Timetables Department Timetables Break Supervisions Info Timetable py i I GRUBER amp PETTERS SOFTWARE A 2000 Stockerau Belvederegasse 11 e 43 2266 62241 0 e office grupet at e www grupet at Contents Contents LESSON PLANNING AND VALUE CALCULATION 11 Introduction cttectecres eneseccoessteoestaescaestet ns oases anesaneusanenateccaseadendengusetssurueece 13 OVEIVICW oo ceccecceceececeeceeeeceeeeeeesueeesuseuseeeaseeseseuseeeuseuseseuseseuseuseseusensaseess 14 Part l Lesson Planning sossecstccnce cece teseteesececeszenesecexetesnaesansesnessecesstwers 17 Teachers WOFK susseisessined eienaar Eiana NANNA aaia 18 Target teaching lessons win creche cxcccsastev sceninansanvens ices sxedacencss aster ehieiancelvnen aussie 18 FSG C TONG aee E E A N vebinosees 19 Temporary reductions a arss sass Sassen sarencisgagennatedaoncadiaepenaenanaeceeddedeateonsecdaeaetepseaatoeness 21 Reductions With negative values ccccccccccsssseseccecsausseseccessaueneeeessssausseseessssaaeseees 22 L e EN OON N AEEA ANE TAEAE E A A T 23 Automatic yearly balance at change Of school yeat ccccsccccsseeceseeceecnseesenee
133. a Se Sa ae ee ee a Type Aas Gaus Heat Eurie ot tt oe 461 64 TE Day time requests i ha onthly statement cases Teachers Work 43 Print Preview Print Details 44 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Teachers Work Settings Time Grid School Data Calendar Print Licence Daka w Main Toolbar w Toolbar w Status bar Light Mode Teacher s Yearly Work With the teacher s yearly work model as the name suggests the teacher s workload applies to the year as a whole and not as usual to one week The following values can contribute to the yearly workload gt lessons according to the timetable gt duties resulting from lessons held such as preparation follow up work corrections etc gt duties that depend on the scale of the teacher s target workload such as further training gt miscellaneous duties such as timetable scheduling theatre group supervision etc Requirement The box Yearly Values on the Value Calculation tab under Settings Miscellaneous must be checked This causes the tab Yearly work to be displayed in the teacher master data Miscellaneous Settings HTML E Mail Multiple Terms Autalnfo _ Internet Auto save Directories Timetable Customise Value Calculation Warnings Value Calculation without Subject Factor _ without Teacher Factor C without Class Factor Value Cal
134. a substitutions and Only messages refer to the fields with the same name that can be checked in the substitutions window Only messages not yet sent refers to those events that have not yet been sent by SMS or e mail and have therefore not yet caused the sent box in the substitution messages window to be activated X Substitution messages Counter Subst Substitute scheduling Weighting Header absences Other Colour Substitution messages Notify via E Mail SMS i Send message Event is within n school days Subst Type Date 713 Substi 28 8 Mo 1 DE Hugo Nobel 3b 3b Ra Ra 714 Substt 28 8 Mo 2 DE Hugo Curie 3a 3a R3a R3a 25 Break 28 8 Mo 2 3 Hugo Gauss Bas Bas 715 Substi 28 8 Mo 3 DE Hugo Gauss 4 4 Ria Ria 4 Substi 28 8 Mo Gauss 4 The field Event is within n school days indicates how many days from the output date substitution messages should be sent The E Mail and SMS options in the Notify via section can be used to specify whether the fields with the same name in the messages window should by default be activated or not If no e mail address or mobile telephone number is entered in the teacher master data the notification method fields will in any case be deactivated in the messages window Database Export This Info Timetable function can be used to export data from gp Untis for further processi
135. able or all lesson tables and creates weekly periods for all classes in the appropriate school types from the specified subjects If the program encounters a subject group a special window is displayed in which you can specify how many periods should be created for each subject Weekly periods input Lessons table 1070 SClence Copy subjects into the ines lesson table Subject Per Use this function to accomplish the reverse process If you have already created lessons for the classes you can use these to TE Enter create a lesson table The only Subjects condition is that you have already entered the lesson tables for the individual classes in the master data You can choose to enter subjects just for the currently selected lesson table or for all lesson tables Copy subjects into the lesson table Subjects and the number of weekly units ane copied to the lesson tables Please press the lt OK gt button bo continue OF Cancel L Only for the current time ond Planning Tools 71 Allocate lesson tables to classes Use this function to assign another class to a lesson table In the Delete figure clicking on lt OK gt would allocate the 1010 lower level lesson E Classes table to class 2a in addition to classes 1a 1b and 2b E Class es x Class 1a Gauss 1010 1b Class 1b Newton 1010 2a Class 2a Hugo 1010 2b Class 2b Andersen 1010 Ja Class 3a Aristoteles 33333 3b Cl
136. activate the Count only school days option two weeks of holidays over Christmas will not be counted This results inthe following value 1 weekly period 15 weeks 15 000 Newton L Tea Lessons Timetable Codes Values Value or Factor m Line value factor Brassed 15 0 Value units week New Newton Target pet L No Cte Per Teach Subjec Class Subjec Home Double From To Total t 3 26 00 10 10 10 5 9 4 0211 New GA 2a 2b Value Line value Subj factor Class fact Value B 0 10 10 Calendar of the school year Lessons 4 Date Mo 17 9 2007 No lesson Legend Breaks Holiday Weekend EN w Calendar week 38 Public Holiday EE School year Different term Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr September 17 18 19 20 21 2007 October im November 11 92 AS 04 PS 96 17 18 99 20 27 December PAS 67 8 9 00 mn ne s 94 15 16 a7 98 119 120 January 12 13 19 20 February 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 agog March T af 9 10 11 12 13 141516 17 18 19 20 21 April 1 2 3 45 T3 14 15 16 17 1819 20 21 22 23 24 25 May 1 23 TT 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 June 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 General data Values for Count only Co School year Number of days 189 Number cibsaieeiless 20 Lessons Number of days 75 If you enter a v
137. ages The term timetable offers the following advantages gt You havea single file for the whole school year gt Statistical analyses can be performed at any time on the complete school year gt Term and timetable changes can take place during the week gt Weekly overview reports especially for printing or for output to the intranet internet accurately reflect the changing timetable gt Cover planning always accesses the currently valid timetable automatically Mistakes are impossible Terms 171 172 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Terms Opening a new Term In principle you create your timetable at the beginning of the school year as usual If something occurs in the course of the school year that requires a fundamental change to the timetable you can opena new term The procedure is described below Gano Please open the demo gpn file i UE windows The term dialogue is owing S accessed under Modules satalaiti i Student Timetable gt i os M u Iti ple Te rms M u Iti ple Course Scheduling gt 1 Planning at Toni Finnish Term Planning Terms Department Timetable gt Minutes Timetable Break Supervisions Info Timetable MultiUser gt Currently there is only one term which is called Total school year by default Click on the button lt New term from mother term gt A window opens where you can enter E Terms the short name and full name of
138. ages by SMS E Mail If you have the Cover Planning module you can use the Info Timetable module to inform colleagues by e mail or SMS of any change in the timetable In order for SMS transmission to function correctly gp Untis must be informed about the provider the messages should be sent by The corresponding settings are entered on the E Mail tab under Settings Miscellaneous Communication with the provider is effected via an http interface and you can enter the appropriate URL for the transmission of messages in the SMS section of the window Miscellaneous Settings i Tip Z S M S Pro vi ders Auto save _ Directories Timetable Customise Value Calculation Wamings 7 HTML E Mail Multiple Terms Autolnfo Internet Gruber amp Petters ha ve concluded Mailsystem Transmission of E Mail agreements with SMS pro viders in SimpleMAPI e g Outlook Express Keep a log file MAPI e g Outlook ise g order to obtain favourable prices for SMTP C Programme gp Untis 2007 Untis_Mail log S MS m e S S ag e S We wo u ld A oe therefore recommend that you Seen ie contact your nearest gp Untis Z Mail sever requires auth before sending partner who will be pleased to a inform you of the possibilities in your buia region and where possible let you have the corresponding URL Miscellaneous Settings __Auto save Directories Timetable Customise Value Calculation Warnings
139. al planned entry difference between actual value and desired value will be updated In some Scandinavian countries it is usual to employ part time teachers on the basis of a percentage of a full teaching commitment The figure on the following page shows teacher Andersen defined as a part time teacher with 20 commitment and teacher Nobel with 50 commitment The yearly percentage factor makes it possible to see at a glance what percentage of the target workload has been assigned Value Calculation C without Subject Factor without Teacher Factor C without Class Factor 112 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Examples Teachers Tea BD x Aha B82 736 Value ValueCorrection C Marked m C Ignore i L Lock C Don t Print N Gauss New Newton Hugo Hugo Nobel Nobel k Rub Rubens Curie Curie Name Full name Andej Andersen Arist Aristoteles Cervantes Time Requests Full name Text Description NTPs Periods day Factor 1 000 1 100 1 000 1 000 1 009 T 1 000 Teacher Timetable 13 0 Periods week 9 5 Reductions Week School year 25 000 Plan wifek 100 00 Plan Year 28 000 Targ W ak Max 23 020 Value units 73 6 1 980 Actual planned 26 4 1 000 Factor Target Year Max Yearly value Actual planned PlanYear Actual planned Value 100 00 100 00 100 00 20 00 a 100 00 100 00
140. all teachers who have an appropriate qualification and whose Targ Week Max value to be found under Master Data Teachers on the Values tab would not be exceeded in the event of an exchange Planning Tools 81 aes 14 0 eee 1 000 Factor 0 1 Reductions Week Sehool ear 26 000 Plan Wweek Planear ae TargetY ear Max Falue units 551 4 early value 4 433 Actual planned 551 4 Actual planned O 000 Free for this teacher Bottlenecks due to an unfavourable assignment of teachers to lessons will be avoided in the process of optimisation You can specify for which lessons an exchange of teachers may be performed by checking the V Variable teacher code box gp Untis will leave the teacher assignments for all other lessons unchanged An exception to this is the teacher The system always searches for a suitable replacement i e a teacher with the qualification for the corresponding subject The V code applies to all teachers of a lesson If however you do not wish to have individual teachers of a coupled lesson exchanged you must check the Teacher allocation locked box in the corresponding line of the details window This effectively overrides any V code set for this teacher Teache Subjec Classfes Subjec Home Room Male Female Linnetext Stat Coc Line value Linetext 2 Teachei Teacher alocat CIES GA 8 3b 2 Cue TX 3b lf for some reason you do not wish th
141. alue calculation will automatically take this into account Thus a two hour lesson held once a fortnight will have a value of 1 If the lesson has an irregular time pattern the value will be divided up appropriately Please refer to the chapter on Value Calculation with the Multi Week Timetable Module on page 119 for more details Optimisation and Lesson Groups All time periods are included in optimisation For example if one lesson is to take place only during the first semester and another during the second semesier there is therefore no time overlap the optimisation process can schedule the two lessons in the same slot in the timetable e g first period on Monday Weekly alternating lessons Two lessons are sometime combined in such a way that they alternate on the same day every week and can be scheduled in the same period without the slot being manually fixed locked in advance For example instrumental tuition could alternate in a fortnightly cycle with choir practice When scheduling automatically go Untis normally selects the best slot for a lesson If different teachers are involved in the lessons it is highly likely that the two lessons will not be scheduled at the same time in the timetable due to the teachers differing timetables as this would produce a better curriculum from the point of view of non teaching periods However you can use simultaneous groups to set a preference for two different lessons to
142. alue in the Target per yr field on the Values tab in lessons this number of hours will be used in the value calculation In this case time limitations will no longer be taken into consideration 3 Newton L Tea Lesson number Lessons Timetable Codes Values 4 l Value or Factor Line value factor For element New i time limitation is ignored 37 Target per yr Newton 26 0 Periods week Cantar Count only school days elk JAED X Ara Rm JOUA cai a HRe zl L No CliTe Per Teach Subjec Class Subjec Home Double From To Value Lige ve pj factor Class fact Value Eff time ranj a 2600 10 10 10 S 9 One a i Pio 10 DEX New GA 2a 2b R2a 1050 1 000 R2a 1 000 Gym R2a 1 000 Gym R2b 1 000 R2b 1 000 Gym R3a 1 000 1 10 75 6 17 9 286 EN 131 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable Classes Teachers Matrix Term Overdew Locked Lessons Reductions weekly values Teacher Assignment Team Optimisation Subject Bottle Necks Emphasis Periods Display Lessons Lesson Table Syllabus Lesson Seguente Calendar School Year Lesson Groups You can assign lessons to lesson groups which are limited to certain periods and for which certain factors are valid There can also be interruptions within the time limitation of a group of lessons You can find lesson groups under
143. art of the matrix mark the desired area and select the lt Print gt or lt Print preview options gt This will output the total above the selected area 1a 1h 2a zh J ak 4 E 19 17 19 17 17 45 19 RE 5 ZMobel Zobel Mobel 2Mobel 2Mobel Zobel Sobel CH 1 talas talas Calas 1Mallas 1MCallas DE 15 S Rub HRUE JE SiCallas GU qi BHuga EN 4 sarit ES 2ce 3er HI 5 ViSnder 2Hugo 2 Rub 2Rub Hugo Hugo GEC 2 2fHugo 2MHugo AHU m Ab 2a 3b E sAr 5 ee Ia r Ga t E aor bees Bi Bi Cer Le PLee Er Nt ater PH 4 oNew BMew dew aneLUL 5 Ander 2Hugo 2mub MIL 4 2iCallas talas Callas 2iCallas 247 2r ee EOEA Ma 15 Sert aew sinew _ TH 5 durie Jurie Aurie SCurie SA JIJ AR 7 XCalas 3iCallas 2 Callas Calas Calas 2al EO 6 ater aber 2iCer DS 5 af Bander 27 2 a0 ai ay HE O Bleue Aurie CK o 2Rub PEB 6 ARuUb 3Ruk ARub BRU ARuUbB ARub Aen PEG 6 JArist SiSrist Arist Arist Arist Sierist Murie CTE T 2icurie Siler Jalas 27 Zitew 2iduga 2iArist Other settings gt Selection of the week lesson display will be limited to one week i e only those lessons will be displayed that take place in the selected week This option is only available with the Multi Week module gt Entries in the cell create a new lesson if this box is not activated you can revise existing entries in the lesson matrix and your changes will have an immediate effect on the lesson in question However
144. as 164 Optimisation and Lesson Groups ccceecccceceseeeceeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeseeseeeeesaaeeeees 164 Weekly alternating leSSonSs oa noooaannnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnrrnnnnnrnnnnnnnennne 164 LOCK HOSS OV OI raised sc aso ass cec sed pice Eee a ies 167 Assigning a lesson group automatically 0 1 1 ccsccccccssseeecnsneseccenanseeessaesesessaansssess 168 Timetable TAO OG esmis perir iniisii unn E ETARE E e a 169 Scheduling Dialogue and Time Limitation ccccccessceeceesseeeeeesseeeeseaseeees 170 TENS sorora 171 Opening a new Term ccccccceeecccceseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeecueeeeeeesueeseeeessaeseesssueeeeessaaeees 172 EMDEGaNO a TO aara i E e TEE E 174 Deleting a Term oos nnonnnnnennnnnnnnnnnrnnnnrrnnnnrnrnnnrnrrnrrnrrnnrnnnnnronnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnrennnnrennnnrnne 179 Changing Data in a Term cccccccccceeeccececeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeseceeeeeeeeeeeesaaaeeeeseaaaes 176 Term specific applies to current term cccccccsssssssesccssanseeeeceesanauessseessnsaanseees 176 Period specific optional for all subsequent terms ccccceeeeeee eee eneeeeeeeeeeaeenenes 177 Term independent global storage for All termS ccccssseccccssseeeeceneeseseansesessaaes 178 Term Overvi W ee cresie oecncdenidaatonscancanatinnnemadvendoteaincanenaidicsseialeatonsesdentnns dhecenenaues 178 OG SG TONS ea A E E 179 Terms and Timetable Display cccccessccceeeeceeeeceeeeceseeeeeueeseaeessaesessaeeseas 1
145. ass only 0 5 value units are required for the lesson Teacher Class and Subject factors Please open the Demo2 gpn file and in the Lessons Teachers select teacher New Look at lesson number 25 The lesson has 4 862 value units and is calculated as follows Weekly periods 4 Teacher factor 1 100 Class factor 1 000 Subject factor 1 105 4 862 All factors in the master data are included in the calculation L No Cl Te Per 3 Newton L Tea new ESE LD XK Lesson number 25 I For element New Newton 26 0 Periods week 32 104 Value units week Descriotion 26 00 10 10 10 New GA MA 2a PH 2a New a m 4 2 2 5 2 2 3 4 3 Teach Subjec Classi Subject Home Double From To 2a 2b Max BY De LOA amp a Lessons Timetable Codes Values Value or Factor Line value factor 4 862 Value units week Target per yr Factor Subject 1 105 Classes 1 000 Teacher 1 100 Value Line value Subj factor Class factc Value 5 0 0 10 106 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Values Value Calculation without Subject Factor without Teacher Factor without Class Factor If these factors are not to be taken into consideration check the corresponding boxes on the Value Calculation tab under Settings Miscellaneous and the value for this lesson changes to 4 3 Newton L Tea af m V AFOK ATE De SOO amp
146. ass 3b Callas 33333 4 Class 4 Nobel 33333 t Lesson Table Syllabus Less O X 2l A Bs amp ck Name Full name Name tee Lover level ___ Create a lev 10o E Lower level Fullname Doub Block 1a 1b 2a 2 2a 4 2 Delete classes Use this function to remove a class whose column you have selected in the subject table from the lesson table Delete Classes Print and print preview You can print both the grid on the left lesson tables as well as the 24 Print Preview one on the right subject tables depending on where your focus Print lies Nene Full name 1010 33333 Advanced level 72 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Planning Tools x Lesson Comparison Lesson Comparison The Lesson Comparison function was created to allow the input data between two terms of a file or between two different gp Untis files to be compared more easily For the comparison of two terms you also require the Multiple Term Timetable that is included in the Multi week Timetable which is part of the Cover Planning module Lesson comparison between two files lt is sometimes necessary to compare the data of two different files e g between a file that you are currently processing and a previously created backup file Lesson comparison is activated from the lesson matrix Lessons Matrix by clicking on the corresponding
147. asses Class ec eeee me Lessons Sche cesses n ee Class teaches Teachers 12 Male Rooms 6 a Alias name Subjects amale Students 58 Students 101 0 Lessons table All Elements Time range 1a Previous year s name Elenment Riolup Term Orere To 2 Class level Regular school From Dept Per This field shows how many periods per week the teacher already takes in this subject or in subjects in the subject group This column is purely informational for this reason you cannot enter anything in it If you delete a subject under Master Data Subjects for which a teacher qualification has been defined for a teacher the qualification will also be deleted There are a number of buttons next to the teaching qualification table Create tea qual from lessons Clicking this button results in the list of teaching qualifications being automatically created from the lessons that have so far been entered This assumes that a teacher is qualified to teach every lesson that he she takes Teachers Work Teaching qualifications that have already been entered will not be modified Del Teach Qualif Clicking this button results in the lists of teaching qualifications for all teachers being deleted You can delete individual teaching qualifications by selecting the desired row and pressing lt Del gt B Subject and Subject Group You can select colours to differentiate
148. assign several lesson groups to one lesson with the system then deciding during timetable optimisation a which of the lesson groups concerned is more suitable and b which lessons can be scheduled simultaneously without a collision occurring This means that you only need to tell the system which lesson should be scheduled every two weeks and it does not matter whether week A or week B comes first and which lessons alternate every fortnight The system should make the optimal decision The procedure is described below A number of lessons are held in a fortnightly cycle at the school e g the subjects DS GA GEc SPORT etc It really does not matter in which week a particular lesson takes place Create two lesson groups again one for week A and the other for week B 3 Lesson Groups Gru Display the Les Groups and oy Al H Assi Les Grp columns in a lessons window Now enter I O 139 107 OC EEN 10 7 both lesson groups short Oo oO names separated by a comma for the lessons that are to take place every fortnight Lesson Groups 169 Timetable optimisation will now assign the lesson groups and decide which lessons can be scheduled simultaneously The Assigned Lesson Group column will display which of the lesson groups in question has been selected for the lesson After timetable optimisation the results could be as follows For some lessons lesson group A week A has been
149. ata into the table create table lesson teacher char 20 day tinyint period _ tinyint subject char 20 room char 20 lessonid int flag int class char 20 week char 53 If for example a timetable for teacher New for week 37 is to be displayed you can issue the following SQL statement to find the data records required Select from lesson where teacher New and not mid week 37 1 0 The required data for every possible period i e periods 1 through 8 from Monday to Friday can now be found in the result of the database query The week flag for the 37th week indicates whether lessons take place or whether they are not applicable If the timetable is to be represented without any particular flag indicating whether lessons apply or not the data records can be ignored when week flag x Application Notes 313 314 gp Untis Info Timetable Application Notes Add Ons Timetables on Handhelds With the help of a small add on application you can take your timetables with you including substitution data if you use the Cover Planning module This application is available in two variations the free version allows the timetable to be retrieved for one teacher The registered commercial version allows the timetables for all teachers classes rooms and subjects in the school to be retrieved and also for break supervision if required It is also possible to search for free rooms for a
150. athematics 13 0 15 802 Class 2a Hugo 4 0 4 562 Class 2b Andersen 5 0 6 077 Class 3b Callas 4 0 4 562 Graphics 1 0 1 155 Class 2a Hugo 1 0 1 155 Class 2b Andersen 1 0 1 155 Physics 9 0 10 395 Class 2a Hugo 2 0 2 310 Class 2b Andersen 2 0 2 310 Class 3a Aristoteles 2 0 2 310 Class 3b Callas 3 0 3 465 Boys PE 3 0 3 152 Class 4 Nobel 3 0 3 152 Class Teacher 20 2 101 Class 3a Aristoteles 2 0 2 101 Subjects Periods Report Three options are available in report selection Reports Selection Values 99 under Subjects Period Report The first two Classes and ss Sethings Teachers are particularly interesting in conjunction with the Target per yr option on the Values tab under lessons Teachers and Classes reports The Teachers report described below is representative of both reports All the functions and options are the same in the Classes report The third report Subjects Time is described subsequently Selecting the teachers report results in the accustomed print selection dialogue being displayed with several options Print selection Teacher 10 10 Details Page setup Emergency list Report selection Seles Loading Statistics fm Classes fm Teachers B Rooms S0 Free Periods fe Classes B eachers Rooms B students S0 Subject Periods Report B Classes a B Subjects Time BCJ Periods Reponst
151. ayout of the individual pages The files are available as so called templates in the gp Untis directory e g C program files gp Untis 2008 and can be tailored to match your school s corporate design In addition to the definition of the HTML page layout the files with the extension thtm contain wildcards that gp Untis replaces with various values during export These wildcards are defined in the format lt LIN wildcard gt with the following variables being used for wildcard prg program ver version dat date tim time abt department he1 heading1 from menu item Reports Settings he2 heading2 from menu item Reports Settings sm1 line1 of the school description defined in the licence data sm2 line2 of the school description defined in the licence data naw width of the navigation bar defined in the field of the same name on the Navigation tab in Static HTML chs the following header is output in all template files lt meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset chs gt The character set is important for the correct display of different sets of characters and can therefore be changed using the chs variable This variable is preallocated by gp Untis depending on the language version However you can also specify this in the untis ini file by default in the Windows directory inthe Info section with the following entry PageEncoding lt chs gt
152. be borne in mind that breaks can be of different lengths that not all teachers may be drawn on as frequently as others and only at those times when they are at school and scheduled for teaching Scheduling break supervision is therefore an integral part of timetable scheduling The status of individual rooms and corridors must also be included in scheduling particularly for large schools It can be difficult even unreasonable to have to supervise a break in a corridor in the west wing of a school following a lesson in the east wing The Break Supervision module allows you to take all this into consideration and thereby achieve perfect supervision planning The Break Supervision module is designed for break supervision to be scheduled after the timetable has been completed The following chapter takes you through the steps necessary for scheduling break supervision from the preparatory master data input and the actual scheduling through to the publication of the supervision in the timetable as a printed report or on the Internet The examples contained in this chapter can best be followed using the Demo6 gpn file The input required for the Break Supervision module has already been made in this file from to mother Introduction 239 240 gp Untis Break Supervision Preparatory Inputs eee ee e me Lessons Sche Classes Teachers Rooms Subjects Students All Elements Element Rolup Term Overvie
153. ber of public holidays 3 Year s Planning in Terms Span FS Carry the school weeks 11 GEc lal Ria 6 CHA 2a 2 R2a R2b 10 36 10 7 DS T 1a 1 PL CL 12 35 Rae 73 PEG 1a1 SH2 SH1 14 46 14 fo DS iba PL 12 36 12 75 PEB 2b2 SH1SH2 14 46 14 81 TXE 2 OPL 14 46 14 3 Year s Planning in Terms Mox Qn H KK YN x amp Number of Terms C Respect the selection in the right pane Periods week a Sub Cla Tea Am Stude Total Max Co UnSe 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 3 10 3 6 10 CH M 2a 2b Callas R2aF 10 36 10 DS T 1a 1b Ande PL CL 12 36 12 PEGI 1a 1b Arist F SH25 14 46 14 DS 1b 3b Ander PL 12 36 12 PEB F 2b 2a Rubs 5H1 14 46 14 Tx D 2b 2a Curie CL PL 14 46 14 GA 2a2b New R2a 14 46 14 ARM 3a 3b Callas R3a F 14 46 14 PEG 3a 3b Arist F SH2 14 46 14 DS H 3a 3b Ande PL HE 12 36 12 haa 1 Arnab ODIs oc AC oc is Entering total total weekly periods Enter the total number of periods per week that are to be scheduled over the terms in the Total column In the example 62 weekly periods of the subject PH Physics are to be spread over the school year for class 1a Year s Planning in Terms 3 Year s Planning in Terms Om Hm KK YN x a g Number of Terms C Respect the selection in the right pane Periods week Tea Am Studel Total Max Coc Unse 1
154. c department and minimises the risk of making changes to another department by mistake The following sections illustrate the influence of a predefined department on the various parts of the system Customise Master Data and Lessons If you open a master data window after selecting a department only those elements for the active department as well as all elements not yet assigned will be displayed gt K Classes Cla 4 Classes Cla rn xu A ja Dae ABs Moreover when you create a new masier data element it will be automatically assigned the active department gi Classes Cla T m x f Automatic assignment of the active department 218 gp Untis Department Timetable Department Processing Classes Kla MHD XK Bt Class 1a Class 4c lagaeawad Name Full name ae WW I Similarly only those elements can be chosen from the selection combo fields in lessons windows that have been been assigned either the active department or none at all a 4c f _ E ex BY De OOF ad Teache Subject Class e Subject Home R Double pers Block 4 4 u 0 5 0 D dabhRb 02 4a 4b 41 Rab 4a 4b 4 R4b R c R c R c R c R c mok 2l E af I RARRAR ER NjeNNN aed 8 8352523 2 eeegRz eee FS 124 w m Please note that in the above screen sh
155. case of coupled lessons the teacher entered will be removed from all classes In the demo file this happens for example with lesson number 1 where the coupling extends over several class years gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Teachers Work If you select the toolbar icon lt Last year s teacher gt gp Untis will go through the lessons of the previous year s class entered and when it encounters the same subject will enter the teacher in the current class Please now look at the lessons of class 4 and those of class 3a i e the previous year s class 3 Class 3a Aristoteles L Cla Efx 5 oo Ee g Class 4 Nobel L Cla ack JAED 2I A son number 4 Lesson number aypiect Class es CHP 2a 2b 3a 3b 5 2 2 2 6 2 2 3 pe P 2 38 4 39 l 2 1 40 2 2 1 f4 2 42 1 ATI 2 43 2 Nobel 2 44 2 Rub 67 2 45 3 Cer 68 a 1 e 46 2 Cer 69 1 2 3 Arist 47 2 New CTe 3a E net Hugo oe subject w was not taught n 4 24 cass main the previous year 72 1 22 Cure DE 4 Ya i 2 New CTe 4 si m gt lt m gt Teache Subjec Class es Subjec Home R Teache Subjec Class es Subjec Home R 1 DS 3a PL Ra 1 f i CH 2a 2b 3a 3b R2a lt ii gt lt m gt In the case of subjects that are new this year i e which were not taught in the previous year when it was the demo file e g for the
156. cated lead to the creation of a new teaching team with the teacher already being active in teaching teams for nine or more C Only qualified Teach periods Allocating this lesson i Appl Clos would lead to constraints on the optimisation of the timetable The previous figure shows the lesson proposals for teacher Curie from the Demo2 gpn file All lessons are displayed with a green background except for the last one There is no coupling for the first five lessons in the list she would take the sixth L No with teacher Gauss As she already takes lesson number 48 with the same teacher as you can see from the list of teaching teams lower down there would be no new teaching team created for this reason the lesson has a green background The last lesson in the list No 5 has a red background One of the two coupling teachers is teacher Callas with whom teacher Curie does not take any common lessons Selecting this lesson would lead to the creation of a new team You can print or display the teaching teams from the open teacher master data window by selecting lt Print gt or lt Print preview gt list type teaching teams This list also contains the desired half days of the teachers concerned Print selection Teacher 1 11 A Teacher team Teacher teams Teaching qualification Unspecified day requests ValueCorrection 5 Teacher team Meat Name a m p mJja m
157. ccccsssececsnaeecccsscuseecnscsueessaauaeessaausesessuassessssessssaaaass 198 LOCK DO T a ae E E EE 198 Deleting weekly periods ccccccccsssseseeccecsauessecessnauenseecssaaunueesessaueseesessasaeneneesas 199 Excluding lessons from planning siiesssiscseinssnmncaronntsbeniutesiuncnhesabbreiniendnantenemiecasne 199 Automatic Allocation sersactonnacnanscncuiednmisuresane tamnmtanngeeinegemueier emma riaseaunotentisiieaats 199 Specifying the number Of periods per term ccccsseseecseeeececeeeeensaneesseeeeeseeeeenaes 200 Back to back MOS SO Saag sesame sss neenee or oenee dente beman sce aie eee a eedaeedaaeeesee 202 Optimisation Settings secutanaviennstsnszdinssetenndemtsedandeiastietiedindededrscganbenevetndeseeatedvsdennavenies 203 Creating A NS ct ates ccc i sre see a NA 204 Entering Data after Term Creation ccccccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeseesaeeessaees 206 Torm TOV CIVIC cate eset acca nies ds aaa aac este meant EAEan ERa 206 Carrying over Changes to subsequent termS scccecccessneeeeeeeesnaneeeeeessanaaeseees 207 Optimisation over Several TermS ccccseeccccceaseeceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaneeees 207 Finnish Term Planning snasnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 208 DEPARTMENT TIMETABLE cesesccteseeeeeseeeeeeees 211 NVC OCULGTION sigecstacecsetecceecereer E 213 DEIA TE AAEE E E E EE 214 Entering Departments esserne aani iEn ira errian erii 214 Assigning to
158. cember 13 j6 Rub 1b Rib 0 1 1 167 1 000 January 33 2 Rub 2b R2b 1 050 1 000 February 4 2 Rub Hl 3a R3a 1 050 1 000 66 2 Rub B 4 Ps1 1 050 1 000 6 2 Rb OK 4 Ps1 0 913 1 000 7808 2 23 Rub lab SHI Rib 0 955 0 990 ah 5 Rub 1a Ria 1 167 0 990 General data School year Number of days 286 Lessons Number of days 182 Number of weeks 26 129 130 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable Value Calculation without Subject Factor without Teacher Factor without Class Factor _ Count only school days Calendar of the school year Lessons 4 Date Mo 17 9 2007 No lessor fa w Calendar week 38 Public Holi LESS Schoo year Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr September November December January February March April May June 2008 School year Lessons General Mii Walues for Count only school days t calculation k Taoa elp Yearly values with time limitations If lessons are limited to a certain period the calculation of yearly values changes inasmuch as the number of weeks in which they can take place is used instead of the distribution time factor Class teacher and subject factors are not included in this calculation Lesson number 4 is used here as an example It should take place between 01 10 25 1 and 25 01 The yearly value changes irr
159. cher data Import Department If two departments have modified the same data record only those changes from the department imported first will be included Processing the Overall Timetable After all department data have been integrated into the complete school file you can continue to optimise the overall timetable If you have not yet taken account of shared resources such as teachers or rooms they will now be included in the overall schedule 231 232 The data from different gpn files can be merged into a single gpn file gp Untis Department Timetable Merging Lessons Optimisation and room optimisation proceed in the usual way If after importing department data teacher overlaps result because e g one teacher teaching in two departments has been scheduled by both departments for We 3 you can best resolve this by setting the Lock timetable conditionally option with Optimisation Run A Room optimisation can be handled with Room Optimisation If required the optimised overall timetable can then again be split up over the individual departments Proceed according to the description in the Distributing Department Data Merging Lessons The department timetable module allows you not just to import exported department data into the overall file but also to read in master data lesson and timetables from any gpn file Filei gpn Effects on other Modules 233 To do this first open the gpn
160. culation Yearly Values fa Decimal Places Count only school days Calculation of the yearly weeks using single day 100000 Yearly value 100 Teachers Leh Efx M O x ARSO Ghe Rub E 1 0Value YalueCorrection fabs Break Supervision C Marked m Teacher Timetable EEE Values Teach qual Weekly values C Ignore fi Yearly Periods Additional Duty C Lock e 1 800 000 Yearly Plan Periods Additional Duties Value C Don t Print N Time Requests 0 000 Lessons theater group 40 00 0 290 00 Suppl administration 70 00 0 Rubens Full name A Seen skill enhancement 180 00 10 Yearly Plan 1510 000 Lessons Supplement Plan remedial education 0 00 50 Lessons Text Vert Description Overhead eer 0 00 Lessons Overhead rae 180 00 Yearly Plan O verhead 11000 Value Overhead 0 00 From absences 49 09 Open Lessons Week 38 Weeks of lessons 45 Minutes Lesson Name Full name NTPs Periods c Facto PlaniVeek TargiWeek Max Actual pla Yalue Arist Aristoteles i 1 000 25 000 28 000 1023 8 Callas Callas l 1 000 25 000 28 000 1023 8 Nobel Nobel k i 1 000 15 000 18 000 614 4 bl E Rubens i 1 000 25 000 28 000 1799 0 Cer Cervantes i A 1 000 25 000 1023 7 ann arans In addition a value should be entered for every teacher in the Plan Year field on the Values tab in their master data Values
161. d Click teacher assignment Step 2b MEE level 4 level 3 Step 3 repeat steps 2a and 2b for level 3 level 2 etc Teachers Work 41 42 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Teachers Work Lesson amp Proposal This function can be seen as the equivalent of the teacher suggestion for lessons gp Untis can propose suitable lessons for teachers who do not have sufficient periods in order to meet their contractual teaching commitment Select the toolbar icon lt Lesson Proposal gt under Lessons Teachers A list of lessons will be displayed for which no teachers have been entered so far teachers The lesson proposal can be displayed taking into account the teaching qualification and if you use the Department Timetable module the departments The lessons displayed are either on a green white or red background gt Green denotes lessons that when this teacher is allocated do not cause a new teaching team to be created This means lessons without teacher coupling or lessons with teachers who already form a teaching team with the current teacher E Lesson proposal Curie L No Cle Per Subje Teac Class es gt White denotes lessons that when allocated lead to the creation of a new teaching team but where the teacher is not active in the team for more than eight periods 2 4 4 2 4 1 2 2 2 KS ES CSCS CS ES ESCA ESIES gt Red denotes lessons that when allo
162. dennanenededmcadeansagesentens 72 Lesson comparison between two files ccssssesccccccsssseseececsansuesesecesssauseeseessanaeseees 72 LESSON comparison between two LOLIMS ccccccnsneeseceeecenseensseeecensansnessetensnaneseees 74 Automatic Teacher Assignment cccceeecceeeeceeeeeseeeeeseeeeseaeeeseeeesaneeeseeeenees 77 Automatic teacher assignment Prior tO optimisation 1 cccccsseeececeneeeeensnnenesenaes 77 Tean Opm SATON ersero aE ic teseecienceenasvseaaysticesdatsasaccenuedeesecdeceaneesepanctemarante 78 Automatic teacher assignment during optimisation ccccccsseeeeeeenneseesaaenesenaes 80 3 4 gp Untis Contents Part Il Value Calculation c ccccsecescssceecuseeseecescuseuseuseeeeeeceeeseuseunes 84 VANGS ai e Eea 85 Entering Values and Factors eco cesceaccueeencaccidas cummins acecnantcanidsdenoasanessceladon 85 Master Data POAC IOUS serpreeir ennie onne EE O E 86 Master Data SUDOC gt eee SEE E 87 Master Data Classes cccscccccccsssesseeccesnnueseseecssnaueseeecssaaausseecessaaaasesessaueneseesessaaes 88 EEE SE REE E PEE EEEN AE TEE AEE N E EE dae EE E A E EEEE 89 EE 6 a 0 5 6 eee ene NEE A E Neer A A E AE T 95 WoC VUOS e EEE E E 96 Value Calculation Settings lt c ssescicecesvsenctecsicassatinsnnnsonwahdentawsonnsnedidamuaeneneaenss 96 PODO oea E E E E e 97 OOS ee ease sea cece cee cepnccion eae eiaa EN ENERE AREE a Enika AAA ERE 98 Subjects Periods Repott 00
163. ds are not just counted If you have so far managed without value calculations you are in the fortunate position that you can skip the second part of this manual which is concerned with value calculation If on the other hand you require Value Calculation you are also in a lucky position as you now have the valuable assistance that gp Untis provides You will not require everything described here the yearly percentage calculation is for example something very special but reading through the appropriate chapters will be extremely worthwhile The final chapter Value Calculation with the Multi Week Module deals above all with those problems created by time limited or other non yearlong lessons when planning teacher deployment These types of problem are likely to become increasingly important in the future Introduction 13 14 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Overview Overview One of the biggest administrative tasks when planning the new school year is the allocation of all the work among the teaching staff The following must be considered gt The teachers must accomplish a certain workload This target value depends on the type of school and the national school system but also sometimes on the age and training level of the teacher Usually the number of lessons to be held per week e g 24 lessons per week for a full time teacher and 12 for a teacher with a part time contract are entered
164. e gt Ifthe current date is not in the first output week the starting date is the Monday of the first week w gp Untis 2008 Timetabling Software Netscape a Fle Edt Wew Go Bookmarks Took Window Help Q Q eo file C temp default him aj fy i Home GU Radio My Netscape OL Search JBookmarks Calendar week Type r i Test school DEMO For deme and test only r E Timetable 2000 2009 Valid froma 10 Octobar BH Sub Tea Statur 30 07 2007 06 43 Date _Period Subject Teacher Substitute Class es Room Gruber amp Petters GmbH eo Belvederegqarze 11 A 2000 Steckersu 43 Z2266 627241 ooo qrpet es gp Untis Info Timetable Static HTML Output Standard i Navigation tab Timetable Element selection You can also influence the automatically generated List of elements with full names C For Classes navigation option On the Navigation tab under List Het eiii of elements with full names you can specify for C For Subjects which elements the full names rather than the short A iad names should be output This is useful for example when outputting information for teacher terminals when the teacher abbreviations are not in general use Element By default the navigation toolbar is displayed horizontally in the static HTML output Using the calas Vertical navigation bar selection box you can Nobel choose to output the bar vertically Cer
165. e Terms With time limitations the value of a lesson always depends on the length of the term in which it is held If terms are used this is no longer the case a term has the same value as a whole school year as far as value calculation is concerned This means that a lesson that is held in a term is evaluated as if it were held for the whole school year The reason for this is that frequently at the beginning of a school year a short period e g 4 weeks is planned and its values are then taken as budget values for the remainder of the school year This prevents for example a one week ski course during the school year from messing up the value calculation Even when time limitations are used the whole school year and not the length of the term are used for the calculation of the distribution time factor To a certain degree time limitations cancel out the fact that lessons belong to a term Please open the Demo2 gpn file and under Modules Multiple Terms Multiple Terms create the new term Term1 that should last from 01 10 to 29 02 Modules Cover Planning Student Timetable Course Scheduling F F F E Terms Name Minutes Timetable n Break Supervisions aia Temi Lint Lx See ane New term from mother term C Locked MultiUser Department Timetable Optimisation of e Year s Planning in Terms Teml Full name New ten from mother term Fr To School days 01 10
166. e check the box When switching terms set the TT to the beginning of the term Miscellaneous Settings HTML E Mail Multiple Terms Autolnfo Intemet Auto save Directories Timetable Customise Value Calculation Wamings i 12 Timetable version Timetable comparison C Without rooms Detailed comparison for couplings C Classes ignore changes in couplings Comparison w out window arrangement Tile horizontally Synchronise dates When switching terms set the TT to the beginning of the ter Checking the Synchronise dates box results in all timetables open on the screen being set to the same date when the week changes in any timetable window Terms Whole Term This option results in the display of the timetable for the current term This mode allows you to execute the manual timetable scheduling functions e g drag amp drop room change etc Settings Timetable printing Print selection Class es 1 7 The timetable is generally printed as you see it Print detail on the screen Timetables per page 7 wd Number of timetables f horizontally Number of timetables in a vertically However you have the option of outputting the timetable week for week In the print selection screen under lt Details gt you rae pais specify that several timetables ea should be output on one page and that several weeks should be output In the example
167. e teacher to be replaced ina lesson you can ensure this by checking this box The figure below shows the settings in the optimisation dialogue for automatic teacher assignment 82 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Planning Tools The individual settings have the following meaning Control Data for Optimisation Optimisation A Optimization strategy ABCDE i TE of petinds to be scheduled A Calculate a senes of n timetables w blank 100 then STOP 3 Optimisation series No of TT 1 20 a Similarity to previous TT O not similar 4 very similar 2 Optimisation level 1 9 C Lock timetable conditionally C Only requested days off for tea Teacher assignment during optimisation CI Consider room capacity C No optimization of teach assign CI No swap with other subjects For types C and D C Swap only less with equal periods C Swap only within one class level gt No optimisation of teacher assign Checking this box deactivates the teacher exchange All V Variable teacher codes set will be ignored With this setting teachers will not be changed either gt No swap with other subjects Exchanges will only be made with the same subject gt Swap only less with equal periods Exchanges will only be made with lessons that have the same number of periods gt Swap only within one class level Exchanges will only be made with lessons that belong to the sam
168. e REC ir 8 E L a 5 Ta The 2 2 Fr 2 Tu4 2 5 Fr 1 Mo 4 i m hal o o oote r rn EC E or 9 6 o 000 227 1715 227 17015 ef Talal aera ee GA 2b idii 0 00 o0 eas Total A a oj o oo oj ooj oj i fre EA 1 0 0 ooo o ooo 0 0 00 ce CC o oloo of oof of ooo WLA 2a Tus The 3 Fred e RE LG fee Tul Tu 2 Th5 5 Fr4 Moz a 1 45 159 141 44 hi 2 Th2 Mo 5 T5 sete Mato J as at of ooo ais arias ats atta e a A E LAA oj aoa 112 sm0 112 94 00 a aD AGT Bd eee Gruber amp Petters Software Subjects Time report Values 103 The subjects time report shows you when each subject is taught in which class in which room and by which teacher Selecting the subjects time report results in the display of the dialogue window that you can see in the figure below The following entries can be made gt Selection Click here to select the desired subjects gt Details You can use this option to specify how many subject lists should be output per page and to determine whether the teachers short or long names should be displayed gt Page setup You can use this button to select several options for the report layout page orientation and margins A sample subjects time report qp Untis 2008 Timetable 2006 2009 Testschool DEMO 11 Valid from 10 October For demo andtestonly Subjects Time HI History Day
169. e actual weekly periods as a result of factors or reductions Actual planned This indicates the difference between the teacher s target weekly periods and the actual scheduled workload A negative value means that the teacher has not yet been allocated his her target Free for this teacher This field displays the number of periods which have not yet been allocated a teacher and which the current teacher is qualified to take You will find a more detailed description of the topic Qualifications in the corresponding section Reductions A teacher s workload is not restricted just to teaching it includes other duties e g school management supervision of teaching materials subject mentoring library administration etc Such duties can be taken into account by creating reductions For this you must first enter reasons for reductions under Master Data Reduction reasons Subjects for which the i flag has been set corresponding to the procedure prior to version 2007 will also be adopted as reasons for reduction In the Demo2 gpn file these are mentoring Class Teacher Teachers Work 19 20 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Teachers Work GEEAE Lessons Sche You can use this dialogue to define new reduction reasons Classes ames The figure below shows the reduction reasons from the Demo2 gpn Subjects file where the additional reduction reason BioS Supervision of the TS
170. e class level year The class level year is defined with the corresponding entry under Master Data Clases gt Re assign original teachers Clicking on this button results in all teacher exchanges performed in earlier optimisations being deleted This means that every subject will be taught by the teacher entered for that lesson Part Il Value Calculation 83 84 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Values Values It is often the case that lessons do not all contribute equally to a teacher s full complement of hours For example the subject or the class level year taught actually determines how much a lesson is worth If you have the Multi week timetable module you can also take interruptions and time restrictions of the lessons into consideration which also play an important role in value calculation As value calculation is relevant at a point in time when lessons have not yet been scheduled e g when subjects are being allocated it is not possible to know in advance whether the lessons will be scheduled for a day when there is no school e g because of a public holiday Therefore for the calculation of yearly values or for example when periods are limited in the multi week module it is assumed when counting the weeks that all or none are included A week in which lessons are held on only one day e g before or after holidays counts the same as a week with five school days
171. e contains all data sometimes including sensitive data that can be read without gp Untis gp Untis is launched on the info terminals with a parameter that enables it to be run in info mode which allows timetables to be easily queried but which does not permit any data to be modified However we must point out that it is technically quite possible to start go Untis in normal mode with all the consequences for data security Appropriate network parameters must be set to ensure data security Requirements The following requirements must be met in order for the desired information to be displayed on the individual info terminals gt gp Untis must be installed on each computer where the timetable is to be displayed e g in the staff room gt It must be possible to access the timetable and substitution planners current file from every info terminal Setting up Window Groups You can decide which information i e which gp Untis windows in which order should be displayed on the info terminals This is determined with the help of window groups in the timetable and substitution planners current file gp Untis in Info Mode 295 296 gp Untis Info limetable gp Untis in Info Mode gt Start gp Untis and load the demo gpn file Window gt Click the lt Window Groups icon The predefined window groups supplied with the system are called Info1 through Info4 with the two groups Info1 and Info2 being configur
172. e defined under Settings School Data as the beginning of the school year Current date today s date Date of scheduling the date entered via Settings Calendar Last date the date that an export was last performed Output settings HTML output for the Internet usually contains varying generally somewhat less information than output for internal networks Teacher terminals should only display teacher timetables or cover plans while students only require data that is relevant for them The Info Timetable module therefore enables you to create diffe rent configurations with which you can define and save the type and amount of output information Please refer to chapters Static HTML beginning on p 263 and Monitor HTML beginning on p 275 to learn how these settings can be defined Clicking on a line in the grid and then on the lt Edit gt button displays a dialogue where you can specify the details for the relevant output setting Alternatively you can also display this dialogue by double clicking on the line or by clicking on the button when the cursor is in the line Static HTML Output 263 Output Once you have selected the desired output configurations by checking the relevant boxes in the Active column you can start the export by clicking on the lt Export gt button The Delete output folder box allows you to determine whether the the contents of the target folder should be deleted b
173. e first 4 Caution Selection of 22 9 Coen ee a Ea its col ao aba cells containing more than one lesson lesson GEc MA 8 34 line 2 Hugo S Arist 2 Hugo Hugo SiGauss ig 6 Gauss A B Entries in the cell Toolbar Functions You will find the following icons in the toolbar Delete classes Use this icon to delete individual classes from the lessons matrix Alternatively you can press lt Del gt on your keyboard Teacher Suggestion The function invoked with this icon corresponds to the function with the same name in the lessons view Please refer to chapter Teachers Work section Tools for assigning teachers manually for more information Last year s teacher If the class is displayed in the columns lines of the matrix you can use this function to assign the previous year s teacher s to all lessons of the class that you have highlighted with the mouse Please refer to chapter Teachers Work section Tools for assigning teachers manually for more information Create couplings Use this function to create couplings for every lesson that you have selected in the matrix Use the function in the same way as the Pax Delete Teacher Suggestion Last year s x Teacher h Couple gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Planning Tools Extended De coupling amp Lesson Comparison Settings _ Save ki Settings a Default v att Settings Save 4s
174. e the filter active and click in one of the other lines the filter condition changes For example clicking in the HI line results in the history teachers being displayed in the columns 5 Lesson matrix Periods Ee X 228 4 amp K mah e amp Lines Columns Cells Lines Columns Cells a Subject wv Teacher M Class es Subject v Teacher Class es 5 O a Pe E C Fier C Fiter Fiter Fiter v 3 Lesson matrix Periods BEE re ii Hugo Ander Rub 6 4 11b 4i2b Planning Tools 55 56 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Planning Tools Lesson matrix Periods K eae R amp Teacher w Cells Caste w Hugo a Selection of the week L 7 Filter C Fiter 23 6 Lines C Filter RE CH DE EN HI 4 m gt Lit R2a ae HI 2a mj 3 Lesson matrix Periods X ae amp Z Lines Columns Cells kha If on the other hand you set the filter for teacher Hugo the lines would display only those subjects taught by teacher Hugo The columns would also display those teachers who teach at least one of the subjects taken by teacher Hugo Checking the filter selection box for cells limits the display to those cells that contain the relevant element Subiect v Teacher v Classes Hugo HI
175. early values with time limitations 00000nanna0nnnnaannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnne 131 Ecco OU o a EE A PEO ASE E E 132 PCT OCC sipa A A A E 139 TOG ee acs ce ap EE re E E EE EE E E E E E E E 144 PRS sos ateeate cen sneeceenecenntien vieuseuecnwceuacsesdecssoeudeeasaetancusncuenseecixeces 147 Contents 5 MULTI WEEK TIMETABLE cccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 149 QV OE CW aici oac cade ccc cea dew sceaceaescncesauesetnesasccancsawecsancecncesudtcescesteeceneens 151 Selecting the correct Method sssnsssscedessupanscctwscamuitesetdcenwteeweseteasunenedserdamenaee 153 Time Limitation From TOo scsicsinssinscsccsertarsscansessncasssenvsiascsssctvweuwannes 154 Time Limitation and Value Calculation cccccccccccescceseeseeeeeeseeeseeeeeeseneees 155 Lesson GrouUpS sssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn mnnn 156 Periodic Lesson Group exijcte o ccciee Sates ooagootaceadnnnuassicatteeraciesntnbspoesenatenenAeseceusudeectos 156 Speci ying PCMOOI CNY serres a iE E E rRe 156 Creating Lesson GrouUpS sesecsccucceartanatnnencecndcinnssedenadbaneactere vanes suaceesedncersbacgdedeeniannties tor Chanongo TIO I aa erste cs arse ie pc snes EEn ETE EERS 158 irregular SSS Oi OUD nacisms nei EESE RN 160 Assigning Lesson Groups to LESSONS cccccseeecccaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesaaeees 162 Lesson Groups and Value Calculation ccccccseeeceeceeeseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeee
176. ect Bottle Necks Emphasis Periods W 34 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Teachers Work bottlenecks in the scheduling of this subject while 999 indicates that the number of available periods of the subject concerned is less than or equal to the number of vacant periods In this case the available periods in the relevant subjects are marked in red The greater the bottleneck index the tighter the situation is for this subject It might still be feasible with the available periods but it makes sense to schedule those subjects with a higher bottleneck index W Subject Bottlenecks Only subjects with open lessons Subject group 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Checking the box Only subjects with open lessons results in only those subjects being displayed for which teachers must still be found Checking the selection box Subject group results in the subject groups rather than the subjects being displayed The list of subject bottlenecks can be printed out Teacher suggestion If you are not sure which teacher is the most suitable for a certain lesson when you are entering data you can enter a as wildcard teacher instead of a normal teacher s name The lt Teacher suggestion gt function will help you to find a suitable teacher later You can of course use this function to search for alternative teachers for lessons that have already been scheduled The teacher suggestion function is invoked by c
177. ed data If the term already contains lessons that are to be replaced they must first be deleted using the lt Delete gt toolbar icon Now select Edit Paste special Lessons and timetable will now be inserted into this term Transferring time requests to other terms Use the lt Copy the time requests into the offspring terms gt toolbar icon to copy time requests into all subsequent terms Period specific optional for all subsequent terms For the following types of data you have the option of choosing whether changes should be transferred to subsequent terms or not gt Changes to master data classes teachers rooms students gt Changes to lessons excluding time requests and colours Under Settings Miscellaneous Multiple Terms you can select whether changes should be automatically transferred to subsequent terms or not or whether you should be asked each time before they are transferred Terms 177 X Delete Modifications in parent terms Change offspring term autom O Never change offspring term Ask me each time 178 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Terms Also change in succeeding terms Tip Transferring changes to subsequent terms If you are working with terms for the first time select Ask me each time in order to retain control of how data are changed You can choose one of the two other options at a later point in time Term independent global storage for
178. ed for the standard gp Untis mode and Info3 and Info4 for substitution mode gt Select group Info1 from the window groups dialogue by double clicking on tt gp Untis MultiUser 2008 demo Test school DEMO Timetable 2008 2009 File Edit Master Data Lessons Scheduling Timetable Reports Settings Modules Windows Doe SQ Kiron Reon BSH Ove a 1a Class 1a Gauss Timeta O x RE Sea Bs J Time range L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud Spe 1 Gauss MA R3a 3a 53 Rub DE RIa 1a This window group displays one teacher and one class timetable as well as one teacher and one class master data window A user at an info terminal that accesses window group Info1 will see these four windows If this window group should include a room timetable simply open it via Timetable Rooms and save the window group via the icon of the same name You can change the pre defined window groups at any time or create new window groups with the names Infod through Info9 or InfoA through InfoZ for your display of timetables in info mode Please note that case is important the first letter I of Info must be in upper case Setting up the Info Terminal lt is necessary to create a new shortcut on the desktop or in a folder on the info terminal in order to launch gp Untis Creating a shortcut gt Right click on an empty space on the desktop gt Now select New
179. eduling 245 However teacher Gauss is the substitution scheduler at our demonstration school and must draw up the substitution plan before lessons begin every day He should therefore not be allocated supervisions during this time i e before the first lesson Corridor Teacher Gauss x Minutes 445 Vacant 190 Inthe weekly table select those gemmpmmuss cells where the teacher in f DT question should not be allocated p e any supervision l Then click on the lt Block gt button The teacher is now blocked for supervisions at the times indicated Scheduling Super visions Manually 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 845 940 1035 11 30 1225 13 20 14 15 950 1045 11 40 1235 13 30 14 25 You may at times wish to allocate supervisions manually for example when a colleague volunteers to perform certain supervisions Entering Teachers for Supervisions To do this click on the desired position in the supervision schedule for the corridor and simply enter the relevant teacher s short name If a teachers name is displayed on a red background this indicates that this supervision does not fit in well with the teacher s timetable You can also make the entry directly in the teacher s supervision schedule For this simply select the Teacher tab in the supervisions Sele Break Supervisions Coridor Teacher Bas v Minutes 550 Vacant 250 TT portrait layo
180. eeeeseeeeeseaeeeeseeeeeas 245 Teacher SUggESt ON esisiini ibaan aD aaia Enana Eai 246 Scheduling Supervisions Automatically csccesseeeeseeeseeees 248 Weighting Settings eee eee ee nen eee eee ener eee i a iaai 248 Weighting AV TONS ce sess ceaeem teense ev gaeeenes ese degacessegirse tosis heed oe 248 QOPI AOD ices ers pects EE EE so agescnsee ene cans etoseasensere susie 250 GOCCIO ET eee meee eee nee meee ee eee ree era eee 251 Deleting SUPEVISIONS sessirnar aiaa aeiia 251 8 gp Untis Contents Presentation and Printing a veiacscocscscececenicdesseccesdecesienesccassusnacocnecetces 252 Printing the Break Supervision Window cccccsseeeeceseeeeseeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeens 252 KODON ae E E E E E auntie anabiiea ais 252 Display in Timetable ccccccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeseueeeeeeesaneeeseeeenees 253 RENIE OUMU aeae eani E E E A 254 Interaction with other Modules and Functions cssseeeeseees 255 Teme MEADE sE E ESAR 255 OVEN PIANINO eeens r E E RE S E 255 OT ISO ONS seriais o r d 256 Multi Week Timetable sacs sacaintenncactaanedsaictannesnavinddineaanetbhinenndalnadbanantodtaunteniaassen 256 inio TANS 1A ONS isi E REEE AE AS 256 INFO TIMET ABLE cccccccsscnecnseseeseeceseseesensenssanens 257 Introduction sasscisicnsscesscecacaccusicextcenscexeceaxescevtakesnveeasscaeceacessevesenenenes 258 HTML based Output Options cccceeeeeseeeeeeeeenseeenseeeeseeee
181. eek Date Time Limitation on Lessons The following figure shows the school year calendar for a lesson J School Year that has a time limitation of 05 02 to 28 02 14 02 is a public holiday Calendar marked red Calendar of the school year Lessons 76 Sle Date Mo 17 9 2007 fa w Calendar week 38 Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu Wei Th Fr Sa Su September 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 October 1 2 3 5 6 7 2 9 10 HE 20 21 22 22 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 2007 can take place November 23 can take place ig 7 st p h on4days sih can take place take place 10 December January 4 5 G z r am T E 26 27 a February 1216 Fase 78 Chiiir X 1B C19 220 LAT ey I CERD i April 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 May 2 3 44 5 6 7 8 ata Stat 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 June 11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 General data Values for Count only school days Value calculation School year Number of days 286 Number of weeks 41 Lessons Number of days 204 Number of weeks 41 Duration Eff time range 4 120 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable Despite the public holiday there is still the possibility that the four periods of this lesson could be held as they
182. efore output C Delete output folder is performed Caution When you choose this option the output directory is emptied i e not only earlier info outout will be deleted but ALL files in the directory Static HTML Output This type of output enables you to output all the latest timetables of your school at the press of a button A navigation bar is automatically output which you can use to switch between the timetables of the exported elements classes teachers rooms subjects and students gp Untis 2008 Timetabling Software Netscape a File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help al Q 6 Q Y file C Jinfo_stevefenjdeFauit htm a E o Home GQ Radio My Netscape O Search Bookmarks Calendar week Type Element Test school DEMO For demo and test only Timetable 2008 2009 Valid from 10 October v v v 22 9 Teachers Nobel Status 24 07 2007 17 03 264 gp Untis Info Timetable Static HTML Output Info Timetable default hkm We will start straightaway with an example to demonstrate how easy and quick it is to perform this type of export gt Please open the demo gpn file gt Click onthe lt Info Timetable gt toolbar icon gt Click on the lt Edit gt button gt Specify a valid export directory Standard iT 7J gt Onthe Timetable tab check 3 j Substitutions Navigation Element selection the elements Cla
183. ek 36 This lesson is not held in week 38 The lesson does not apply in week 40 312 gp Untis Info Timetable Application Notes Example 2 Arist 1 Arist 1 Rub 1 Rub 1 4 SportG Th 73 0 1a 1111 4 SportG Th 73 0 1b 1111 4 SportB Th 73 0 1a 1111 4 SportB Thi 73 0 1b 1111 Explanation for example 2 In the fourth period on Monday teachers Arist and Rub have classes 1a and 1b for sport The two teachers take different subjects that indicate that Arist gives a sports lesson for girls and Rub a sports lesson for boys The lessons for four weeks were exported beginning in calendar week 36 supervision txt break supervision contains one data record for each break supervision in the period of time exported for the basic break supervision timetable and for break supervision substitutions Fields 1 O AOUN int byte char char char byte if field 6 0 number of the weekday Monday 1 Sunday 7 e g 1 if field 6 lt gt 0 then the date YYYYMMDD number of the period e g 3 short name of corridor e g corr1 teacher s short name e g New empty if field 6 0 if field 6 1 short name of the substitute teacher e g Gauss 0 for the basic break supervision timetable 1 for a break substitution 2 when no break supervision takes place Example representation of a timetable Preparation create a table lesson to accommodate the lesson structure and import the lesson d
184. eks with no school day appear with a lesson value of O for both Plan and Lesson gt Lessons values Instead of the periods this setting displays the lesson value totals with the reductions value corrections and in the Used column the total of these three values 3i Weekly values Teacher short name Teachers weekly values Planned lessons including reductions Bi weekly lessons apportioned f Er Planned lessons without Weekly values Teacher short name SEIS J Values Teachers weekly values y Oa Teachers weekly values Yearly average 12 366 Lessons f periods w compressed reductions bi weekly lessons correct by the week cn CI Compressed 173 239 25 000 13 500 9 520 24 9 30 9 25 000 13 500 9 520 3 1 10 7 10 25 000 13 500 3 520 week Fram Until 7 Total 17 5 28 6 945 000 526 500 371 280 0 000 Week From Until Plan Lesson sakplanned Total 17 9 28 6 945 000 507 000 438 000 1 17 9 23 9 25 000 13 000 12 000 2 24 9 30 9 25 000 13 000 12 000 3 110 710 25 000 13 000 12 000 4 8 10 14 10 25 000 13 000 12 000 5 15 10 21 10 25 000 13 000 12 000 6 22 10 28 10 25 000 13 000 12 000 7 29 10 4 11 25 000 13 000 12 000 8 5 11 11 11 25 000 13 000 12 000 9 12 11 18 11 25 000 13 000 12 000 10 19 11 25 11 25 000 13 000 12 000 11 26 11 2 12 25 000 13 000
185. en RE 3b Nobe Ps ristoteles Callas Callas RE 3a Nobe A a RE 2b Nobe R2b Nobel Nobel RE 2a Nobe R2a Rub Rubens Cer Cervantes RE 1b Nobe Alb RE 1a Nobe Ala PH 3b New Gym MA 3b New Ps1 PH 3a New Gym PH Ph Nem Rium Lith Curie Curie All 4 Department Use the lt Remove Filter gt toolbar icon to display all lessons at the school once more Blocking from year calendar You can enter school and public holidays under Master Data School Holidays Using the Carry the school holidays over as blocked terms special function you can block all those terms where no lessons take place on any day and so exclude them from scheduling In the following example the Christmas and half year holidays have been blocked If at least one day of lessons is possible the term will not be blocked automatically T Filter 193 194 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Year s Planning in Terms School Holidays me Date Fr 22 5 2009 7 No lessons Legend Breaks Holiday Weekend fa Calendar week 21 V Public Holiday School Year Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su September October November General daa School year Number of days 282 Number of weeks 41 Number of school holidays 6 Lessons Number of days 242 Number of weeks 41 Number of free days due to Num
186. ent or the lt Skip Department gt button to switch to the next department Department Timetable Import Lessons 11 C Programme gp Unitis WAbt T Importing Master Data New master data i e master data that does not yet exist in the school file are integrated into the school file The first department file containing the new master data therefore determines their properties i e if department 1 has created the new subject FR with the long name French Language and department 2 also creates a new subject FR with the long name French the subject will be created in the school file with the data from the first file read in department 1 The subject FR therefore has the name French Language Caution Master data except teachers see next chapter that are not created new but just modified are not re imported i e changes are not transferred Processing Overall Timetable Importing teachers Working with the timetable sometimes necessitates changes to existing teacher data such as the number of permitted non teaching periods or time requests When importing department data you can use the selection box include teacher data to determine whether changes to the teacher master data should also be imported Dep 1 changes teacher time requests 123 4 5 6 7 8 Days am pm Ex Department D1 Classes 3 Lessons 11 C Programmegp Untis Abt Te Q V include tea
187. erged When the export is launched gp Untis looks in the shared department directory in the example Webserver Departments for subfolders with the department names and merges the files found there into the complete output for monitor display in the export directory set under the amp join export directory You can use the parameter lt LIN abt gt in the HTML template subst_monitor thtm gp Untis will then replace this parameter with the name of each relevant department Exporting Static HTML and Monitor HTML Automatically Miscellaneous Settings Auto save Directories The output of Static HTML and Monitor HTML 5 7 can be automatically triggered when certain fixed awhen saving events occur To specify this access the Auto W de nn info tab under Settings Miscellaneous C After n minutes C Messages prior to export Using the selection boxes you can define whether export should occur when the file is saved or closed at a certain time or after a certain number of minutes starting with the current system time HTML E Mail Monitor HTML Output Timetable Customise Multiple Terms Monitor Export C When saving C When closing At a certain time hh mm 03 00 C After n minutes go Messages prior to export Value Cale Autolnfo WebUn C Wher C Wher C Mess 281 282 gp Untis Info Timetable Sending Timetables by E mail Hol Prof Holmes S
188. esens 24 Updating from older versions of gp Untis to gp Untis 2007 or later 00022 27 Lessons for Teachers ccccceccceeeceeeceeeeceeeecuecceeeesueeseueeseeessueeseeesseeeseeeeseeens 28 Teaching qualification ccccssseeeccsnseeeccnauseccsnseeecesaueeeessauseeessauneessansanessnauaeetsaneneenes 28 Tools for assigning teachers manually ccsseccccseseeccnssescecsnueccessusssecsausesesssaaeees 32 Teacher s Yearly Work sivsccesiisiarwiicsviemswowanas onsinoneasiensiaiaauaweinebinneuantneNieeswcus tiie 44 Requirement sustpasstecnausnsdivnenttieuiaadaimaasnehorskesmsteaiadeenatencediadadwseeduntasiekasennarunduennitends 44 Tab Yearly WOFk oooninoononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnrnrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnrerennnnnnene 45 E A I E EAE NN EET ONAT A EA AA A A AE TE 49 Planning TOONS sassssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn 52 Lesson Mal cca seotne sate dnccies in e NEATA ea ENA EEEN AASA 52 OS ee A E A E EEA E E E 57 Entries in the lesson matrix sxcsctacecceewsrnenccauseesseeaedeasedesdebesaasiasebentedepseseanncaveqenatneats 61 WOOT F U O e e E wee et eet E ee eed eco eteee 63 Limit the display of elements racccstcsisnitenchctinisnasilin stead sine Becvnsaua tant ene cairsndieus tea teenaddeestbes 65 Lesson Table Sylabus ecsecseveccce nse cettecceciecencdeveendastveasareecs E a EE REED E E 66 Lesson COMparison ae scnecentsccesinaes ivbaiceneceeadeebcsieiaecsidaxnania
189. espective of whether you have selected the Count only school days or not Not activating this option results in the following value 1 weekly period 17 weeks 17 000 You can see the number of weeks in the school year calendar in this case on the Value calculation tab Newton L Tea BFOxK BY De SOO ode Larsan ninber Lessons Timetable Codes Yalues 4 A v Value or Factor Line value factor Foe z 17 0 Value units week New Newton Target per yx 26 0 Periods week ae L No Ci Te Per Teach Subject Class Subjec Home Double From To Totalf 3 26 00 10 10 10 5 9 4 02 11 New GA 2a 2b R2a Line value Subj factor Class factc Value Eff time rang A 0 10 10 1124 0 10 1 050 1000 C7 10 251 Value Legend Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 _ _ 4 __ _ _____ ates i _4 __ _ ____5___ ___1 es ee ee ee ee ee ee ee iio _8 9 12 13 _9f10 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 raays 286 Numbetebesaieemle Results TETE s Number of days 117 Number of weeks 1 N 0 4146 al Duration of lessons hcluding holidays DET vig Parca Nosga Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable However if you
190. esson that is held just for half a year has a value of 1 No further entries are necessary See chapter Value Calculation with the Multi Week Timetable Module on page 119 for more details Class 1a Gauss L Cla me MEER XK BYE De OFF L No Cl Te Teacher Subject Class es From 35 las MU a es Ce Hugo EA 14 1b 2a 2b Tsi 7 23 2 Ander DOE ia 2 000 22 9 73 22 3 Arist REGU aib 1 500 22 9 From lo Constraint 155 156 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Lesson Groups Lesson Groups As already mentioned in the introduction gp Untis initially assumes that every lesson takes place on a weekly basis If a lesson is not held each week lesson groups can be defined that are subsequently assigned to the lessons in question Theoretically the time patterns can be periodic or irregular Periodic Lesson Group The most common example of a periodic lesson is one with a fortnightly cycle However gp Untis allows you to define a periodicity of up to 16 weeks or a combination of several periodicities The procedure is described below Specifying periodicity You can specify the periodicity under Settings School Data A weekly periodicity of 1 means that the timetable is not subject to any periodic changes while a 2 for example would signify that the timetable is repeated every two weeks i e some lessons would be held once a fortnight 8 School Data P S General Overview Values School name
191. essons l You can also use the menu option Lessons Term Overview to display differences between indvidual lessons within various terms and also differences in master data elements classes teachers rooms Furthermore you have the possibility to limit the list to those entries where there are differences between the terms The figure shows the differences in lesson 95 between term A and term B 3 Attributes in different terms Overview Z Lessons l Za Ph 95 7 Onl differences Coupling Line Fields Tem A Tem B Room R2a Phys Line value 1 000 1 155 Codes Y Different rooms have been allocated room 2a in term A and the physics lab in term B different values have been calculated because e g different factors have been used in the different terms and the V code has been set for the lesson in term A Planning Tools 77 Automatic Teacher Assignment In some cases new classes certain subjects at vocational schools Scheduing Timetab etc allocating teachers to lessons can be effected automatically Classes in accordance with pre defined rules of course pial Term Overview Automatic teacher assignment prior to Locked Lessons A a a eductions optimisation ee el With automatic teacher assignment Lessons Teacher Team Optimisation Assignment lessons with a entry as teacher are automatically St Bate Necks miphasis Periods assigned a su
192. etables Click the button to the right of the lt Select gt button and choose a timetable format from the selection list that is then displayed The selected format is displayed as the label for each of the buttons Teachers Timetable formats Short name Fullname Teacher 1 Teacher 1 Tea 1 Teacher 1 2 TealA Te schedule big 3 TealB Teacher 1 4 Teall Teacher 1 5 6 7 8 Cancel TealO Teacher 10 Teacher 10 Teacher 10 Teacher 10 9 Teacher 11 10 Teacher 11 11 Teal1B Teacher 11 12 Teacher 11 Teacher Teacher 6 6 CD C Only teachers with changes Cat Send class timetable 286 gp Untis Info Timetable Sending Timetables by E mail Specifying the date You have two possibilities to determine the period for which the timetables should be sent lf you select a date from the calendar a timetable will be sent for the chosen week 24 06 2007 w June 2007 Mo Tu We Th Fr Sq Su the next week 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 the next week III 18 19 20 21 22 23 i 25 26 27 28 29 30 Tip Sending substitution data You can use the calendar in both Untis mode and substitution mode If dispatch is launched in substitution mode the latest information and all substitution data are included If you launch dispatch in Untis mode the substitution data are not included in the timetable Date of the timetable thi
193. etails window in the lower part of the screen Values As you can see the value unit for the lesson for teacher Newton remains 3 152 after this entry product of weekly periods subject class and teacher factors while the fixed cell value of 0 5 has been taken for teacher Curie Newton L Tea maS m VO K ATA De SOn AE F 2 lessor rarbiar Lessons Timetable Codes Values A v Value or Factor ine value factor For element 3 152 Value units week Target per yr _ Teacher Subjec Class es Subjec Home Room Male Female Line text Stat Code s Teacher allocation locked SH2 Psi O 1 EE PEG 4 2 New PEB 4 SH1 o EF oO Curie L Tea mE BHtOx BY La ZOD FEF Lessons Timetable Codes Values Value or Factor ine value factor For element Curie Target per yr Teacher Subject Class es Subject room Home Room Double pers From To Value Line value 11 11 10 6 o olo h _ Teache Subjec Classes Subjec Home Room Male Female Linetext Stat Codefs Line value Linetext 2 Teacher Teacher allocation locked 500 _ l 1 E E 4 2 New PEB 4 107 108 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Values Yearly values As already mentioned gp Untis can display not only the weekly values for a lessons but also yearly values In order to do this select the option Yearly Values on the value calculation tab under Settings Miscellaneous
194. ettings Before supervisions are optimised the weighting parameters must icon 0 Max break supery day Extremely important Do not exceed max minutes of the teacher Lesson before after the break Lesson in the comdor before after the break Not before 1st penod of the day Not after last penod of the day No supervision double period breaks No consecutive supervisions Not before time request 3 Not after time request 3 Max break supery day NTP prior to the break supervision NTP after to the break supervision be set Open the corresponding window using the lt Settings gt toolbar Use the Max break superv day to specify the maximum amount of supervision a teacher should perform per day This parameter applies to all teachers at the school The slider controls allow you to adjust the various parameters for the automatic optimisation of the break supervisions Hold the slider control with your mouse and position it between unimportant left and extremely important right After making your adjustments confirm the weighting settings by clicking on the lt OK gt button The following describes the individual weighting parameters Weighting Parameters Please note that the system will search for the most suitable teacher for each supervision i e for a specific time period in a specific corridor Do not exceed max minutes of the teacher Use this setting to adjust whether and to what extent
195. f a button These pages can then be opened with any web browser Please refer to the HTML Timetable Settings chapter on page 302 as well as the chapter Timetables in HTML Format in the gp Untis user manual for more details on the layout of the displayed timetable gp Untis 2008 Timetabling Software Netscape a File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help il Q Q Q Y file C info_steve enjdeFault htm a m i Home GO Radio My Netscape Q Search EBookmarks o Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Saturday GEC MU Info Timetable Dialogue 261 As far as handling is concerned ERMETE both HTML output options forthe se Info Timetable complete 9 O O Cswrcseczees oie S Eem timetable information with navigation and monitor display Unti EA without navigation are so similar OP SNUS rere ser Fado unten ey Sate 300720070820 that the following section first describes the similarities After that the individual possibilities of both options are dealt with 28 8 2006 Monday _Type__ Date _ Period Subject Teacher Substitute lass es Room Gruber amp PettersSoftware Powered by gp Untis www grupet at Info Timetable Dialogue The Info Timetable dialogue is the actual control window for Info outputting HTML files and can be accessed from the modules menu Timetable with the Info Timetable option or via the Info T
196. f several output configurations are saved it can make sense to have a different date from the start date in some outputs for example when one monitor should only display today s substitution lists and another those scheduled for tomorrow Monitor HTML Output 277 Use the field Output date days after start date to influence which date should be the first day output in this output configuration If you have defined e g 22 09 as the start date and enter 2 in the output date field the output will begin with 24th September Furthermore you can use the field Nr of days The substitution data of to specify for how many seville 24th and 25th September days the output should will be displayed contain 22 09 2008 y Start date Nr of days Output date Days after the start date Refresh time As mentioned previously the output HTML pages scroll forwards automatically Use the Refresh time sec and Refresh time empty page sec fields to specify how long the display of pages with and without content should last Refresh time sec Refresh Time empty page sec a Bh Home GP Rado M Netscape Qy Search EJBookmaks 2008 Substitution schedule gp UntiSeocc Tmetsble 2008 2009 Test school DEMO Info Timetable Valid from 10 Octob er Fordemoandtestonly St 30 07 2007 11 25 29 8 2006 Tuesday Dis
197. f the Monday in this week e g 4 9 3 date full date of the month in the form YYYYMMDD e g 20080904 4 char school week e g 1 Example 36 4 9 20080904 1 time txt times contains one data record for each period in the gp Untis timetable grid Fields 1 byte number of the weekday Monday 1 Sunday 7 2 byte number of lessons e g 8 3 byte number of the period e g 4 4 char time when the period begins HHMM e g 1045 5 char time when the period ends HHMM e g 1130 Example 1 8 4 1045 1130 Application Notes 309 310 gp Untis Info Timetable Application Notes teacher txt teacher name contains one data record for every teacher at the school Fields 1 char teacher s short name e g New 2 char teacher s long name e g Newton 3 char teacher s first name e g Isaac Example New Newton Isaac class txt class name contains one data record for every class in the school ST ields har class short name e g 1a har class long name e g Class 1a Gauss J 2 O O Example la Class 1a Gauss room txt room name contains one data record for every room in the school Fields 1 char room s short name e g Rta 2 char room s long name e g Classroom 1a Example Ria Classroom 1a student txt student name only in connection with the Student Timetable or Course Schedule module contains one data record for every student at the schoo
198. factor 41 0 Value units week Target per yr No CI Te Per Teacher Subject Class es Subject room Home Room Double pers From To Value Line value Subj factor Class factor 3 o o 5 0 o lo d 2 1 ORWONNANN amp Female Line text Stat Code s Line value Linetext 2 Teacher Teacher allocation locked and the number of weekly periods if the factors were active this value would also be multiplied with them You can see the number of weeks in the school year in the school year calendar that you can open with the corresponding toolbar B icon in the lessons view Values 109 Value Calculation without Subect Factor without Teacher Factor without Class F actor School Year Calendar 110 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Examples Tip Information Detail Moving the cursor over the individual values will display a short explanation for the value in question 3 Calendar of the school year Lessons 38 Date Mo 17 9 2007 fa yy Calendar week 38 Moi Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Thi Fr Sa Su September October HRE November December January February March April May June General data Values for Count only school days Value calculation School year Number of days 286 Number of weeks 41 Lessons Number of days 189 Number of weeks 38 Number of week of the school year
199. ffect on both of them Use the Line value input field if the entry should only apply to one teacher This field does not apply to the whole lesson It only affects the coupling line in question 3 Gauss L Tea a lx as vi AHO K BYR De SOOM caf a HR 2 a Lesson number Lessons Timetable Codes Values e g 5 000 hanar Ea tor For element C inane Gauss Gauss Target per yr 11 0 Periods week L No Clte Per Teacher Subject Class es From Jj Total for Gauss 4 11 00 5 J 5 0 22 2 2 Gauss a 2b 2a 1 Gauss GA 3b Gauss GA 4 Gauss Teache Subjec Class es Subjec Home Room Male a TX 2b 2a CL R2b 2 Gauss DS 2b 2a PL R2a As with the Value field you can enter additional factors summands or fixed values in the Line Value field The Examples of Value Calculation chapter also contains an example dealing with the line value Values 91 Lesson Groups Gro AEDA at D Ske Alex A C Marked m Ignore fi C Lock x Exercises Full name Name Full name 1st half of the Year H2 2nd half ofthe Year oO Classes Teachers Matrix Term Gveriew Locked Lessons Reductions 92 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Values Lesson Groups If you have the Multi week rimetable module lesson groups give you a further possibility to influence the value of a lesson A group factor that you define for lesson g
200. fferences are encountered they are displayed with the attributes you specified Lesson comparison Periods K wae R Sa h Lines Columns Cells Classes x Subject vi Teacher v ma 2 Nobel 6 Rub 1 Ander 2 Nobel 6 Rub 1 Ander 2Nobel 1 Callas 4 Cer 4iCer 2 Hhugo i BArist 2 Callas 2Nobel 1 Callas 4 Cer 4iCer 2 Hugo i 3 Arist 2 Callas 2Nobel 1 Calas S5 Callas 2 Rub i Arist 2Nobel 1 Callas S Callas 2 Rub 3 Arist 2Nobel 1 Callas 2 Rub 2 Curie 3 Arist 2Nobel 1 Callas 2 Rub 2 Curie 3 Arist 2Nobel 1 Callas 2 Hugo 2 2sCurie 3sArist 2Nobel 1 Callas 2 Hugo 2 2 2iCurie 3 Arist 2Nobel 1 Callas 2 Hugo 2 2 3 Curie 2Nobel 1 Callas 2 Hugo i 2 3iCurie 2 Arist 74 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Planning Tools In the lesson comparison in the figure for example you can see that some of the teachers have changed For many lessons in file B no teacher had been found while in file A most teachers have now been allocated as is the case e g for class 3a and German which will now be taken by teacher Hugo Teachers who had already been assigned have been exchanged e g in the maths lesson for class 2b where teacher Newton has been replaced by teacher Gauss Unlike timetable comparison the two instances of gp Untis in the lesson comparison are not symmetrical The differences are only displayed in the first instance of the application and in the second the
201. fication definitions affect the Cover planning module A substitution suggestion contains information on whether a proposed teacher who is to cover for a colleague may teach the colleague s subject Hugo Replacing Gauss MA 3a Shifts according to the substitution time grid C Show only future shifts Period flag Total Subst paid Cance Last week Class CS CS CO CO CO 0 0 0 0 0 N 0 0 Tools for assigning teachers manually Allocating teaching tasks subject allocation teaching load i e who should teach what subjects to which classes is the most fundamental requirement of a timetable Entering the lessons is the basis that determines whether the schedule puzzle can be solved or whether difficult or insurmountable scheduling problems will occur You can modify and process all the data that you enter under gp Untis at any time The application will frequently offer support by pointing out problems or displaying possible alternatives There are a number of such support functions for the allocation of subjects these are described below Subject bottlenecks Problems can arise if not enough qualified teachers are available to teach certain subjects Calculating subject bottlenecks makes sense when teachers are qualified to teach more than one subject which is usually the case Let us assume that teacher Gauss is qualified to teach mathematics and physics His school has quite a few maths teachers but only a
202. for lesson groups This makes 2a Class 2a Timetable Kla1 DER identification clearer during planning and for E a al a 5 5 Sport GEc HE IES n oo Eg gr sson G ips Gru Dasa a Lock lesson group Og n A Week 4 4 139 107 1 000 Cen mm All the lessons in a lesson group can be lockedin fs a j C O S i the timetable by locking the lesson group itself Lesson Groups Gro ox Xu Z Name Fullname Marked m gnore i From To Factor wa weeks Fi 229 306 l wB weekB v 229 306 i o A However a lesson can also be flagged as locked before optimisation This has the following effect on optimisation Scheduling a lesson sequence simultaneously is optional not mandatory e g like a time request of 3 If you want to be really sure that the lessons in a lesson sequence will be scheduled at the same time you can set the Lock XY code before optimisation Alternatively you can set the codes for the relevant lessons However please note that these lessons are excluded from the exchange process during automatic scheduling and that locking thereby represents a constraint on optimisation 168 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Lesson Groups Assigning a lesson group automatically In the previous example we specified that GA should take place in week A and DS in week B and that these two lessons should be scheduled simultaneously if possible However you can also
203. fore divided up into four terms School Year Term 1 Term 2 l Term 3 Term 4 Selecting the correct Method In many cases the organisational structure of a school type determines which method time limitation lesson group term should be used Thus Bavarian vocational schools work with lesson groups while Austrian vocational schools work with terms Many schools with lessons over the whole school year use a combination of all three methods One secondary school with a sixth form has fortnightly lessons and a change in the timetable is necessary at the end of the semester as some teachers are not available in the second half of the year School Year 7 Graduating Class 1 Time Limitation i i 7 Graduating Class 2 f From To Graduating Class 3 B Lesson Group Term 1 Term 2 The following pages are intended to describe in detail how these three methods work and how they should be used Overview 153 154 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable From To Constraint Time Limitation From To A time limitation is generally understood to be a limited period of validity from to The most common cases of time restrictions occur for lessons that are held on a semester basis or for graduating classes final examination classes where lessons finish before the official end of the school year Time Limitations can be entered for classes for lessons and for lesson groups Time limitation
204. gnosis Multi Week Timetable 169 Timetable Formats Static HTML 267 Timetable Printing Several Weeks 181 Timetables on Handhelds 314 Total Line 118 Total School Year Term 173 Total Weekly Periods Year Planning in Terms 194 Transferring Time Requests to other Terms 177 Transferring Timetable to other Terms 177 U Underemployment 22 Untis exe 298 322 gp Untis Index V Yearly Plan 47 57 Yearly Values Vacant Supervisions 243 35 44 86 89 90 98 111 113 Value 91 Yearly Work 45 Value 119 Value Calculation 85 Value Total 108 Value Units 87 88 90 91 Value 111 Values 85 86 Entering 85 fixed 95 126 Time Limitations 126 W Web Designers 306 CSS 307 Templates 306 WeekA 157 Week Overview per Term 198 Weekly Hours 109 Weekly periods 90 Weekly Periods per Term 196 Weekly Plan 78 Weeks of Lessons 90 Weeks on the Top Directory Level Check Box 273 Weighting Settings 240 Weighting Parameters 248 250 Whole Term Timetable 181 Wildcards 241 Window Groups 295 296 300 Y Year Planning in Terms 189 Window 190 Yearly Periods 47 Yearly Percentage Calculation 99 323 GRUBER amp PETTERS SOFTWARE A 2000 Stockerau Belvederegasse11 e 43 2266 62241 0 e office grupet at e www grupet at C D D za Q O l Y lt O Oi OD o
205. gt Number of times in a line Each subject is displayed with an indication of the time when it is held Entering a Print details Subject timetable Layout 54 L With yearly totals as well E Number of timetables per page 10 Number of times in a line Headings Horizontal Diagonal Ci Vertical ok Caca value in this field forces a line break after the given number of times in order to restrict the width of the report gt Headings You can also use this setting to limit the width of the report by displaying headings horizontally diagonally or vertically 102 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Values gp Untis 2008 Time able 2008 2009 Testschool DEMO 11 Valid tran 10 Octobe Fordemoandtest oly Subject PeriodsReport Teacher Subject timetable Gauss Gauss Print details x Subject timetable Layout 94 With yearly totals as well 2 Number of timetables per page a Number of times in a line Headings Lestr Term 17 9 2007 28 6 2008 9 2007 25 6 2005 Planear Scheduled per Difterence Subject Class B Ec m _ o opem ol cof 75 7 00 76 57o EEA 2 2 ff o 0 00 76 7 00 76 s7 00 a E E PEREHI Ci O00 76 Sug FE cle T LO 000 114 ecco 114 65 30 E i m aA Or E AREA Mia Wed Th 4 Fr 3 SY eal seas DE vVe 3 Tu 5 ooo 76 E on sr o0 Ma Taa o el el l ol ooo 227 17015 227 17015 Total MD E
206. hat actual and target values play a role e g in the Values tab of a teacher s master data You can of course also print the list of reductions The printout and print layout is sorted either by Vaes reduction reasons or by teachers depending on 20 0 Periods week 5000 Feoks the setting you defined in the reductions view Week School year dditi k ducti isibl 25 000 Plan Week Plan Year N agaition you Can aiso MaKe reaquctions VISiole 28 000 Aeka Taon Max 23 591 Value units 0 9 Yearly value 1 409 Actual planned 0 9 Actual planned qp Untis 2008 Timetable 2008 2009 Testschool DEMO 9 336 Free for this teacher 11 Valid from 10 October For demo and testonly Reductions 1 910 a faz ub UE Lr ooo LL S E T tT Gruber amp Petters Software gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Teachers Work Print selection Teacher 1 11 Page setup vedi Data fields C 1 Page Element C Balance Plan Actual ClLessons of the element Click 0 01 1970 v 01 00 00 E gt Print only if changed after Gauss Gauss cass ast eae Se Ba eee ee Curie TX 3b hen ta GA _ nn a umy 420 Gauss a 1 626 Se Ria Curie i 1b Reductions Value Reason Text From Until Description 9 520 Head Teacher Administrative task 2 000 Guidance Counsellor 11 520 Total 25 416 ActuahRed 25 000 Pian 0 416 Gruber amp Petters Software in the printout of a
207. hat you create your own timetable formats for each of the different information outputs Please refer to the chapter on Timetable Display in the user manual for more details on creating formats Please note that the legend is a part of the format information and is therefore also exported in the HTML timetable The export of the legend can be switched on or off in print details You can find print details either in the print selection dialogue under Details or in lt Timetable Settings gt on the General tab see figure on next page Class 0 Class 1 Ulass schedule big Teachers Class 1 a Class 1 Rooms t Class 10 Static HTML Output an PE S e t i m g S 267 268 gp Untis Info limetable Static HTML Output Sled 3i Layout 01 Individual timetable with days across the top General Selection range Layout 1 Layout 2 HTML View Clal Class 1 Font size in Layout 01 Individual timetable with days Per overview 100 across the top icy Arial 9 0 Coupl legend 100 w Heading 100 Column heading Day names heading Row heading Periods heading Contents fields of a teaching period SST Heading for individual Heading individ TT TT s Erei Ala 4 Print details b EE Print selection Class es 1 7 Print details Individual timetable Timetables per page Number of timetables horizontally 3 Number
208. have taught a Sea certain subject in the Double period C D Respect double periods previous lesson Sports Descipton Statistical Code P No break supervision before after teachers for example J need time to change and craft teachers may have to clear away equipment after the crafts lesson o oz oe oo00807 Mathematics Graphics In such cases you can activate the flag P No break supervision before after under Mas ter Data Subjects Specify Supervision Areas Timetable Rep After the preparatory master data inputs have been made the actual el In a apa a a gt supervision can be specified This is effected using the central Imisation r a a planning tool of the break supervision scheduling the Break allt Supervisons dialog Diagnosis CCC Analysis Ia A i Overall Diagnosis You can access the Break Supervisions dialogue either from the ee Scheduling menu or from the Modules menu via the menu item sila rele ah Break Supervisions Scheduling Timetable Delete the Timetable Break Supervisions y Using the selection list on the Corridor tab first select the area that you wish to schedule for supervision specify Supervision Areas Break Supervisions S Die Corridor Teacher Bas v Minutes 330 Vacant 60 Cine 2 3 3 4 9 40 10 35 Print 950 1045 f Full name 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 845 940 1035 11 30 1225 13 20 1415
209. he absent class or absent teacher are assigned to the the currently active department Please look at the example in the figure below Teacher Hugo is assigned to department D1 and class 3b is assigned to department D117 Class 4 is not assigned to any department Teacher Hugo is now set to be absent on 22 09 On this day he is due to teach class 3b and class 4 If the department combo field is set to department D1 all open substitutions will be listed in the substitutions window as the absent teacher Hugo belongs to this department If department D117 is selected only two open substitutions will be listed as only elements of department D117 are displayed In our example this is class 3b Classes Cla B D x aP od Full name Dept ime Class 1a Gauss 0117 3b ctass 3b Callas D117 4 Class 4 Nobe D117 Ek Effects on other Modules Scheduling dialogue In the cover planning scheduling dialogue you can only make changes to lessons that belong to the currently active department Absences window substitution proposal Only teachers who have been assigned to the currently active department or who have no department are displayed in the absences window or in the substitutions proposal Entering absences is also restricted to this selection X Teachers Tea Sele 3 Absences Absences xu A x U xu Z Tea Hugo 2239 Abs No POD MM TO perb Abs reas
210. herlock Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thurs Checking the Messages prior to export box results in a query being displayed before the actual export YD Generate static HTML pages now Sending Timetables by E Mail This option allows the latest timetables to be sent to teachers and if necessary students For this gp Untis uses an e mail program that is already installed or a mail server that can be reached on the network Each teacher or student only receives his her own personal timetable as an HTML file attached to the e mail eRhi Wat Prof watson l 1b Class Ib Newton Friday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday E Mail Settings The teacher s or student s e mail address must be entered in the e mail field in the appropriate master data record The basic settings for e mail distribution can be found on the E Mail tab under Settings Miscellaneous sending Timetables by E mail 283 ef Teachers Tea Rv D x S Sift i Mame Full name gaussi teacheremail org newteacheremail org hugogteacheremail org anderni teacheremail org Gauss Gauss i Mews Mewto iat Hugo Hugo o Ander Anders Arist Aristotle E Calas Callas The correct mail system setting is essential for e mail distribution to work properly If the computer where gp Untis is running already has a functioning e mail application in
211. ial end of the school year School Year Graduating Class 1 Graduating Class 2 E Graduating Class 3 Time Limitation To 151 152 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Overview B Lesson groups Lesson groups can be used to establish any desired regular or irregular time characteristics for individual lessons or for all lessons of a class A typical example of regular time characteristics is a fortnightly lesson l School Year Al A Al L sson Group 3 14 day week A B LBsson Groupi4 14 day week B Completely irregular time characteristics would be e g when classes start and finish lessons at completely di fferent times as is the case at many vocational schools In the example classes 1 and 2 are subject to the same time plan but class 3 is subject to a completely different one School Year ass Lesson Goupl Lessor Goupl Eps Lesson Gmup2 C Terms If the timetable for the whole school changes at specific points in time then term planning offers the exact functions required An example of this would be when the timetable changes in the second semester The school year then consists of two terms with completely independent timetables School Year l Term 1 I Term 2 1st half of the year _ ZZ 2nd half of the year In the case of the course system at Austrian vocational schools the complete school timetable changes every 10 weeks The school year is there
212. ick on a suggested Window in foreground C Autotefresh Less Teach Nobel MEE EEE iE 36 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Teachers Work teacher once to display the selected teacher in the lesson window as well Caution Please bear in mind that in the case of multi teacher couplings teaching teams have a direct effect on how lessons are scheduled Example Let us assume that teacher Curie belongs to two teams of teachers She teaches design together with teacher Gauss and sport with teacher Newton For example as soon as all sports lessons have been scheduled this constellation results in the period for design being blocked If teacher Newton also belongs to a further team of teachers its lessons are also blocked This means that chains of conflict can arise that lead to a large number of non scheduled periods Please refer to the sections on CCC Analysis and Teaching Teams in the user manual for more information For this reason the suggested teachers are displayed on a coloured background Green means that the teacher already teaches in this team White means that allocating this teacher would lead to the creation of a new teaching team but that the suggested teacher still teaches fewer than nine periods in teaching teams Red signifies those teachers who already teach nine periods or more in couplings with other teams Tip Substitute teacher With the lessons view f
213. idual cells This option is only availabe with the Department Timetable module Cells gt Display periods week cells will display periods per week gt Display values cells will display lesson value units instead of periods per week gt Display lesson numbers Cells will display lesson numbers instead of periods per week 58 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Planning Tools Total for gt gt Lines totals for periods per week or value units will be displayed per line Columns totals for periods per week or value units will be displayed per column If you choose to display totals and also activate the selection box Consider couplings for the totals periods belonging to the same coupling will only be counted once Print Preview Print Lesson matrix Periods Columine Classes v Filter JN mE it f uat SvRtub SiArist Hugo Arist 2iCer Callas giurie 2Callas G i E i i bo SEEREN SSS aa to MJ eacha Er Yobel Be A pn Ee Teo GvRiub hugo BiArist Hier TCalles HCurie Halles mt Room Home Foon Male Teacher Haks H Jurie Halas Malas Calas mi umh AHugo ges Zier 27 2iCurie mi i Female Line text EE Heo Selection of the Jer 2Huga 4 2Rub Vf Aurie 2fCallas mi i If you only wish to create the totals for a certain p
214. ifinfo_steve 2 subst_001 htm Se LS P W Handbiichereutsch Aktuelle_Handbuecher_PageM Module2008 InfoStundenplan monitor_h E e X 17 aj amp Home G Radio My Netscape Qy Search Bookmarks Wry yy G W Handbicher Deutsch Aktuelle Handbuecher_PageM Mor 4 XK gp Untiseo Info Timetable k ee W Handbiicher Deutsch Aktuelle_Handbuecher_Pag Timetable 2008 2009 Test school DEMO Valid from 10 October For demo and test only Status 30 07 2007 08 20 Monday 19 6 It s Type Date Period Subjct Teacher Substne Classes Room School Party Time Celebrate with us Gruber amp PettersSoftware Tuesday 20 6 Powered by gp Untis www grupet at Monitor HTML Output 279 lt is also possible to include files just in specific configurations In this example the include should only be displayed in the monitor output for the break room but not e g in the staff room The file to be included must have the following DAs name Static HTML Monitor HTML Database WebUntis 22 09 2008 Y Start date Last date v GpIndex gif info_monitor_ lt Template Name gt _nn htm anion ed gt d ed lt Notvetir lt Not Defin lt Template Name gt stands for the name of the monitor configuration UL B NAVBAROI THTM naybar01_02 thtm These additional files must be valid HTML pages and must not contain the lt meta http equiv refresh gt tag Monitor
215. imetable toolbar icon The dialogue contains four tabs Static HTML Monitor Mee HTML Database and WebUntis Please refer to Sisic HTML Monitor HTML Database WebLIntis the chapter Database Export beginning on p 293 for 20082006 A Stat dt a more detailed description of the Database tab Curent date S Tip WebUntis For more information concerning our WebUntis range of products please contact your nearest gp Untis partner or visit out website at www grupet at 262 gp Untis Info Timetable Info Timetable Dialogue Info Timetable 20 02 2007 v Start date EI Februar 2007 EM DA Mo Di Mi Do Fr Sa So 130 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 E 21 22 23 24 26 27 28 JOOOOOs Current date Date of scheduling Last date Info Timetable Static HTML Monitor HTML Da 09 03 2007 Start date Date of scheduli w Internet Networl lt Not Defined gt lt Not Defined gt lt Not Defined gt 7 lt Not Defined gt Delete output folder a Click Static HTML Monitor HTML Database WebUntis Start date As the timetables and substitution lists that are exported contain up to date information it is important to specify a starting date defining which week to begin with gp Untis provides the following pre defined date options to assist input Beg of school year the dat
216. individual weeks terms taking the general educational and organisational conditions into account e g which teachers are available when Thus there is no timetable for a continuous period of time not even for a few weeks The timetable changes completely from week to week 189 190 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Year s Planning in Terms General Input The year s term planning window is accessed via Modules Multiple Terms Year s Planning in Terms Tip Customising the Toolbar You can display the icon for term planning for the year in its own Year toolbar and use this to call the window You can create customised ze Year s Planning i T toolbars from the context menu displayed with the right mouse button click on Main Toolbar Customise The year s term planning window is split into two panes In the left pane you can see a complete list of the lessons held at the school and in the right pane an overview of the total weekly periods per term that have already been allocated Number of Terms Enter the number of terms that the school year is to be divided into in the Number of Terms box and confirm the input with the TAB key 3 Year s Planning in Terms Qu Am Kx Y N 3 E Refresh window F5 Number of Terms a 8 createybe Carry the school weeks over from the calendar Periods week Carry the school holidays over as blocked terms h a 6 mome Tora JE ri Les Sub Cla Rm
217. ing example demonstrates gp Untis 2008 Substitution schedule Netscape a File Edit Yiew Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help Q File C finfo_steve 2 subst_001 htm Test school DEMO For demo and Status 27 07 2007 test only 13 05 Timetable 2008 2009 Valid from 10 October gp Untiszo0 Info Timetable 28 8 2006 Monday Date Period Subject sae Substitute Class es Class es Substitution 7 Break upervision Caution All template files as well as the untisinfo css file are defined in HTML or CSS code Be sure to make changes only if you are acquainted with these browser languages You can also set the path where gp Untis should look for the templates in the untis ini file in your Windows directory this is defined in the htmlpath entry in the Info section Example Info htmlpath C Infodesign Startpage index html You can change the Startpage entry from default htm to whatever file name you wish in the output directory Technical Description of Database Export Exporting databases with the Info Timetable module automatically creates ASCII text files as described below Please refer to the chapter Database Export on page 293 fora description of how to perform an export date txt date period contains one data record for each week for which the timetable data are available Fields 1 char calendar week e g 36 2 char day and month o
218. itable teacher Teacher suitability is determined on me the basis of several factors gt Qualification The teacher must be qualified to take the lesson entry in the teacher master data If no qualifications have been entered teacher assignment is aborted gt Teacher s weekly plan Automatic teacher assignment attempts to assign as many periods to each teacher as there are in his her weekly plan The weekly plan may only be exceeded if no other teacher is available to take the lesson If no qualifications have been entered teacher assignment is aborted with an error message Only with the the Department Timetable module gt Departments If departments have HERTIEN Assignment Lp hors fx Teacher Assignment x been entered for the Dre C a S S e S t h e __ Teacher assignment for the active view Teacher assignment for the active view application will ask if Se n these should be taken into consideration If there are multiple class couplings only the department of the first class in the coupling line will count 78 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Planning Tools Teacher assignment The system first determines the subject that is the most difficult to assign on the basis of the number of open periods and the qualifications available see also Lessons Subject Bottle Necks for more information For this subject the system searches for the lessons with the most periods and assigns the
219. k in a given period However it could be that certain subjects should be taught not on a weekly basis but e g fortnightly An example will demonstrate how value calculation is performed for this type of lesson Please open the Demo2 gpn file and deactivate the class teacher and subject factors Let us assume that there are lessons that are held every two weeks Under Settings School Data select a weekly periodicity of 2 School Data SEE Ee _ _ General Overview Values School name Test school DEMO For demo and test only Region Country School year School number Type of school Weekly Periodicity 1st school week A B Then define two lesson groups strWe for even numbered weeks and oddWe for odd numbered weeks Now assign a type A week to lesson group strWe and and a type B week to lesson group oddWe Value Calculation without Subject Factor without Teacher Factor without Class Factor Settings Time Grid Calendar Miscellaneous Print Licence Data w Main Toolbar w Toolbar w Status bar Light Mode 140 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable FF Grid Adjustment 3 Lesson Groups Gro M Oxs st 8 Re Lall oddwe 4 E C Marked m Change C Ignore fi 1 000 Factor C Lock Time range 17 9 odd numbered week Full name 28 6 To
220. k types A C E or B D F and three weekly lessons take place for example in weeks A and D 3 Lesson Groups Gro HEDA af O ge Name Fulname Marked m Lock X ignore From To Factor vVveekA WeekB WeekC WeekD VWeekE veek F O 0 36 100 V OC O Fj 30 6 1000 F 30 6 1000 g o a 0 Fj o oO O 160 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Lesson Groups Irregular Lesson Group In addition to periodic lesson groups it is possible to define completely free time patterns Please open the demo gpn file and under Lessons Lesson Groups create a lesson group with any name you choose 3 Lesson Groups Gro Marke Lock X Ignore i From To anomalous time period Fi C CI 22 9 306 Oo e D Calendar Open the school year calendar with the icon of the same name All the days of the school year are coloured green and thus active By moving the cursor while holding the left mouse button you can define interruptions and the colour changes from green to white 3 Lesson Group Name anomalous time period Date Tu 16 12 2008 fa w Calendar week 51 September f October 8 November 3 45 6 7 8 December 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 January Februay MAM slide over the interruption March with pressed left mouse button General data Values for Count only school days Value calculation School year Lessons Number of days 282 Number of weeks 41 Number of interruptions 1 Number of days
221. l Fields 1 char student s short name e g Kip 2 char student s long name e g Kipling Application Notes 311 3 char student s first name e g Rudyard 4 char student s number e g 1907 5 char student s class e g 10a Example Kip Kipling Rudyard 1907 10a lesson txt timetable data contains one or more data records for each lesson period in the period of time exported The records are output sorted by teacher weekday and period The sequence of teachers corresponds to the sequence of teachers in the teacher master data Fields 1 char teacher s short name e g New 2 byte number of the weekday Monday 1 Sunday 7 3 byte number of the period e g 3 4 char subjects short name e g Mat 5 char room s short name e g R2a 6 int internal gp Untis lesson number 0 if this lesson is not a regular lesson e g 90 7 byte code currently not used 8 char class short name e g 2a 9 char 53 week flags a flag for each calendar week the first character is for the first calendar week etc no data were output for this week 0 lesson is not held this week 1 lesson is held this week x lesson does not apply this week Example 1 New 1 3 Mat R2a 90 0 2a 1101x1111111 Explanation for example 1 On Monday 1 teacher New takes class 2a in the third period for subject Mat in room R2a Lessons were exported for 12 weeks 1101x1111111 The first week is calendar we
222. l s complete up to date timetable via the school s own network to every computer in the school or via the Internet Information today is normally made available in so called HTML format since documents in this format can be read by all browser applications such as Internet Explorer Netscape Navigator or Mozilla Firefox meaning that it is no longer necessary to install a special program on each computer with which to view the information The basic gp Untis package and the Cover Planning module already provide the means to output timetables or substitution lists in HTML format so that very simple electronic publication is possible Please refer to the chapter Timetable Display in the gp Untis user manual for more details The Info Timetable module offers you several additional independent solutions for publishing up to date information HTML based output for the latest timetables Monitor HTML output for student monitors gp Untis in Info mode Database export for processing the latest data subsequently Automatic e mail distribution of the latest timetables YYYY Y Y Automatic SMS distribution of the latest substitutions HTML based output With HTML based output you can export at the push of a button either HTML files with the latest timetables substitution lists and a clear navigation option or HTML pages with all substitution data that automatically page forward without user intervention A prerequisite for this
223. l see an error message Please enter a department for each class and repeat the process No department information exists for these classes to be sorted by Exporting Individual Departments If you wish to have more control over the creation of department files you can export departments individually In the Department section of the dialogue window you will see the short name of the next department to be exported as well as the number of lessons and classes Department D1 Classes 3 Lessons 11 C dep_tes D gpr Creating Department Timetables Use the button to launch the export of the department displayed If you do not wish to export this department you can skip the export of this department with the Skip Depatment button and move on to the next department Restrictions in demo files If you wish to try out the functionality of the department timetable with the demo files please note the following restrictions gt The number of classes with an assigned department must be less than 4 gt The number of entered periods must be less than 4 gt Amaximum of 7 classes only may be entered Creating Department Timetables Once the departmental data are split up into different gpn files each department can process its own data in the same way as if the department were the whole school The planner can define the periods of his her own classes and can optimise the timetable using all the tool
224. l year change 24 School Year End Time Limitation 154 school free 111 Settings Info Timetable 261 320 gp Untis Index Shortcut 297 Simultaneous Groups 164 SMS Mobile Telephone Number 291 Providers 290 Proxy Server 290 Sent Column 291 Settings 292 Substitution Messages 290 Start Date Beginning of School Year 262 Current date 262 Date of Scheduling 262 Last Date 262 Static HTML Maximum Number of Weeks 266 Static HTML 307 Break Supervisions 268 Daily Display 271 Data Protection 273 Exclude Elements 273 Export Directory 264 Include Elements 273 Latest Information 269 Legend 267 List of elements with full names 272 List Students by Class 273 Navigation Bar 263 Output Files 307 Periodic Output 266 Restrict Substitution Days 271 Substitutions 269 Tab 265 Timetable Formats 267 Timetable Tab 267 Vertical Navigation Bar 272 Weeks from Start Date 266 Weeks on the Top Directory Level 273 Width of the navigation bar 272 Statistics about Terms 183 Subject 64 67 Subject bottlenecks 33 Subject Factor 87 97 Subject Group 28 67 71 Subject group 34 Subject Table 67 Subject Groups 57 Subject Periods Report 101 184 Subjects No break supervision after 242 Subjects Time Report 105 Subsequent Term Year Planning in Terms 207 Substitution Lists 269 Static HTML 269 Substitution Messages SMS E Mail 290 Substitutions Static HTML 269 Tab 269 Supervision Button 243 Supervision plans Printing 252 Supervisions vaca
225. le Lesson Groups Assigning Lesson Groups to Lessons After lesson groups have been defined they must be assigned to the relevant lessons This is performed in a lessons window e g Lessons Classes in the Les Groups column or in the corresponding field in the grid view The design lesson for class 1a is to take place every two weeks To achieve this enter the corresponding short name of the lesson group in the Les Groups column In this example this is wA for week A of the 14 day cycle Tip Entry using the element window Alternatively you can enter the lesson group from the element roll up using drag amp drop Class 1a Gauss L Cla Sele JAHD BYR De OOH amp BH 4 For element Lessons Timetable Codes Values la 2 Periods week Alias Name Expressiv Class 1a Gauss Ander Teacher PL Room 30 0 Periods week 28 000 Value units week Subject Fila Home Room Lesson number Class es GD Les Groups CI Te Per Teacher Subject Class es Subject room Home Room Double pers Block Les Groups 4 1 2 Hugo 1a 1b 2a 2b Ria 2 3 Ander PER ic PL Ria rie Arist PEG aib SH2 Ria Arist MA 1a Ria Arist EN 1a Ria 2 3 5 5 2 Callas Mu 1a Ria 2 2 5 2 Callas AR 1a Ria Nobel 1a Ria Rub DE 1a Ria Cer Bl 1a Ria Lesson Groups 163 Clicking once on the lt School year calendar gt icon displays the B weeks in the school year when this le
226. lements The optimal value for the allocation of all periods is displayed in the Ideal column Any deviation in the individual term weekly values from this average will be displayed in colour Red cells indicate that the number of periods for the week is too high green indicates that the number is too low The intensity of the colour is an indicator of the degree of Capacity over or underrun Year s Planning in Terms Tese W Periods week Name Total UnSc Min Max 153 124 2 186 157 4 If the calculated ideal value deviates from the actual value perhaps because the lessons are not taught over the whole year it can be entered manually Threshold values for the corresponding weekly targets for individual master data elements can be entered in the Min Max and Ideal columns These values are used both for optimisation see following chapter as well as for the display of deviations from or violations of the threshold value Locking Terms You can lock the allocation of the total number of weekly periods of a lesson to individual terms for example in order to perform a part of the distribution manually and to have the remainder optimised automatically Year s Planning in Terms 199 To do this simply select the desired area in the left window pane and click on the lt Lock Terms gt icon Locked areas are displayed with a on a green background 3 Year s Planning in Terms
227. lesson group is time limited the period of the shortest limitation or the average of the limitations is valid However the time limitation on a lesson will override this too Lesson Groups Gro xu xu xu Subject Group Students M Students F C Marked m CI Ignore fi C Lock x Total Students Min __ Students Max _ Student Course 1st half of the Year Full name Marked m Lock lt ignore From To Exercises oO oO 179 288 Sport 179 286 1 000 179 12 42 286 Factor Home Room Value From To Eff timerange Value Les Groups AssiLes Grp 4 1 1 1 5 8559 4 4 R3a 4 500 17 9 288 Ra 17 9 288 Psi 3 12 28 2 0 4 500 o g NOOO Date No lessons Legend Breaks Holiday Weekend fa j Calendar week Public Holiday E EE Interruption Different week October November December January 1 2 3 February March April 1 2 3 May 1 June 5_s 7 a 910 11 12 13a The time limitation of the lessons considers the time limitation of the lessons group General data Values for Count only school days Value calculation ro School year Number of days 286 Number of weeks 41 Number of interruptions 1 Lessons Number of days 189 Number of weeks 38 Duration L Group 17 138
228. licking the corresponding icon in a lesson window e g Lessons Classes and is performed for the lesson that you click on with the mouse The suggested teachers are sorted according to the difference between actual and target periods i e according to how many periods a teacher must still be allocated in order to meet his her target Those teachers who still have the most to do to meet this target are shown at the top of the list If you use the Department Timetable module there is a selection list icon in the main toolbar with which you can restrict the teacher suggestions to the department that has been set Four fields are available to make a selection gt Only qualified Teach Checking this box results in only those teachers being included in the selection who are qualified to teach the subject in question Yearly Values Use this box to determine Teachers Work 35 Teacher Suggestion Click eh af reacher Suggestion Teacher gt ER Last year s teacher 1 Science D22 Modern Languaq 0333 Liberabure 3 Teacher Suggestion whether weekly or yearly values should be displayed in the Plan Actual and Actual M E planned columns L Yearly Values gt Window in foreground Checking this box i results in teacher suggestions always being _ Teache Plan displayed in the foreground gt Auto refresh Les Teach If this box is checked you only need to cl
229. ly display Max number of days 0 entire week You can also specify whether the output lists should contain all the elements concerned or whether each element should be output individually Substitution optimisation Uncovered Substitutions 19 Substitutions D Room replacements 5 Br Sup Substitutions Please open the demo5 gpn file Sle he eed mcd In the Substitutions window click on the lt Automatic gt toolbar icon and then click several times on the button lt Start substitution optimisation gt in order to schedule all vacant substitutions automatically 270 gp Untis Info Timetable Static HTML Output Info Timetable Standard Static HTML aes J Classes Classes Oall O Individual All and Individual Teachers C Teachers all O Individual O All and Individual e default hkm Navigation af Element selection lt Export gt button Click on the lt Info Timetable gt toolbar icon Click on the lt Edit gt button wae Enter a valid export directory Switch to the Substitutions tab and activate the options Classes and All and individual in the classes section Confirm with lt OK gt and in the Info Timetable dialogue click the Now open the default htm file in the specified export directory with a double click By clicking the All element you can now display all substituti
230. ly plan Anegative value indicates that the teacher is in deficit Overhead The overheads that are included in the yearly workload are listed again separately and consist of gt Lessons Overhead Sum of those values for which the Lessons entry in the of column was selected gt Yearly Plan Overhead Sum of those values for which the Yearly Plan Periods entry in the of column was selected gt Value Overhead Those entries that you entered manually in the Value column gt From absences This line displays those values that result from entries under absences Cover Planning module Please refer to the relevant section in the Cover Planning manual 48 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Teachers Work Copy tasks to other teachers Lessons Week You can see three additional pieces of information displayed at the bottom right of the yearly work tab gt gt Open Lessons Week This line displays how many lesson value units per week are missing from the individual teacher s target value or how much excess he has In the example there are only 0 08 value units per week missing for the teacher to reach his yearly plan Weeks of lessons The number of teaching weeks in the school year Minutes Lesson This is the length of a period in minutes as per timetable In addition there are two buttons on the Yearly work tab gt gt Delete Use this butt
231. m the most suitable teacher From the teachers who are qualified to teach the subject the system assigns the one who needs most periods to fulfil his her weekly plan If you have opened a class lessons windows Lessons Classes and check the option Teacher assignment for the active view the teachers will only be replaced for this one class Team optimisation It is important to carefully consider how couplings and the formation of teacher teams should be modelled as the way lessons are planned can depend on this For more information please refer to the chapter CCC Analysis in the user manual Planning becomes increasingly difficult the more teacher teams there are It is easier if a teacher appears more often in fewer teams than if he she teaches the same number of periods in a large number of different teams Every additional teacher team that a teacher belongs to limits the extent to which he she can be scheduled and conversely the extent to which a team can be scheduled For this reason team optimisation attempts to reduce the number of teams In the process the following is taken into consideration gt Theteacher s number of hours may not change gt The teacher will only be assigned to lessons which he she is qualified to teach Performing team optimisation Team optimisation is invoked under Lessons Team Optimisation A window is displayed containing the current number of teacher teams
232. menu item Lessons Lesson Groups Please open the Demo2 gpn file and look at the lesson groups in particular at lesson groups H1 and H2 Group H1 corresponds to the first half of the year starts on 17 09 and ends on 01 02 H2 corresponds to the second half of the year and lasts from 04 02 to the end of the school year Each of these two lesson groups has a group factor of 0 5 3 Lesson Groups Gro a AA o 82 z Groups 0 500 Factor Interruption From To Full name Marke Lock Ignore From To dl 179 286 v 179 266 179 12 42 266 0 1st half of the Year 18 2nd half of the Yea O O mi O oO oO O O For each lesson group you can also display a school year calendar You can enter any interruptions there with your mouse by left clicking over the desired period You will also see the most important data concerning the lesson group on a special tab similar to the lesson school year calendar Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable 133 If a group factor not equal to 1 has been entered for a lesson group as is the case in this example for groups H1 and H2 the time limitation will not additionally be taken into consideration 3 Lesson Group Name 1st half of the Year Date Mo 17 9 2007 fa w Calendar week 38 Mo Tu Wel Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr September 2007 October December Januar
233. monitor display of substitution lists is the Cover Planning module The pre prepared HTML pages can than be accessed with a web browser from any workstation in the school Ifthe pages are stored on a web server they can be also be accessed via the Internet gp Untis in Info mode If gp Untis is configured for info mode it can be used as an application to query the timetable The timetable or cover planning scheduler s gp Untis file is then read in info mode and periodically checked by the info terminals for changes e mail distribution E mail functionality can be used to send teachers and if the Student Timetable module is used students their current timetables by e mail If the cover planning module is used these timetables will of course contain all the latest information Introduction 209 260 gp Untis Info Timetable HTML based Output Options Database export With database export raw data are exported that are then used to create a timetable in a format that is suitable for database import Customer specific solutions can then be developed on the basis of this data for example a heating control system or dynamically generated HTML timetables This export function also provides the data for the applications that are available as options for Palm PDAs and Pocket PCs HTML based Output Options This Info Timetable option allows static HTML pages containing the desired information to be output at the press o
234. ms 190 Legend Timetable View 267 Lesson Comparison 72 two files 72 Two Terms 74 Lesson Group 132 152 156 active 136 and Value Calculation 164 318 gp Untis Index Assign Automatically 168 Assign to Lesson 162 Create 157 Group Factor 133 Irregular 160 Lock 167 Optimisation 164 Overview 152 Periodic 156 Lesson group 96 Lesson Group Calendar 158 Lesson Matrix 52 lesson matrix 72 Lesson Planning 17 Lesson proposal 41 Lesson Reports 99 Lesson Table Syllabus 66 Lesson Tables 57 Lesson Week 124 Lesson Window 75 Lessons Overhead 46 Line Value 91 111 Line value 92 List of elements with full names Section 272 Static HTML 272 List Students by Class Check Box 273 Loading Statistics 183 Manual Allocation Year Planning in Terms 195 Master Data View 300 Matrix 52 Meeting Weekly Target Year Planning in Terms 203 Merge Lessons 232 Minutes Supervision length 244 Monitor HTML 259 275 307 amp join 280 Cover Format 276 Daily comments 278 Departments 279 Export 278 Integrating Additional HTML Files 278 Nr of Days 277 Output Date 276 Output Files 307 Output Settings 276 Refresh Time 277 Settings 276 Mother Term 172 255 Multi week Timetable 149 Overview 151 Multi Week Timetable Module 120 Multiple Term Timetable 72 Multiple Weeks 72 N Navigation Tab 272 Navigation Bar List Students by Class 273 Vertical 272 Width 272 Navigation Controls Position 305 Network Security 295 New School Year Terms 186 No
235. ms and Timetable Display lf the timetable changes during the school year this should be displayed in the timetable There are various possibilities for this The default display is Total school year You also have the option in the timetable AEE E settings on the General Selection range Layout 1 Layout 2 HTML Selection range tab of ibs a changing the view to Calendar week or Mo Ses_ Pesodbiweek Whole Term Date 06 10 2008 SAS 30 06 2009 w Calendar week Monday Tuesday 41 Calendar week 27 Calendar week 3 School week 41 School week Settings x To i 8 Period Number Whole Term 180 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Terms Calendar week metable Reports Settings Modules Oi me n i e soere eea The Calendar week setting displays the lessons Zle Clere 12 Gauss Tins ISIS of the selected week in the correct term i e even if the term changes during the week the lessons for each weekday will be correctly displayed for the the respective term Thus in this case you will see data in the timetable from more than one term The timetable that is shown for the calendar week does not necessarily correspond to the period of time of the selected term If you wish the timetable to be always set automatically to the the date of the beginning of the term you should set the following parameters Under Settings Miscellaneous Timetabl
236. n number 59 is no longer listed Class 2a Hugo L Cla JOX Ayra We GOA No Cl Te Per Teacher Subject Class es Subject roo Home Room Double pers Department 4 1 Hugo az 1a 1b 2a 2b rie Rub 2b 2a 2 2 Curie x 2b 2a 3 7 Callas 2a 2b 3a ein New Hugo Callas Callas Nobel Cer Cer Ce BN FANN ND HD W Arist 2a If overlaps occur with lesson numbers when the import is performed new numbers will automatically be allocated In the class timetable all lessons belonging to a department are scheduled normally In department D1 only the two periods of history set manually lesson number 18 appear ikia Collisions arise during the planning of inter departmental elements As another lesson for another department has been set for We 1 there is a collision which is now shown in the details window You can find a complete list of all the collisions that occur in the diagnosis window Scheduling Diagnosis d Hugo Gw Ria 1a 1b 2a 2b Hugo His R2a 2a 230 gp Untis Department Timetable Importing Dept Data into School File Importing Individual Departments Just as with exporting department data it is also possible to process departments individually when importing The top of the import dialogue window indicates which department will be next and how many lessons and classes belong to it You can use the lt Import Department gt button to start importing the current departm
237. n the figure with the example of teacher Hugo s geography lesson eg The lesson list L No Per in the upper part of the window displays the lesson number followed by the number of periods for a selected cell If there are are several entries here this means that the lesson is divided into several units In the current example this would be 3b Kust 2iNobel 2Nobel the case for teacher Hugo s German lesson in class 4 Four of the 1Callas 1 Calla H i f sai T six periods are part of lesson number 21 while the remaining two 3iCer are part of lesson 72 By clicking on the relevant line in the lesson list you will see in the details window that teacher Hugo takes lesson 21 on his own while a coupling with English exists for lesson 86 with teacher Cervantes Clickl Teache Subjec Class es Room Home Room Male Female Linetext Stat 2 Line value Linetext 2 Female Line text Stat 2 Line value Linetext 2 By marking one of the filter selection fields you can limit the entries in the matrix to those elements that interest you For example in the figure below the filter was set for the subject HI the subjects are displayed in the lines This results in only those columns being displayed where the cell for subject HI is not empty This means that only those teachers are displayed who actually teach history However as each of these teachers take other subjects you can see other lines If you leav
238. ncide coxzedbecsassehosed denice 231 Processing the Overall Timetable ccccssseesseseeeeeseeseeneennenes 231 Merging Lessons stciccdeiecsie cs sececuewccawec eter nec ve ceereessvenciecnsvenseeeseernee 232 Effects ON other Functions sssssunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn e 233 OS TN eea E E A 233 SUGS UNON WOO sesers irienn NEEE ATER S 234 Scheedung dialogu O eae ee aes ae ae Or en kone a EEE SEEEN 235 Absences window substitution proposal ccccccccccseecceceeseececssneecessaneseessnseeeeees 235 gp Untis MultiUser sxccecaence cea petncnscacessancceasencigessacededereesusonsessencoseaneecbicmontasetes 235 BREAK SUPERVISION scccscsssssssssssseseseseseseseverevanes 237 MUOOUCHON Beeeenseensennr tenes etser rear erm rn ttr eet Senn mnt emer n erences arene ener 239 Preparatory WNDU sannana aiaia aN 240 Ma Dal ee E E E E E E E 240 COE eee en ee E A A E ee ne ene es 240 FROON ea A E E E 240 Ee e E A E E E A A E E E 241 E E E LEERE EOE N EE S OEE ie EEE PAT AA 242 Specify Supervision Areas cccsssscseesseeseeseeseenseeeesseesenseesenseees 242 Specify Supervision Length anneannnnnnnnnsnnnnsnnnnsnnnnsnnnesnrnrsnrnnnnrrnennresnnresnnne 243 Block Teachers for Supervisions ace cavencasveeceevssncatvctweney sdeeninteecestesatouecsmeaenents 244 Scheduling Supervisions Manually ccsccsssseeseeseeeeneesenneees 245 Entering Teachers for Supervisions c cscccceeeeceecaeeeeeeee
239. nees 260 info TIMETADIS Dialogue issis arrir 261 OO e E A A EE T EE E A EE ET 262 OQUP SENGS sessies rs nae EEEE EEEE TER E ES 262 E E ANN EE AE OAA ETE 263 aaie R Oi OUND saira EE i E AE E E 263 SACH TME AD iieri eraon e i E EEE A EE yetacatensinpenaiesaaane 265 Periodic output of timetables ca sated eased op savease eataiatacesalesyasewsaneeeaecente tina 266 limetable taD wcasacinsesattaestnsteesitadertencensbsdaentacassaciontanattedisaadedacsenssidexsaendadsesensice 267 OUDS ONS 120 eyiini ai E Ea iE 269 Naviga TAD sesser i rnnnor namina s NRE nE EATER RITENE aE eS On ENa anat 272 Clement SCICCHON TaD ssrin aE a irai 273 Monitor ATMEC COUMOUIE sesira nE E A 275 Monitor HTML Settings css cstecindnd aecsntnadiesnatindendlsnonsancaedate tens tanadenddiannatenneedeadandntodss 276 PATS ITI orreri e a Er A EE dante tsmmaananeaaal A Integrating additional HTML files cccccseeccccsssecccccssseececsueeecesseeeecesceeeeeessnensessaees 278 Monitor output for departments ccccccssseeecccccssseeseecessaaeeseeesssaaaesseeessasaeesseesas 279 Exporting Static HTML and Monitor HTML Automatically ccceeeeeeeeeees 281 Sending Timetables by E Mail cccsseesssseceeeeeeneeeenneeeees 282 ENa GUUS errien e E E E EE a aeeeeacest sear 283 cending E Mail eee nee ninnaa ameni a aaia er ee 284 Including Additional Attachments i cdeiccdtwcssncedcodnencedeivceaumeSandaexcieumboeuenecawmedenes 288 Contents 9
240. ng by other applications If you use theCover Planning module the data contain the latest timetable including substitution scheduling The export data are output in simple ASCII text files for which you can write a script in order to display the latest timetable or to import them into a database Click on the lt Info Timetable gt toolbar icon and then activate the Database tab This is where all the settings for database export are made In the upper section of the window you can specify an export directory where the output will be saved As the timetables and substitution lists that are exported contain up to date information it is important to specify a starting date defining which week to begin with gp Untis provides assistance for input allowing access to the following fixed data gt Beginning of school data the date defined under Settings School Data as the beginning of the school year gt Current date today s date gt Date of scheduling the date entered via Settings Calendar gt Last date the date that an export was last performed After defining the number of weeks to be exported you can launch the export process Inf Timotable Database Export Info Timetable by clicking on the button For a Static HTML Monitor HTML Database WebUntis technical description of the exported data please refer to the Application Notes chapter section Technical De
241. ns the classes and in the cells you can find the teacher and the weekly periods In this way it is possible to recognise at a glance that teacher Hugo has two periods of GEc with classes 1a 1b 2b and 3a 54 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Planning Tools Clicking on a cell in the matrix displays the corresponding lesson in the details window at the bottom of the screen Couplings are highlighted in the lesson matrix all those cells with 3 Lesson matrix Periods SEE KX ARDD e 8 Lines Columns Cells L No Per Subject 19 19 Subject vi Classes v Teacher v 7672 GEc Ja Hugo Selection of the week C Filter C Filter C Filter 3G Class es 7 7 la 1b 2a 2b 3a 3b 4 2Nobel 2Nobel 2Nobel 2Nobel 2Mobel 2Mobel 2Mobel 1iCallas 1 Callas 1 Callas 1iCallas 1iCallas S Rub 6 Rub 4iCer 5iCallas 4i 4i 6Hugo Arist 4iCer 3iCer 3iCer 1 Ander 2 Huga 2 Rub 2 Rub 2 Huga 2 Hugo ess emuo arugo J2Mugo 2 Hugo 2Hugo SiArist B Arist gew Siew 4iGauss gew 4i iNew iNew 1 Gauss 2iGauss 2 Cer 2 Cer 2 Cer 2 Cer 2 Cer 2 Cer 2 Rub 2New 2New 2New 2 Callas 1iCallas 1iCallas 2 Callas 2 4iCurie 3 Curie 2 Curie 3iCurie 2 Curie 2 Curie 2iCallas Callas 2 Callas 2 Callas 2iCallas 2iCallas 2 Callas __j2f 3 Ander 21 21 3 21 21 Female Line text Stat 2 Line value Linetext 2 elements of the coupling lesson are displayed with a blue border as you can see i
242. nt 243 Supplement 47 Tab Element Selection 273 Navigation 272 Static HTML 265 Substitutions 269 Timetable 267 Taking Account of Min Max Year Planning in Terms 204 Targ Week Max 82 87 Target per yr 91 Target periods 109 Target Week 19 Teacher Assignment 81 automatic 77 before Optimisation 77 during Optimisation 80 Teacher Exchange 82 Teacher Factor 97 Teacher Shortage 28 Teacher suggestion 35 Teacher Team 28 Teacher Teams 79 Teacher Terminal 272 Teacher Timetable 300 Teacher work 240 Teacher Yearly Work 44 Teachers Work 18 Teaching Qualification 28 Teaching qualification 42 Teaching Team 36 Teaching team 42 Team Optimisation 78 Term Changing Data 176 Deleting 175 Embed 174 Open 172 Transferring Time Request 177 Transferring Timetable 177 Term Combo list Set Width 173 Term Overview 178 Year Planning in Terms 206 Term Switch via Status Bar 174 Term specific Data 176 178 Terms 171 Advantages 171 Blocking 191 Blocking from Year Calendar 193 Cover Planning 184 Lock 179 Index 321 Overview 152 Timetable Display 179 Uberschrift 190 Terms Corresponds to One Week 190 Terms Timetable 255 Time Characteristics Irregular 152 Time Limitation 86 121 Coupling 128 Terms 144 Time Limitation fora Class 154 Time Limitation From To 154 Time Limitations 126 Combining several Time Limitations 187 Yearly Values 131 Time Periods 144 Timetable Handhelds 314 Settings for BS 253 Timetable Change 251 Timetable Dia
243. nto several terms in which all subjects are taught with the same degree of intensity As with term planning for the year some subjects are not taught in every term The basis for creating the terms in this system is a finished timetable Then through appropriate allocation each day of this timetable is transferred to a weekly timetable for a whole term For example if you wish to divide the school year up into 5 terms you must start with a timetable for a 5 day week The Monday timetable then forms the basis for the weekly timetable for the first term Tuesday forms the basis for the timetable of the second term and so on A lesson originally lasting just one period will only be taught in one term but a subject that is taught every day in the initial timetable will be taught in every term You can determine the way in which the allocation of a day in the timetable is transformed into the timetable of a whole period gt Open the Finnish Term Planning window via Cover Planning gt Modules Multiple Terms z j Student Timetable i 5 gt ae Finn IS h Term Plan ni ng Cara Sied _ Year s Planning in Terms b F Department Timetable As gt Click in the left window Minutes Timetable pane for example in the praak Supana Info Timetable first free white cell of the MultiUser Mo 1 line The right window pane will display the empty timetable for the first term Reminder the weekly timetable for
244. odic output of timetables By default static HTML is output on a weekly basis You can use the check box One timetable per term instead of per week to specify that timetables should be exported on a term by term basis Test school DEMO For demo and test only Timetable 2008 2009 Valid from 10 October Status 25 07 2007 08 53 E The field Maximum number of weeks can be used to restrict the number of terms to be output 0 all terms up to the end of the school year The export begins with the term containing the start date Timetable tab After the general settings have been made you can specify how the timetables should be output in more detail Timetable formats section This is where you can define which timetables you basically wish to output If your information system is for example only intended to be used by students in the break area you will usually not export the teacher timetables Clicking on a button to the right of the individual element types displays a window in which you can specify which timetable format should be output The selected format is displayed as the label for each of the buttons Standard Static HTML Timetable formats Classes C Subjects Class 10 Class 10 C Studer its u Class 10 Class 11 Break Supervision Class 11 C Corridors Class 11 Class 11 Classes HTML Class Diagnosis Timetables with substitution data We recommend t
245. ods vy JCompressed Given lessons including cover and E 1 10 7 10 gt Cover plan values This setting is also only active if you use the cover planning module It displays the values of substitutions with the proportion of value corrections Weekly values Yearly average 10 803 C Compressed SASS k From Until Planned Used incellation Subst W Korr V 17 9 28 6 4429493 442945 0 0000 0 000 0 000 17 9 23 9 11 666 11 686 11 686 11 686 1 10 7 10 11 686 11 686 Value Calculation Settings You can find various possibilties to set parameters for value calculation on the Value Calculation tab under Settings Miscellaneous gt without Subject Factor without Teacher Factor without Class Factor You can use these options to override individual factors that you entered in the master data This means that these factors will no longer be taken into consideration during value calculation gt Decimal Places Here you specify the number of decimal places with which the values and the various factors in the different views should be displayed Values 95 Settings Time Grid School Data Calendar Print gt Licence Data s Main Toolbar w Toolbar w Status bar Light Mode 96 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Values gt gt Miscellaneous Settings HTML E Mail Multiple Terms Autolnfo Inte
246. of a al A Lesson number Lessons Timetable Codes Values 25 z Value or Factor ine value factor k pothole 4 000 Value units week New a Newton Target per yr 26 0 Periods week Factor 32 104 Valua unke wesk Subject 1 105 Class es 1 000 Teacher 1 100 Description Ed aj L No CI Te Per Teach Subjec Class Subjec Home Double From To Value Line value Subj factor Class factc Value iT at3 26 00 10 10 10 5 s Jo jo jo jo o 10 10 32 605 4 2 111 New GA 2a 2b R2a 1 050 1 000 1 000 25 J New MA 2a R2a 1 105 1 000 4 0000 2 New PH 2a Gym R2a 1 050 1 000 2 000 TA l 2 New PH 2b Gym R2b 1 050 1 000 200 f 38 5 New MA 2b R2b 1 105 1 000 5 000 js 2 New PA sa Gym R3a 1 050 1 000 2 000 a Line value In the case of couplings involving several teachers you can enter a line value in order to increase or decrease the value of the lesson for one of the teachers concerned e g for a supply teacher Please refer once more to the Demo2 gpn file for an example This time we wish to focus on lesson number 69 Teachers Newton and Curie together take class 4 for PE for three periods In this example teacher Curie is a supply teacher and for this reason her lesson may only be valued with the fixed value of 0 5 This is effected by entering the value of 0 5 for Line value in the appropriate field on the Values tab for teacher Curie or in the appropriate line in the d
247. on to completely delete all the additio W X nal duties of the teacher concerned You are then asked if you wish to delete the additional duties of all teachers Selecting Yes removes all additional duties from all teachers Delete the additional duties of all teachers You can remove individual additional duties for one teacher with the lt Del gt key Copy tasks to other teachers Use this button to copy additi onal duties from one teacher to another Click on any cell in the line of the additional duty that you wish to copy Click on the button and in the subsequent dialogue select the desired teacher s and confirm with lt OK gt Teachers Work 49 Printing Print Preview Print Yearly work can be output by teacher or by tasks additional duties Yearly work teachers Invoke print or print preview when the teacher master data window is open and select if the Yearly Print selection Teacher 1 11 work tab is not active the list type Yearly work Layout As usual in gp Untis you can select those teachers Page setup who should be included in the list as well as various Type of list Heading layout modifications e g headings font Dats Tels Day time requests Monthly statement The output could look like the list below leg A Teacher teams Teaching qualification Unspecified day requests ValueCorrection Cancel Yearly work gp Untis 2008 Stundenplan 20
248. ons sorted by date Selecting one of the listed classes displays its substitution list _ the cometete timetabfine a on Test school DEMO For demo and test only Timetable 2008 2009 Valid from 10 October Status 25 07 2007 09 49 Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Date Period ra Room Tol T k Pee Mo l l his oe ee ae Substitution Mo 2 7 R3a Break 28 8 Supervision Mo ADE S Substitution Mo 2 7 Ria Substitution Bas f Substitution Mo Cancelled You can change the way this list is displayed as well as its colours Please refer to the manual Cover Planning chapter Printing for more details Static HTML Output 271 By default the HTML output is grouped by date You can also deactivate this function by unchecking the Daily display box Daily display Restricting the number of substitution days Substitution plans are not normally created for a whole week in advance but for just a couple of days gp Untis allows you to restrict the number of substitution days in the first output week To do this check the Daily display box on the Substitutions tab and set how many days should be output An entry of 0 will output substitutions for the whole week The following rules apply gt If the current date is in the first output week the number of days exported will start with this dat
249. or Line Valuevfactor For element 1a Class 1a Gauss Target per wr Ad N Perincs wirek Cite Per Teache Subje Class es Subjec Home Room Double per From To Value Line value Subj factor Class tact Value 84 J2 Hugo GEC 1a 1b 2a 2b Ria C oso i Ria 1 1 2 000 Arist i Ria Ariat MA Ria Arist EN Ria reason the lesson has a value of 0 5 from the perspective of class 1a 2 weekly periods 1 4 0 5 The situation is similar from teacher Hugo s perspective He takes a total of four classes including class 1a whose view is shown in the figure for total of two weekly periods The share of class 1a of his work is one quarter Therefore the teacher s value from this class perspective is also 2 weekly periods 1 4 0 5 114 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Examples The situation is different when several teachers share a lesson as is the case with lesson number 77 Here it must be taken into account that the number of weekly periods are spread over all the teachers involved Class 1a Gauss L Cla BHEDK BYR Le OFF 6 fh oa amp 8 Lessons Timetable Codes Values Value or Factor Lesson number The teacher teaches only one of the two _ dasses Class 1a Gauss Dan Daraa field L Mo ClTe Per T eache Subje Classes Subjec Home Room Double per From To value Line value Subj factor Class tactt Wale fis fH 4 12 Hugo GEc 14 1b 2a 2h Ria 1 05
250. or without Cass Fachor If you now change to a week in which lesson 25 takes place e g week commencing 01 10 it will be displayed once more You will find that the values in the grid view differ from those in the form view The value in the form view 2 146 reflects the complete time limitation period It is calculated in the same way as described in the previous section weekly periods number of weeks in the time limitation period number of weeks in the school year 4 22 41 2 146 The value in the grid view on the other hand 4 refers to the current week This means that the time limitation period is not taken into consideration 5 Newton L Tea Bele w VETER K BYR De SOOM 6 a 8 nmn mA Lesson number Lessons Timetable Codes Values i 7 gt 110 s Value or Factor 25 ine yalue factor data related to the 2 146 Value units week ia limitation alue units wee a 4 t Ae No Cite Per Teach Subjec Class Subjec Home Double From To Value Line value Subj factor Class fact Value 3 26 00 10 10 B jo hW 4 o fo 10 A 2 1 1 New R2a CE New R2a 1 10 29 2 1 105 1 000 4 000 D co E data related New to the week New n New 0 955 1 000 New PH 1 050 1 000 New 1 105 1 000 New fe 0 955 1 000 oF ON N ON DN Teache Subjec Class es Subjec Home Room Male Female Line text Stat Coc Line value Linetext 2 When using the One week setting it is no
251. or classes If this option is not selected all element folders are saved at the top level and the level below contains the folders with the week numbers The figure below makes the difference clear Weeks on the top directory level Enabled CI Disabled E Output folder E Output folder E i 38 a c ac E 38 E F E 39 G s E iF DR D 38 Ds G 39 E T 9 Frames a a is ow E 38 E i 39 G 39 tac E ir 3 F 3 38 as 3 39 a R Elis Ds D 38 aT ES 39 SV aa T Sw a C Frames a w How a directory with its sub directories can be password protected very much depends on the webserver and the operating system used If you have questions concerning this topic please contact your network administrator Monitor HTML Output 275 Monitor HTML Output In areas to which many people have access it is of course not always possible to make a computer with keyboard and mouse available Asolution requiring absolutely no manual intervention is required similar to the flight information boards at an airport This photograph was kindly made available by the Slovene BG BRG School in Klagenfurt Austria With monitor output the Info Timetable module provides the possibility of outputting this kind of free format substitution list in HTML format in order to make the required information available at different terminals With this type of output the pages automatically scroll forward no input or operating devices are needed Thi
252. or teachers you can easily and systematically process all open teacher entries Select the teacher under Lessons Teachers and insert suitable teachers into the lessons line for line with the help of the teacher suggestion feature The processed lessons disappear from the teacher overview and are placed under the assigned teacher Teachers Work 37 Previous year s teacher Imagine that a new school year begins and that it is your responsibility to allocate lessons with the help of the Lessons Planning module Usually a teacher will accompany a class ina certain subject over several years If teacher Newton gave mathematics to class 2b in the previous year he she will probably teach this subject to those students again this time in class 3b If you still have the gpn file from last year you can allocate the previous year s teachers to a class with just a few clicks of the mouse For this there must be a valid previous year s name entered in the master data for all classes For example in the figure below class 2a was Class 1a last year Classes Cla SEE HEDH ol ita Be FRO Gre ao Class Timetable Values s sonia Students Class teacher C Lock x 12 Male C Don t Print N Time Requests 16 Female 28 Students Alias name assans table Class 2a Hugo Fullname Time range Previous year s name 4 If previous year s names are entered the toolbar icon lt La
253. ory Age Reduction Delegated i Reduct Of YWorking Hours Guidance Counsellor Supervision Gf Trainees Supervision of the Biology Collection 26 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Teachers Work E Yearly balance Teacher For yearly balance Teacher 11 11 Carry the access to reductions with the reason CTe v 5 zy Calculate access ick Yearly balance l ck Yearly value Planj Year veeks Reduction Yearly value Planj Year k E Yearly balance Teacher For yearly balance Teacher 11 11 Carry the access to reductions with the reason CTe v Calculate access Yearly balance 525 8 935 0 1160 4 935 0 819 4 935 0 72 6 561 0 1081 3 935 0 951 0 935 0 550 4 561 0 1117 0 935 0 1097 6 935 0 Additionally delete reductions with the Following reasons Additionally delete reductions with the Following reasons Reduction Reasons 0 11 Reduction Reasons 0 11 First select those teachers for whom the yearly balance should be calculated Select all teachers apart from the teacher Next select the reduction reason that should be entered for the yearly balance values In our example we select the reason UE Click the button lt Create yearly balance gt The yearly balance list contains suggested reductions for the following school year based on the actual target value of the current year You can edit the suggested values manually
254. ot all lessons of the active element are always listed in the lessons display In this example all lessons of the ME department for class 4c are also listed even though different department SE is set However it is not permitted to modify these lessons Class 4c L Cla SE AHTa Le Cf os You can only work with lessons of the selected department Lessons 94 Ca Department Processing 219 Manual Planning Manual changes to the timetable are only allowed for lessons of the active department Class 1b L Cla JBEOx BY Le OOF Teache Subject Class e Subject Home rc Double pers Block 3200 15 15 l5 J13 5 1 ei RK 1b Rib GS 1b Rib cw 1b Rib BU 1b Rib ME 1b Rib BE 1b Rib WE 1b WRK LUK LU LUK LUM E M 1b TH1 Rib 1 1b TH1 1b TH1 Rib 1b TH2 Rib 1b Rib 1b SESSESHEQERRS x You can only work with lessons of the selected department Moreover in the room allocation dialogue only those rooms are displayed that are assigned either to the selected department or to none at all Optimisation The algorithm only schedules lessons of the selected department All other lessons remain unaffected i e periods not scheduled remain unscheduled and periods scheduled for other departments are not changed in any way Classes Kla Sele BO x Example of departmental optimisation Name Full name
255. ou can access Lp the reports via Reports Selection Se things Emergency list Periods Report The periods reports offer you two options gt Teachers Subjects Report This report will display a list for each teacher showing how many subjects and the number of periods per per week The value units for the lessons are displayed in a separate column Subjects Teachers Report This report displays each subject together with the teachers and the number of periods As in the previous report the value units are also displayed After selecting either report with a double click a small dialogue window will be displayed in which you can select various options This dialogue window the figure below shows the one for the teachers subjects report is the same in both cases gt Selection Clicking on this button allows you to select which elements should be displayed Depending on the type of report you can select either the teacher s or subject s Don t print elements without data If you check this box only those elements will be displayed that are actually included in lessons For example if teacher Newton has not been assigned any lessons he she will not be output in the teachers subjects report If on the other hand the box is unchecked the teacher will appear in the report with O periods and 0 value units Values 97 3 Report selection aag aJ Loading Statshcs fm Classes I
256. ou can also select if the ole date of the term dialogue or the actual duration of the terms for X Actual date of the terms overlapping terms should be displayed Now switch from the term 2nd half of the year to the term 1st half of the year You will see that both terms data are completely identical Make a change to one of the terms For example delete the timetable from the term 2nd half of the year via Scheduling Delete the Timetable Now switch to the first half year You will see that the timetable for the term 1st half of the year has not been deleted 173 174 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Terms Z gp Untis MultiUser 2008 demo Test school DEMO Timetable 2008 2009 File Edit Master Data Lessons Scheduling Timetable Reports Settings Modules Windows Dee EA MaA SRR oe E Lis ha ofthe vox 22 9 20 Te YB ai half R rear aD 6 1a Class 1a auss Ti Seles fia gene Ti 28 Periods week Press F1 for HELP lt ist half of the gt DE_ Tip Switching terms via status bar Clickim emmm lick yo can switch between terms quickly via the status bar display Status bar via Settings Status bar Simply click on one of the angled brackets enclosing the name of the current term lt winter sports wal Embedding a Term If the timetable only changes for a certain period of time e g a teacher s illness convale
257. page 162 Changing periodicity If school holidays interrupt the periodicity causing the same type of lessons to be held in consecutive weeks as this would be the case in February the periodicity can be modified under Master Data School holidays Simply enter the name of the week that should follow the school holidays in the Next week A B column In the example week B will start on 23 02 although according to the periodicity it should be the turn of week A Lesson Groups 159 School Holidays Name Full name To Next week 4 B No of subsequent school School Hol let TT 1 11 2008 n School Holid 21 12 2008 4 1 2009 School Holid 16 2 2009 22 2 2009 16 2 2009 22 2 2009 Full name 1 a EO 16 2 Fr 22 2 To B Next week 4 B 4 Date Mo 22 9 2008 ial Calendar week 39 Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu Wel Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su September October November February March April May neers School year Number of days 282 Number of weeks 41 Number of school holidays 2 Lessons Number of days 221 Number of weeks 38 Number of free days due to Number of public holidays If one class in your school has lessons every two weeks and another class has lessons every three weeks you must set the weekly periodicity to 6 A M 1st school week A B Fortnightly lessons then take place in wee
258. pdating to the 2007 version You cannot use it to define new reduction reasons This only works in the view Reduction reasons Teachers Work 27 28 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Teachers Work Subjects Sub CH 1 050 Value C Marked m C lanore i C Lock x C Don t Print N Time Requests Chemistry Full name Lessons for Teachers gp Untis provides a number of different tools for assigning teachers to lessons Teaching qualification Information on which teachers can teach which subjects is very important for the Lessons Planning module On the basis of the teaching qualifications gp Untis can for example propose alternative teachers in the event of teacher shortages automatically assign suitable teachers to any lesson before or during optimisation gt optimise teacher teams in the case of coupled lessons gt propose suitable periods that a teacher with too few lessons can take You can specify which subjects the current teacher may teach on the Teach qual tab under Master Data Teachers Individual subjects can also be combined into subject groups with a difference being made between implicit and explicit subject groups An implicit subject group is used when the subject Hil description contains the wildcards or replaces BHO xt td She an individual character while stands for any character Ste
259. periods per week The result is an even allocation 3 Year s Planning in Terms Bea of weekly periods over the in An B xxK Y Y 2 R dividual weeks but in this T ki he Mi Max Number of Terms C Respect the selection in the right pane case ta Ing the Min Max msj parameter into accou nt Sub Cla Fm Total fn Max 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011 12 13 14 15 16 17 1819 20 21 GEc 1a 1b Ala 4 8 44 4 CHM 2a 2b R2a R2b 62 68 PEB 2b 2a SH1 SH2 22 TX D 2b 2a CLPL 4 22 GA 2a 2b R2a 6 6 ARM 3a 3b R3aPs1 22 PEG 3a 3b SH2 SH1 44 DSH 3a 3b PL HE1 44 HI 2a R2a 44 MU 2a Fa 44 AR 2a Raa 24 RE 2a R2a 46 DE 2a R2a 46 EN 2a R2a 68 Bl 2a R2a MA 2a R2a PH 2a Gym MA 3a R3a GAT 3a R3a CL PH 3a Gym GEc 3a R3a DE 3a R3a DS 3a PL RE 3a Aa HI 3a F3a EN 3a A3a Bl 3a Aida lt In addition to setting from to values for weekly periods you can also specify a fixed number of lesson periods for the individual C Respect the selection in the right pane Periods week terms If for example a 16 period Cla block of lessons is to be scheduled for 4 6 or 8 periods per ic nee term the correct entry is 4 6 8 2a 2b 202 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Year s Planning in Terms Back to back lessons Itis often desirable for educational reasons that some lessons are taught in consecutive terms Let us assume that a class has 18 terms with a term corresponding to one week in this example A 12
260. play 4 SOCS a Display 2 secs Display 4 secs 278 gp Untis Info limetable Monitor HTML Output C Daily commentis on every page Daily comments By default the daily comments that can also be defined in cover planning for any date desired are displayed on the first page of each date Use the check box Daily comment s on every page to specify that these comments should be output on each page Export After defining an export directory and confirming with lt OK gt you can launch the export of the HTML pages according to your specifications with the lt Export gt button The HTML files are prepared subst_O01 htr and exported in a numbered sequence and named subst_NNN htm where NNN stands for 001 002 Integrating additional HTML files It is sometimes necessary to integrate additional HTML files in the monitor output if e g an announcement for an annual school event is to be displayed on one of the pages To do this first prepare the desired HTML pages and then save them in the gp Untis program directory or in the directory that is specified in the untis ini file under info htmlpathm for more details refer to the example on page 308 using the name info_monitor_NN htm html is also possible NN stands for 01 02 When monitor output is generated they are automatically included by gp Untis and integrated into the sequence of pages after the last output day SEa M Q 6 Q file HiC
261. ple this would be 46 times Under Settings Miscellaneous Multiple Terms you can select whether changes should apply just to one term whether you should be asked each time or whether they should be carried over to all child terms At first we recommend checking the Ask me each time option so that you can retain control over changes written to the child terms A change in the number of weekly periods is automatically over to the term planning for the year Optimisation over Several Terms You can launch optimisation for the current term via Scheduling Optimisation If Term optimisation is to run for all terms you can Schoo yent perform this via Modules Multiple Terms Tem Optimisation of several Terms Select the Term4 periods that you wish to optimise and confirm Leme with lt OK gt Those terms where no lessons are held e g school holidays are displayed Term6 Term in grey and cannot be selected Terms Term Term10 Term Termi2 S ESPES ES ES SIRS ESS ESSAI Also change in succeeding terms Modifications in parent termns Change offspning term autom Never change offspring term Ask me each lime carried E Selection range Number Lessons 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 Cancel 207 208 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Finnish Term Planning Finnish Term Planning Finnish term planning is also concerned with dividing the year up i
262. pleMAPI e g Outlook Expre O MAFI e g Outlook SMTP Tip Opening the log file Click on the Log file heading to open the log file quickly Sending E Mails You launch the dispatch of e mails from the menu item File E Mail or by selecting the the lt E Mail gt icon from the main toolbar If E mail 23 this field is not displayed you can activate the Info Timetable toolbar by right clicking on the main toolbar sending Timetables by E mail 285 In the dispatch window you can select those EE Teacher Ed teachers and students who are to be sent a Name Fullname personal timetable via e mail by clicking the eres E lt Select gt button Teacher 6 6 Caution This selection only displays teachers and Select _ TORS ers with changes slick C Date of the timetable 24 00 2007 w Week Subject Timetable for the nest week Message students for whom an e mail address has been defined in the master data Department This is the timetable for the next week and I all substitution If you are sending teacher timetables you can check the Send class timetable box to send each teacher the timetable for the class es which he she is class teacher of A corresponding entry must have been made in the Class teacher field in the class master data As with all other timetable output you can also specify the format for the output of the tim
263. r any character string and for a single character Entering Ar for room SH2 in the figure therefore means that the room in question is located near supervision areas Areai and Area2 Teachers Next you must determine the maximum break supervision in minutes each teacher should perform Each break supervision can last a different length of time gp Untis therefore uses minutes to measure break supervision Enter this upper limit for weekly break supervision under Master Data Teachers in the BS Max Break 3 Rooms Roo FFD x Bb Bien C Marked m 120 v Room C Lock C Don t Print N Time Requests Sports Hall 1 Full name Text Alterr Rm V Corric Corric SH2 4 By Ses An d SHY Bas Art r of Art Name Full name Sports Hall 1 Sports Hall 2 Gymnasium Physics lab Chemistry lab Home Econ room Class Room 1a Class Room 1b Class Room 2a Class Room 2b Class Room 3a Class Room Pseudo Room 1 3b Ria NNNNNNNAaA Aa wh Supervision Maximum field in minutes This input can be made in the usual way either in the form view or after activating the correspondig fields in the lt Grid Adjustmant gt dialogue in the table view The BS field also displays how many minutes supervision have already been scheduled for the teacher in question BS Number of weekly break Supervision minutes If the BS value exceeds the value in
264. r s Planning in Terms Year s Planning in Terms Year s planning in terms allows you to distribute lessons over the individual terms of a year These can last several weeks as in Finland or just one week as in some vocational schools for the healthcare professions Terms lasting several weeks In the Finnish system which can be operated in a similar form in Austrian schools under the name focussed learning the underlying concept consists in enhancing the value of those subjects that in conventional school systems are taught for only one or two hours per week and are therefore categorised by students and or parents as unimportant Such subjects with only a few hours of lessons per week are often pigeonholed as subsidiary subjects The value of these subsidiary subjects is enhanced in term planning for the year by not teaching them in each term but when they are held by teaching them with the same number of lessons per week as the so called main subjects The total number of periods held per year remains the same but the intensity of teaching in those terms when the subsidiary subjects are taught is disproportionately higher and the students have the impression that the main and subsidiary subjects are equally important due to the approximately equal number of periods per week Terms lasting exactly one week The annual number of teaching periods in vocational schools for the healthcare professions is divided up over the
265. rnet Customise Value Calculation Wamings function will be described Auto save Directories Timetable Value Calculation C without Subject Factor 3 Decimal Places C without Teacher Factor C without Class Factor Value Calculation C Yearly Values C Count only school days 1 00 Yearly value 100 Yearly values You can specify whether weekly or yearly values should be displayed Count only school days Use this option to determine whether all the weeks of a school year should be included in value calculation or just those with at least one day of lessons i e whether school holidays should be included or not Calculation of the yearly weeks using single days This option is only activated if you have checked the Count only school days box The option results in the number of school weeks in a school year being calculated according to the following formula number of school days in the school year number of teaching days in the weekly grid gt Percentage Fact yearly values This in more detail in one of the examples following this chapter example Yearly values Reports You can display and print numerous reports in connection with lesson planning and value calculation Some of these reports have already been mentioned in previous chapters The reports and views described below are associated with the Reports possible entries that are described in this chapter Y
266. roups overrides a value reduction caused by lesson or group time limitations Please refer to the Lesson Groups chapter on p 132 for more information as well as an example Groups 0 463 Factor Interruption From To Weekly Values It has already been mentioned that the number of weeks in which lessons can be scheduled is important for value calculation Where a lesson is located in the timetable and whether it can or cannot take place in a certain week for example due to a public holiday is not taken into account However the actual value units that a teacher works in a certain week can be important For this purpose there exists the Weekly values window that you can find under Lessons Weekly Values While lesson scheduling does not play a major role in normal value calculation just the question of whether they can be scheduled in certain weeks the values that you find in this table are based on the actual timetables In the table you can select for which teacher and how the weekly values should be displayed Below the two input boxes you can find a brief explanation of the values displayed The options are gt Lessons periods This displays the periods defined under Lessons Teachers that are active in the given week irrespective of whether these periods have actually been scheduled or not Each week begun counts as a full week and public holidays are ignored We
267. rt E Classes E Teachers E Subjects Time EC Periods Report E Teachers Subjects E Subjects Teachers J Emergency list ECJ Break Supervision E Corridors E Teachers i Days i Weekly summary EC Substitute Scheduling E Substitution Statement E Canc Days E Cover Overview ECJ Yearly work E fearly works Teacher E Pearly works T ask E early work Overviews EC Exam Schedule E Teacher Exam Schedule Teachers Work 51 52 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Planning Tools Classes Teachers Term Overnew Locked Lessons Reductions Weekly values Teacher Assignment Team Optimisation Subject Bottle Necks Emphasis Periods Display Lessons Planning Tools The Lesson Planning and Value Calculation module provides you with a number of additional tools for workload planning Lesson Matrix The lesson matrix that you access via the Lessons Matrix option gives you a clear at a glance overview of all the lessons at your school The key lesson data are class teacher and subject The rows and columns of the matrix display two of these three master data elements while the individual cells contain the third element together with an additional item of information either the number of weekly lessons the lesson value or the lesson number that you can select yourself How this selection is made is described later Colour settings from the master data are adopted in the le
268. s 209 210 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Finnish Term Planning Term 18 4 30 6 we Finnish Term Planning Total school year 20 9 31 10 3 Term 1 11 12 12 3 Terms i13 12 23 1 Time grid of the term timetables Number of days 1 to 7 Maximum number of periods per day 1 to 50 Th2 Fr Fe We 2 1 Term ee Mo Tu We th Fr 1 Mo 1 Mo l Mo 2 Mo 2 Mo 2 Term4 24 1 6 3 h Terms 7 3 17 4 Term 13 4 30 6 3 Mo4 Mo 4 Mo4 Mo4 Mod Man Th2 Fr2 mee Fr 1 We 2 We 3 Th3 Fr3 Department Timetable gp Untis Department Timetable Year s Planning in Terms Introduction In large schools that consist of several departments or that have to be divided up into several abstract parts because of their size the timetable is very often not created and maintained by one person but by several people The aim however is to create an optimal overall timetable particularly with regard to resources shared between departments such as teachers and rooms Moreover in many schools day to day cover planning is performed on a departmental basis i e by several cover schedulers but in this case with cross departmental elements having to be taken into account These requirements call for certain operations such as optimisation or cover planning to be performed department by department The Department Timetable module enables you not just to restrict work within one file to one department
269. s Class schedule big Te schedule big Room schedule big Overview classes Overview rooms Overview teachers i Settings E Estended formatting coloured background 304 gp Untis Info limetable Application Notes Extended formatting coloured O background gp Untis 2008 Timetabling Software Netscape a File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help Q oO amp File C temp default htm HTML page However the function may be deactivated here as it increases the size of the HTML file due to technical reasons Extended formatting coloured background amp gp Untis 2008 Timetabling Software Netscape a File Edit Yiew Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help Q 6 Q amp file Csftemp deFault htm Jo S Home G Radio My Netscape OX Search Bookmarks al A d E i Home G Radio My Netscape OX Search Bookmarks a the cometete timer b fine meSUtion othe complete tineta bine BEUTon Calendar week Type Element 22 9 z Classes J 1a J 1a Class 1a Gauss 1a Class 1a Gauss Monday 22 9 Tuesday 23 9 Wednesday 24 9 Thursday 25 9 Friday 26 9 Saturday 27 9 Monday 22 9 Tuesday 23 9 Wednesday 24 9 Thursday 25 9 Friday 26 9 Saturday 27 9 GEC MU Test school DEMO For demo and test only Calendar week Type Element e mo and test only Timetable 2008 2009 Valid from 10 October Timetable 2008 2009 Valid from 10 October Status 27 07 2007 08 15 22 9
270. s Curie Arist Callas Cer 9 40 9 50 Cer 10 35 10 45 Arist 11 30 11 40 14 15 14 25 Gruber amp PettersSoftware Gruber amp Petters GmbH Belvederegasse 11 A 2000 Stockerau 43 2266 62241 www qrupet at Static HTML Output 269 If you use the Cover Planning module all timetables are exported with the latest information by default However you can suppress the current substitution data by opening the Info Timetable module in Untis mode and unchecking the box Timetables with substitution data Timetables with substitutian data Substitutions tab In addition to the various timetable formats you can if you use the Cover Planning module output substitution lists containing the day to day changes in the timetable for example if a teacher is ill or a class is on an excursion Similar to the way in which you define the export timetables you can select which substitution lists you wish to export by default classes teachers and also define in which predefined formats this will occur Standard Classes Substitution Windows Static HTML Timetable Substitutions Navigation Element selection Classes CI Classes SubCla All O Individual Cc a O All and Individus l ick Teachers C Teachers All O Individual All and Individual aeei name a name L Class B Substitutions Students Print Class Dai
271. s see figure Caution Certain special characters e g the slash in school year must be replaced by a hyphen for technical reasons It is advisable to follow the list of most recently opened files 302 gp Untis Info Timetable Application Notes When gp Untis MultiUser first starts in info mode the system checks whether there is a user or user group with the name Info If not the user and group are automatically created without password This user is then used to log in from all info terminals Both the user and user group can be edited just like any other user group More than one Info User If info mode is run on several computers with the same user logging the user off from one terminal will of course log the user off from all terminals gp Untis therefore allows you to launch info mode on different computers using any user name you like To do this simply specify the user and password in the command line as well DB myschooll 2008 2009 1 Infol user admin pw admin Tip Automatic login in standard mode If the window group is not specified in the command line gp Untis MultiUser will start in standard mode the login dialogue will be skipped and the user defined will be automatically logged in to the database Application Notes The following chapters contain detailed information on various topics connected with the Info Timetable HTML Settings in the Timetable The Info Timetable mod
272. s Toute Viel string GE for example could stand for GER aan German as well as for GEO Geography but not for Er nen the subject GRK Greek On the other hand G would ees refer to all three subjects Text Description Statistical Code C D Respect double periods C P No break supervision before An explicit subject group can be defined under Master Data Subjects by entering a group designation for all those subjects that you wish to group together For example in the Demo2 gpn file the subjects Ch and Ph have been assigned to the the subject group Science Teachers Work 29 You can find the table with the individual teaching qualifications in DESS the teacher master data on the left of the Teach qual tab Rooms gt Subjects 3 Teachers Tea merx ATO 2h Se oe al New E 32 104 Value ValueConection 3 Break Supervision Term Overview O Marked m i i Teach qual Weekly values C Ignore fi L Lock C Don t Print N Time Requests Newton Fullname Text Description Statistical Code Name Full name Periodsic Facto PlanA veek Targ eek Max Actual pla Value Gaus Gauss be 26 1 000 25 000 28 000 7336 23416 gt EE Newton f 46 1100 25 000 28 000 8705 32104 Hugo Hugo 47 1 000 25 000 28 000 2501 24591 Andej Andersen is 46 1 000 15 000 28 000 6 927 5018 Arist
273. s options allows you to send timetables for the period which is defined in the timetable settings of the format concerned which could be for a whole school year ora whole term This field can only be activated in Untis mode Sending HTML timetables via E Mail Students s with changes metable Mo 1 L No Tea Subj lt iili a General Selection range Layout 1 Layout 2 Range periods Fr Date 04 09 2006 01 07 2007 AO Calendar week Monday Sunday 36 Calendar week 26 Calendar week Whole Term 2 School week 44 School week ys across the top mak To a Period Number Sa5 Periods week Apply sending Timetables by E mail 287 Sending only teacher timetables with changes If you use the cover planning module you can set the Only teachers with changes option to specify that only teacher timetables containing at least one change to the regular timetable should be sent Rub Rubens Paul Monday Tuesday Wodnesday Thursday fada Saturday Hofi 4 1b 1a 3a 1b 2b 2b Rib Ria Tht tae R2b Thi R2b Sending HTML timetables via E Mail Hofi Sending HITML timetables via Teacher 3 8 o R2a Select Teacher 10 10 4 nas ECL Sanctae on tangs Thutsaoy Friday Saturday C Send class timetable Monday Tuesdoy Wocnesaoy Tansy 4 1 Kell Rib 2 Werkr 3a 3a R3a Werkr Hofi Keli Rib Ria Ra Ria R3a
274. s section describes how to use this output option including all the settings 276 gp Untis Info limetable Monitor HTML Output Monitor HTML Standard Name Break room Monitor HTML Settings Just like Static HTML output you can save different settings under different names Please refer to the Info Timetable Dialogue section on page 261 for more information After selecting one of the output settings and clicking the lt Edit gt button a dialogue is displayed in which you can make all the settings for monitor output The output setting s name can be changed with the Name field We recommend that you use self documenting names if possible for all saved output e g Assembly hall or Break room By clicking the button to the right of Cover format you can select the format from the substitution windows defined during cover planning for the list output The button is labelled with the selected format Monitor HTML Standard i Click ET Break oorl oo Sub ClaA Class A sub lea b eacher b Sub Cla B Class B Print Teacher Teacher Substitution Teacher Substitutions Students X Cover Format Nr of days Print Teacher Print 7 Class ow Oost non f G N py oni Output date By default gp Untis outputs the substitution data for the day defined as Start date in the Info Timetable dialogue However i
275. s that gp Untis has to offer lt is also possible to enter additional master data or lessons that are new or that were previously overlooked Such data are taken into account when the department data are imported into the school file 225 226 gp Untis Department Timetable Creating Department Timetables E Grid Adjustment Caution Data that have an effect on the complete school e g the overall time period should never be modified by the department Such data are not integrated into the school file The following example builds on the example from the Distributing Department Data chapter Please open the D1 gpn file In the title bar go Units shows that is is a department file 3i gp Untis MultiUser 200 t D1 Test school DEMO Timetable 2008 20C Department D1 Open the window Master Data Classes You will see that classes 2a 2b and 3a have been exported Class 2a was exported because it belongs to department D1 the other two classes either belong to no department or to a different one but there is one department D1 lesson in which they are involved 3 Classes Cla mB SED x Bt AEO R A oam Name Full name Room Main subj de Lunch breat Periods da Dept Z Class 2a Hugo R2a 4 Class 2b Andersen R2b 4 Class 3a Aristotle R3a 4 Now open Lessons Classes and display the Department column using the lt Grid Adjustment gt toolbar icon All exported les
276. same you only need enter the value once entering e g 3 is the same as entereing 3 3 gt Double pers Here you can enter the minimum and maximum number of double periods that can be formed from the previously entered periods Entering 0 1 means that double periods need not be formed minimum 0 but one may be formed maximum 1 This field is only important for the lt Create lessons gt function The subsequent columns tell you how many periods in the respective subject have been allotted for the corresponding classes Fields with a red background indicate that the number falls below exceeds the required number of periods Tip Sorting The table with the subjects for the lesson table can be sorted by each column just be clicking on the headings You can also modify the order using drag amp drop Just click on the grey field in front of the subject name and holding the mouse button drag the line to the desired position 3 Lesson Table Syllabus Less j Lesson Table Syllabus Less Name Full name on Name wr gt EME Lower level z 3333 Aavancea leve C00 _ is mo ono Cony sbi Lower level Full name Lower level Full name lanana Subject Subjec Per Doub Block 1a Ib 2a 2b 2 2 LEE Clicking the toolbar icon lt Delete gt or pressing lt Del gt removes a subject from the table You can use the clipboard to copy the table of subjects from one lesson table
277. scence a school event for the majority of classes etc a new term can be embedded in an existing term School year a E S 1 mon 2 o o o o 1 Such a constellation would be displayed as follows in the term window E Terms Name School year C Locked Total school year Full name School days Fr To 22 09 2008 v 30 06 2009 v 237 Name Full name From To Lockec Days Parent term Wsw Winter sports weel 17 3 09 223 09 7 5 School year The term Total school year runs from 22 09 through 30 06 and term 2 Winter sports week runs for one week from 17 03 until 22 03 The timetable can now be changed just for this one week without impacting the timetable for the rest of the school year If more than one term exists you can choose which one should be the mother for the new term If another timetable change becomes necessary during the school year the term that is most similar to the new term is taken as the mother term This is generally the last valid term or the term Total school year Deleting a Term If you no longer require a term you can select it and then remove it using the lt Delete gt button Please note that the term that has no mother term usually Total school year cannot be deleted Terms 175 176 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Terms Changing Data in a Term As soon as you start working with more than one term you have the possibility to change
278. scription on page 309 esac C test a 4 a 28 08 2006 Start date d Beg of school y v Maximum number of weeks 293 294 gp Untis Info limetable gp Untis in Info Mode gp Untis in Info Mode gp Untis in Info Mode offers a further possibility for publishing your current timetables in your network This method makes the typical gp Untis windows available to the user These windows can communicate with one another and allow teacher class and room timetables to be displayed simultaneously without the user being to modify any data in the school file The following figure is a schematic representation of how the info mode can be used at three info terminals Secretary ag Staff room Info Terminal 2 File gon Info lerminal 3 Timetable planner Substitution planner In contrast to the HTML based info timetable where gp Units generates data HTML files that are saved in the network in a specific place e g on a file server and can then be accessed by a special application a web browser the concept of gp Untis in info mode is based on the fact that gp Untis is installed on each computer where the timetable can be queried info terminals accessing the actual gpn file used by the schedulers This difference is in certain circumstances extremely important from the point of view of data security Whereas HTML files contain only those timetable data that you decide to publish the gpn fil
279. selected and for others B You can see in the timetable that as a rule the lessons alternate on a fortnightly basis If optimisation does not find a Suitable lesson for the alternate week the lessons are scheduled outside the core timetable so that one group of students finishes school earlier on the relevant day Monday and Thursday Seaeie ecas auc a ax AReo 2 of Class 3b U Kla Ill Yh De OUP d L No clTe Per Teacher Subject Class es Subject room Home Room Double pers AssiLles Gry KM Sport4 3a 3b3c 4a4b4c TS R3a 1 1 KM Sport3 3a 3b 3c 4a 4b 4c TS 14 WS G 3a 3b 3c R3a 01 Perr re MJ M 3b R3a SB HE WWE2 l RL HI R3b NB R3b CER PC Ph S MA MU R3b NSS N EN EHK Seles New Type of diagnosis Timetable Diagnosis pega aah 0 same weighting 0 4 Het sey The timetable diagnosis Scheduling Diagnosis is always based on one week For this reason you should always ensure that you check all the diffe rent week types that occur during your school year 27 09 2004 vw 3 10 2004 A i Tea Teacher Last 2 am 1 period Subj room missing Double period rooms Double per spit up Unrequ double pers 2 prds wk subj con 1 6 6 2 2 Periods with no room 1 1 9 2 3 3 prds wk subj con 170 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Lesson Groups Scheduling Dialogue and Time Limitation In principle you can schedule a periodic or time limited lesson in the same way
280. selected term 231 0 9 286 Ria 3 auss 1b PL lU a ee eee Teacher Subject Classes Subjectroom Male Female Linetext Stat Codefs Line value Linetext 2 Teacher Teacher allocation locked vb m oO However if you wish value calculation to take the length of the term into account you must enter the from and to dates like a normal time limitation The lesson value will now be calculated just like a normal time limitation the Count only school days option has not been activated in this example weekly periods weeks of time limitation weeks in the school year 3 22 41 1 610 Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable 145 Gauss L Tea O X ae JAHO BYR be SOUT Aa A a Lesson number Lessons Timetable Codes Values a 3 Periods week Alias name Subject Group Gauss Teacher Room o Students M Gauss 1b Class es Les Groups 0 da Students Min Gauss Gtatieti 16 0 Periods week E Students Max 19 467 Value units week Text __ Student Course Resaciation Teacher Subject Clas Home Value From To Ett time range Value Total for Gauss 3 l 6 9 948 38 a R3a 4500 17 9 286 4 500 48 4 2 j1 Gauss Ra 17 9 28 6 1 000 58 2 Gauss Ps1 Ht Ht 3 12 23 1 0 71 D124 Gauss 342 234 0 77 12 3 2 Gauss Ria R3 Calendar of the school year Lessons 89 Date Mo 17
281. sh change by doub le clicking on the Text field O F 28 5 06 1 Per Substitution 3b 7 German 7 Ra C 28 8 06 2 Per Substitution 3a G erman R3a 30 8 We Furthermore the sent column indicates whether this substitution message has already been sent The SMS and E Mail fields allow you to determine the dispatch method The lt Send gt button starts transmission As with timetable transmission by e mail gp Untis writes a line ina log file that contains the most important data for each message when substitution messages are sent You can open this file with the lt Log File gt button and check whether transmission has worked correctly 292 gp Untis Info limetable Sending Substitution Messages by SMS E mail Modules Cover Planning Multiple Terms b Exit Student Timetable gt Calendar Course Scheduling b Substitutions Absences Events Scheduling Dialogue Department Timetable gt Minutes Timetable Break Supervisions P Special duties Info Timetable Reasons of absence MultiUser gt Standbys Substitution Windows Settings Numerous settings can be made for the transmission of substitution messages These can be found on the Sub stitution messages tab under Modules Cover Planning Settings In the Send message section you define which substitution events should be listed in the substitution message window The selection boxes Only new
282. signs this teacher lessons from another teacher the system will check to ensure that his her total value units do not exceed this value gt Value units week Here you can see how much the teacher s lessons are worth The next few pages describe how this value is calculated gt Actual planned This value is the difference between the teacher s contractually agreed workload and the currently assigned value units A positive value therefore signifies overemployment while a negative value means that this teacher must take additional lessons in order to fulfil his her teaching commitment 86 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Values Master Data Classes Teachers R ms Students be All Elements Element Rolup Term Overview School year Section The explanation given for the Week section applies to this window section gt Free for this teacher This entry indicates the total value of the lessons which have not yet been assigned a teacher and which the current teacher is qualified to take Master Data Subjects As is the case for teachers the Values tab contains all the important points for value calculation Values 14 0 Periods week ft 050 Factor 14 679 Value units week 551 4 Yearly value 0 000 Free without a teacher gt Factor Use subject factors to specify how different subjects have different value ratings i e some factors count more than
283. sion substitution will be generated The text Break Supervision is entered into the substituion type The subject and class fields remain empty and the corridor is automatically entered into the room field Clicking on the teacher Suggestion function invokes the teacher suggestion dialogue of break supervision Furthermore you can remove and create break supervisions at your own discretion Please refer to the manual for the Cover Planning module for more details Substitutions Sub Tea Short name Al v C Vacant Substitutions 22 09 2008 v 24 09 2008 v Teacher vw Date Period Subjec Teact Substi Class Class Room Subst 1 Break Supervision 24 9 We on Ar2 Substitution Substitution Break Supervision Substitution Total JOONOOOW JOOS JOOHO000 i D0r0ag 255 256 gp Untis Break Supervision Interaction Off Site Rooms Schools with a off site rooms off site buildings are also taken into consideration when break supervisions are scheduled A teacher having to move from one off site building to another in a break will not be included in the suggestion and not scheduled during optimisation Multi Week Timetable Please note that no lesson groups can be assigned to break supervisions Scheduled break supervisions appear in each school week Info Timetable The Info Timetable module allows break supervisions to be output
284. sons are assigned to department D1 Furthermore you will see in the case of lesson number 6 that it is a coupling involving classes 2a 2b and 3a 3 Class 2a Hugo L Cla Creating Department Timetables 227 Sele a JAHD RYS De OUR A L No Cl Te Department Per Teacher Sub Class es Subject roo Home Room Double per Block 6 3 7 1 Callas 428 26 3a R2a 94 2 1 DE1 1 New R2a 18 DEI 2 Hugo 2a R2a 38 DEI 1 Callas MU 2a R2a a 2 Callas AR 2a R2a 11 48 DEI 2 Nobel 2a R2a 59 DEI 4 Cer DE 2a R2a We will now make a number of changes to this file and then perform a department import First execute the Planning Delete the Timetable function and then schedule lesson number 18 for class 2a on Sa 1 and We 1 Class 2a Hugo L Cla BD x soy a e G See a amp Callas Callas Cer Cer Cer New New NSH Sf SBN NH Nobel amp L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud 3 Nowdelete lesson number 59 change the teacher for lesson number 90 from New to Gauss and create a new 2 period lesson for class 2a with subject GEc and teacher Arist Finally save the file Class 2a Hugo L Cla maf gt JAHD ATE De QUA CS L No Cite Department Per Teacher Subject Class es Subject roo Home Room Double per Block 2 3 7 DE1 2 1 DE1 DE1 DE1 DE1 Callas 2a 2b 3a R2a New ERM 2a 2p R2a Hugo Ho 2a R2a Callas MU 2a R2a lt
285. sses Static HTML if b 6 J Teachers and Rooms Name Standard Standard a Substitutions Navigation Element selection 4 Maximum number of weeks Static HTML Timetable Timetable formats A Classes E Teacher cii ick Rooms Export directory C Subjects SublA Cinto en C Students Weeks on the top director tevel gt Confirm your input with lt OK gt gt Click the lt Export gt button The export directory that you specified now contains both the complete HTML pages required for display as well as the default htm file Provided there is a web browser installed on your computer you can view the output by double clicking on this file In addition to the relevant timetables teachers classes and rooms for the whole school a navigation bar was also exported that provides an easy way of switching between calendar week the type of timetable and the various elements The timetables can now be published on the Internet or in your intranet Static HTML Output 265 gp Untis 2008 Timetabling Software Netscape a File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help ial Q Q amp file C finfo_stevejenjdefault htm amp i Home GD Radio My Netscape Q Search F3Bookmarks Ota O L eo the Com gete te tineta bine SE KA Calendar week Type Test school DEMO For demo and test only Timetable 2008 2009 Valid from 10 October v 13 10 Classes Status 25 07 2007 08 31
286. sson matrix Lesson matrix Periods SEE x e 8o e A g J Lines Columns Cells L No Per Class es 7 7 Class es i Teacher Subject 49 3 ct ie Selection of the week LI Filter C Filter C Filter 73 6 Teacher 11 11 Gauss New Ander Arist Calas Nobel Rub 13 23 a 33 Ja 38 J33 TIGA 39 BIGA 3a Jama APH IGE ja hoa EGE occ ar eea EEE oce Teache Subjec Class es Room Home Room Male Female Line text Stat 2 Line value Linetext 2 Gym Ra Planning Tools 53 With the aid of the Windows Clipboard the contents of the lesson matrix can be inserted into other applications such as Microsoft Excel Lesson matrix Periods K MAB R Bah ove o Lines Columns Cells L No Per Classes 8 8 Class es v Subject v Teacher v 46 2 l ie Nobel Selection of the week C Fiter C Fiter C Fiter 25 6 Subject 20 20 RE CH DE EN M GEc Ma GA IMU TX AR DS ck PEB PEG CTe HM Bx SiRub S Arist 2iHugo Siarist zica Calas AI ie Zica 2i p Arist 71s wie i 2Mobel 6 Rub VAnder 2Hugo 6 Arist PL EG Microsoft Excel Book 2Nobel 1 Callas 4 Cer 4 Cer 2 Hugo 2 Hugo 4New New 2 0 Al Zz _ rae ah eee P Sa SS F X s X X Z n S lt gt S iie Ay A v 2iNobel 1 Callas 5 Callas 2Rub Hugo SiNew 1Mew 24 i oF do eo al g Arial x10 BU
287. sson will be held Calendar Calendar of the school year Lessons 7 Date Th 20 9 2007 No lessons Legend Breaks Calendar week 38 Public Holiday TES School year September October nme November December 3 16 January l 113 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 March 2 i 13 1 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 General data Values for Count only school days Value calculation School year Number of days 285 Number of weeks 42 Lessons Number of days 210 Number of weeks 38 Duration Eff time range 18 18 19 20 219 23 24 25 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 lf a lesson group is to be assigned to a whole class this can be achieved using the serial change function for all lessons of this class in a lessons window The procedure is described below Use the lt Grid adjustment gt function to display the Les Groups Grid column in the lessons windows for classes FF A dament Move the cursor over the complete column holding the left mouse button Enter the lesson group short name and confirm the entry with lt Return gt Finished x U x U x U Td10A U Kla maS AMFr AMFr Brst AMFr HiBu olSc AMFr BrCa AMFr BaSc Uri KuMi AMFr KaBr ey er jer e gia gia gia gia gia er r erje NFNNFA SFSNNFAOAHN YW 164 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Lesson Groups Lesson Groups and Value Calculation If lessons take place irregularly v
288. st year s teacher gt will be active in class lessons under Lessons Classes This results in every open lesson i e every lesson where the teacher appears being allocated the teacher who taught that subject e to the previous year s class AB Teacher Suggestion W Teacher gt 7 J Last year s teacher he 38 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Teachers Work Prev yrs name The lt Teacher gt gt function is used to a Statadiion replace the already entered teachers with the teacher in the lessons of the currently opened class i e generally the class currently displayed and in no other lessons at Last year s teacher Please note that it is not the lessons as a whole that are copied from one class to another It is only the previous year s teachers that are copied remaining lesson data for the class remain unchanged Caution When transferring teachers from the previous year the order in which you process the classes is important You must begin with the senior classes and work your way back The following example will demonstrate this It is assumed in this process that the lessons for class 2a in the previous school year correspond to a large degree with the lessons for class 2a in the current year Please open the Demo2 gpn file Let us assume that it is the file that you used in the previous school year You can enter
289. stalled such as Outlook Express or Outlook sending e mails from gp Untis will work without any further settings having to be made as gp Untis will automatically activate the appropriate mail system automatically If you send the gp Untis e mails using the transport system of such a mail application you will see these mails in the usual manner in the sent box of your mail application go Untis supports both mail interfaces MAPI e g for Microsoft Outlook and Simple MAPI e g for Microsoft Outlook Express In order for gp Untis to be able to use your mail application it must support one of these e mail interfaces and must also be defined in your system settings as standard mail application you can find this setting under Windows XP on the Programs tab under Control Panel Internet Options You can still send e mails from gp Untis even if you do not have a mail application installed or if your mail application does not support either MAPI Settings Time Grid School Data Calendar Miscellaneous be Prime Licence Data Miscellaneous Settings Auto save Directories Timetat HTM Mai Mail Mailsystem SimpleMAPI e g Outlook Express MAPI e g Outlook O SMTP C Mail server requires auth before sending User Password or Simple MAPI In this case you must select the SMTP setting and add the name or IP address of a mail server that you have access
290. t PEG Sab SH2 R3a Arist PEG 3a 3h SH2 R3a Arist MA 1b Arist MA 1b Arist PH Arist PH Arist CTe Arist CTe Arist PEG Arist PEG Arist MA Arist MA Arist 3 6 B 2 2 2 2 3 3 5 5 5 5 Teache Subjer Classles Subjec Home Room Male Female Line test Stat Coc Line value Linetext 2 PA FEG 3a 3b SH2 Aa Arist PEG 3a Sb SH2 Aza 2 ABQ FEE 33 3b SHI Ra 2 RB FEE 33 3b SHI Ra The figure shows a comparison of teacher Gauss lessons in two terms identified as Term 2 and Term 1 Green has been assigned to the first term and red to the second In the case of lesson 76 there is a coupled lesson and the difference can be seen in the coupling line The second teacher in the coupling changes from one term to the other While it is teacher Newton in the first term it is teacher Rubens in the second Lesson 106 is completely green and appears only once unlike the other lessons This means that teacher Gauss takes the lesson in the first term but not in the second The difference in lesson 32 is in the Subject room column In the first term you can see Gym here while in the second term the physics lab PL has been entered 2 565 2 065 2 565 2 065 6 630 6 630 2 100 2 100 1 510 1 510 2 036 2 636 5 470 5 470 are are Teacher Teache 76 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Planning Tools ee Scheduling Timetab Classes Teachers Matrix Locked L
291. t bottlenecks Subjects for which there are too few qualified teachers cause problems when planning lessons The Subject bottleneck function determines possibe bottlenecks in lesson planning Lesson matrix Allows an overview of how lessons are distributed in the form of a matrix Lesson table syllabus By defining the school type this view helps you to check whether each class of a certain school type has been allocated the prescribed number of weekly lessons in each subject Value calculation Lesson planning is always particularly difficult when lessons for different subjects are weighted differently e g when a maths lesson is worth more than a music lesson Lesson planning from gp Untis allows you to enter the information you require for value calculation for the subjects classes teachers and lesson You can find the total values for the whole school that are important for statistical purposes on their own index card Overview 15 16 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Lesson Planning 17 Part I Lesson Planning 18 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Teachers Work Teachers Work This chapter describes how you can use gp Untis to manage a teacher s workload This involves not just the lessons to be held but also the various additional duties that a teacher performs e g supervision of teaching material or administration of the school library Such duties are grouped unfer
292. t important for values referring to the week whether the Count only school days option is activated or not If the lesson can in principle be held in a certain week according to the time limitation period or because the week is not in the school holidays it is included in the value calculation otherwise it is excluded fully Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable 125 Fixed values and factors with time limitations Fixed values and factors also influence date limited lessons An example will demonstrate just what these influences are We will again be observing lesson number 25 in the Demo2 gpn file Please set date limits for it for the period from 01 10 to 29 02 If the settings from the previous example are still active in your file please deactivate the One week box in the lesson settings The Count only school days option is deactivated in this example It is unimportant whether class teacher and subject settings are taken into consideration in the first part of this example as they are overridden by fixed values and factors as described in the chapter on entering values and factors However class teacher and subject factors do play a significant role at the end of this example Please enter a 2 in the Value or Factor field on the Values tab or use the corresponsing field in the grid view Entering this number changes the value of lesson number 25 to 1 073 Newton L Tea Bela AHD
293. te Dept to display the department column Data Entry 215 E Grid Adjustment Fields Covey Cla Class General Print Field Active Column Widtk Full Name Sort Description Descending a Name 2 495 r 0 Name Full name 3 1950 al 0 Printname Room 4 540 a 0 Room Text O 5 1000 a 0 Text Description gO 6 1000 a O Description Marked m E 7 400 aal 0 m Marked Cl ICL Lock x oO 8 400 o 0 Locked ASSER A Mta Ignore i I Fi is 400 im 0 iJ Ignored xu A DontPin N O 10 400 EF O0 N Donopi eh D x 8 2 a oo Stat Code s O n 1000 O O Statisti able afafa i Pme Full name oT Dept 0 Ewe Class 1a Gauss Female 14 i Tumber of fema Class 1b Newton Rib nie m m n Kii mahar mf malal Class 2a Hugo R2a Class 4 Nobel Class 4 Nobel Assign to class 1a the electrical engineering EZER DER department ET and class 1b the technical A D x 2 A i OG amp department TE By assigning the departments to the classes you implicitly define which departments lessons are assigned to The Department column can be displayed in the lessons windows to aid orientation This is however purely informational as the data cannot be edited here According to this example all lessons involving classes 1a or 1b have now been assigned to departments 3 Class 1b Newton L Cla ara We BSF NON WwW N
294. teacher s lessons checking the Reductions box in the print selection window results in the reductions being output on the report below the lessons Automatic yearly balance at change of school year You can have gp Untis automatically calculate the yearly balance as inthe previous example We will illustrate this with a concrete example Teachers Work 25 gt Open the Demo2 gpn file and for the sake of clarity close all windows Windows Close All Windows CZD We now want to create the file for a new school year and in the process automatically calculate the yearly balance values Please ensure that the reduction reason UE Underemployement previous year already exists under Master Date Reduction reasons B Now invoke the lt New School Year gt function File New School Year Select suitable start and end dates for the new school year with the help of the From and To date fields Now check the option Carry the excess to the yearly balance and confirm with lt OK gt The window with the yearly balance is displayed see next page si Reduction reasons d Anr 46 x U x L x LI Hew school year School year Fr To Class Teacher Full name 21 09 2009 06 07 2010 Full name Class Teacher Delete school holidays Head Teacher L Renumber lessons Yearly Balance Library Physics Inventory Cary the access to the yearly balance Chemisty Invent
295. the first term will be created from the Monday of the initial timetable gt By double clicking in the right pane you can now schedule lessons from the initial timetable in Mo 1 at any desired position in the weekly timetable For example assigning the Mo 1 period in the initial timetable Mo 1 Di 1 Mi 1 and Do 1 means that those periods scheduled for the first on Monday in the initial timetable will now be taught in the first period on Monday Tuesday Wednesday and Thursday in the first term gt Once you are satisfied with the allocation of the Mo 1 lesson to the first term click on Mo 2 in the left pane and allocate this period to the timetable in the right pane When you have scheduled all the periods of a day left pane to the timetable right pane the term is complete and you can begin work on the next term You can remove an allocated period by double clicking on it Instead of a double click you can use the lt Allocate gt and lt Delete allocation gt toolbar icons The lt Copy the allocation of a day gt toolbar icon is used to copy one term timetable to another Clicking the lt Create terms gt icon results in the terms actually being created The initial timetable is deleted in this process Please ensure that you have created a backup copy of the initial timetable before invoking this function Finnish Term Planning Allocate Delete allocation Copy allocation of a day Create term
296. the new term If you do not have the gp Untis multi user version you can proceed as follows The original data is the currently active file which we will name Term1 gpn Semester1 gpn Total School Year Timtable Total School Year A new term is inserted into this file beginning on 11 02 Substitution planner Semester2 gpn 11 02 02 Term 1 i Term 2 netable Semester The substitution planner can continue working with this file The lesson planner saves this file under a different name e g Term1_2 gpn and modifies the timetable in the new term Two files exist on 11 02 Term1 gpn with the complete substitution data and Term1_2 gpn with the new timetable These two files must now be merged The substitution planner takes the lesson planner s file Term1_2 gpn and imports all the cover planning planning data from the file Term1 gpn using File Import Export Import cover planning data 186 gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Terms Semester1 2 gpn Lesson planner 11 02 Term 1 Term 2 Semester1 gpn Timetable Semest Or The file Term1_2 gpn now exists containing both the new timetable and the cover planning data created so far Hew school year School year Fr To 21 08 2008 a 06 07 2010 School year t based on the tem Delete school holidays Renumber lessons L Cary the access to the pearly balance New School Year If you open a new school year
297. the previous year s name for every class under Master Data Classes For the first year classes that are new to the school this year the field is of course empty Last year class 2a was class 1a 2b was 1b and so on 3a has been entered as the previous year s name for class 4 Teachers Work 39 Switch to the lessons view of the classes Lessons acReeyteRiyriret Ee Classes and look at the lessons of the final class in our example class 4 For element 4 Class 4 Nobel The figure on the right shows the lessons for class 4 L No CI Te Per Teacher Subject Class es a 05 10 caas CH 2a 2b 3a 3b 2 Gauss Use lt Teacher gt gt to delete the teacher assignments for 7 F 2 Hugo this class All teachers will be replaced with the teacher wee and the remaining lessons data for class 4 will remain ifr unchanged 2 Calas 2 Nobel 2 Rub 2 Rub 1 Cer 3 2 24 Zi Class 4 Nobel L Cla Sele 1 Er EMEEN 3b TE vi BFOK BY De S sson number Lessons Timetable 1 Periods weg IA pubject Class es Subject room Home Room A H 2a2b3a3b Ra 4 Ps1 Ps1 Ps1 Ps1 Ps1 Gym Ps1 Ps1 Ps1 Ps1 Ps1 Ps1 SH2 Ps1 PL Ps1 na Ps1 gt Ee FP HSE HH SE HH SH HS SH HF SD DD DD DD DD DD DN I lt Teache Subjec WS es Subjec Home Room Male Female Lim 1 cH 2a 2b 3a 3b R2a 26 i iil E O gt Caution In the
298. these settings under LE SU Values ae LE total KL LE values You can now quickly and easily switch between the Sibiect R two display settings using the selection list RE Nobel Selec C Filter Fiter C Fiter 23 6 Limit the display of elements You can use the lt Selection gt buttons to restrict the lesson matrix to displaying certain elements The upper button always refers to line while the lower button is for columns In the example the display is limited to the first two classes and also to subjects D and E Full name Class 1a Gauss This selection option allows a more general view for large schools and Periods FER K MAB R Ba ha keves v Lines Columns Cells L No Per Class es x Subject v Teacher vi E Help O em if Lesson matrix la RE Nobel C Filter C Filter C Filter Selection of the week Subject 2 19 makes it easier to work with this tool Full name Religious Education Female Line text Stat 2 Line value Linetext 2 Geography and Economics MA Mathematics GA Graphics BI Biology PH Physics Music 65 66 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Planning Tools Classes Teachers Matrix Term Overview Locked Lessons Reductions Weekly values Teacher Assignment Team Optimisation Subject Bottle Necks Emphasis Periods Display Lessons Lesson Table Syllabus Lesson Sequence
299. tinue gt gt Enter Info Timetable as name and click on lt OK gt gp Untis in Info Mode 299 gt Now launch gp Untis in info mode by clicking on the icon E 8 The timetable or cover planning scheduler s gp Untis file is then o aan ai Info Timetable read in info mode The application running in info mode on the info terminal e g in the staff room checks at regular intervals to see if the scheduler in the school office has modified the gp Untis file and if so reloads the modified file 3 gp Untis MultiUser 2008 demo Test school DEMO Timetable 2008 2009 Classes Cla B aAA Class 1a Gauss Class 1b Newton Class 2a Hugo Class 2b Anderser Class 3a Aristotle Class 3b Callas Class 4 Nobel L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time 8p TL No Tea Subj Rm Cla 3 Gauss GA R3a 3a 11 Hugo GEG Ria 1a 1b 2a 2b pa Curie TX CL 3a 3 Total Tip changing the reload time A gpn file read in info mode is checked for changes at 10 second intervals This interval can be modified in the untis ini file in the Windows directory Simply add the following line to the info section ReloadTime time sec Replace sec with the number of seconds that gp Untis should wait before re checking 300 gp Untis Info Timetable gp Untis in Info Mode T Refresh screen The display in info mode differs from that in Untis mode in several respects gt The toolbar in the main window has
300. tments folder Purchase 9 Metal The departments now generate their monitor output in their own folder Webserver Departments Electro Webserver Departments Purchase Webserver Departments Metal f Dep Electro 2 webserver Departments Electro Fae Purchase Purchase Ss a O Metal patch Metal gp Untis or a gpn file main file is set up for the integration of the monitor HTML files at one workstation For this a special format with the name amp join is created on the monitor HTML tab This format should be the last active format in the list The 22 09 2006 Statt date export path of this format determines the output Last date v directory for the merged HTML files of all departments All other entries of this format are ignored Into Timetable Static HTML Monitor HTML Database WebLIntis Miscellaneous Settings The shared output HTML E Mail Multiple Terms atot directory for the Auto save Directories Timetable Customise Value C department files is Type afie entered on the Version 14 x files apu Directories tab TEE under Settings Sete Miscellaneous in this example C Programme gp Untis Abt Test T Department files All departments whose output is to be merged must be entered in the master data of the main file The sequence of the department entries determines the sequence in which the HTML files will be m
301. to new one Click on the table that you wish to copy and select the menu option Edit Copy or press lt Cirl gt C Then choose another lesson table and click on the subject table Use the menu option Edit Paste or the lt Ctrl gt V key combination to insert the subject table The following functions are available in the lesson table Create lesson Use this function to create lessons from the entries in the lesson table for all classes that are included in a school type provided the corresponding combination of subject and class does not already exist Caution If t he lesson table where you want to copy already contains a subject table this will be overwritten After the button is pressed a window is displayed offering a further two setting EOZIN options Planning Tools 69 a Create Lessons This function creates lessons from the lesson table for the assigned classes gt Only for the current time grid Checking this option limits the Please press the lt OK gt button to continue function to the current lesson table otherwise lessons are created from Fis fee thes camer ees gl the data in all lesson tables Delete the existing file gt Delete the existing file If you have already created lessons you can delete them by checking this option 70 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Planning Tools When you confirm with lt OK gt gp Untis goes through the current lesson t
302. tor For element New fa Newton Target per yr L No Cl te Per Teach Subject Class Subjec Home Double From To Total f 3 26 00 10 10 10 S 3 0 1 1 4 22 11 New GA 2a 2b R2a 1 050 25 CMM New ma 20 R2a 110 292 1105 Calendar of the school year Lessons 25 Date Mo 17 9 2007 Nok fa Calendar week 38 TE School year Different term Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su September 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ang October IN 5 6 7 8 S O 273 4 Js NG A OS S 20 21 uae Wa Wa 5 E5 November 3 4 19 20 21 December O10 aa 92 S 94 1516 17 19S 1S 120 21 22 23 24 25 January pe is te avr mea l eaa February 93 10 2324 2008 March 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 April 123 T3 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 May 1 TT 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 June General data Values for Count only school days Value calculation School year Number of days 190 Number of weeks 38 Lessons Number of days 95 Number of weeks 19 5 7190 0 5000 ee el Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetable 123 There are 19 weeks available for lesson number 25 These two values are again divided resulting in a distribution time factor of 38 19 0 5 If this time factor
303. try shows you the current total value for the lesson gt Target per year You can use this field to specify how many periods of this lesson should be taught over the school year as a whole gt Factor This section of the screen displays the factors that you entered for the master data elements that make up the lesson As already mentioned you can influence the value of a lesson in many ways gt directly by entering a fixed value This results in all other input values and factors that affect this lesson being overridden If you precede the value with an additional equals sign time limitations will also be ignored This will be illustrated later in the course of a another example Negative values are also valid gt indirectly by preceding the existing value with a or This defines either a summand that is added to the total value of the lesson or a further factor that is multiplied with the value 90 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Values 3 Gauss L Tea Lesson number p S For element Gauss L No Total for Gauss Teacher 5 Gauss Gauss Gauss Gauss Gauss The figure below shows you teacher Gauss lessons The Value column displays the total value of the lesson in question Dax Sy bh Wem SY Lessons Timetable Codes Values Value or Factor Line value factor 1 826 Value units week Target per yr Subject Class
304. u expressly wish this to happen detailed explanations follow later Automatic teacher assignment during optimisation is also contained to a limited degree in the standard package However it is only with the Lesson Planning module and the associated possibility of entering qualifications that it shows its full potential In order to be able to use the variable teacher assignment during optimisation at least one of the following conditions in addition to the entered qualifications must be met gt There are lessons where the teacher is assigned gt There are lessons where the V Variable teacher code has been set to be found in any lesson view on the Codes tab Codes Locked B Lock conditionally fi Ignored 0 Respect double periods C im Marked C No single periods E Double pers span breaks Ri Place in a fringe period 0 Optional subject S Schedule class group later d biecbooore than once day M Variable teacher G No fringe period placement K No altern room to be used k Exempt from data analysis Jot in legend fr All prds in the same room U p m only double periods Teacher allocation locked Mi Schedule manually Whereas the standard package only allows those teachers to be exchanged who have the same subject with the same number of periods the Lesson Planning module allows gp Untis to choose from
305. ub 2 Rub 2Nobel Callas 4 Ander 2 Huga 2Mobel Callas 4Hugo 1 Cer 2 Huga iil 62 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Planning Tools Selecting a cell and either clicking the lt Delete gt option or pressing Del will remove the entry from the matrix and also delete the lesson Entries cannot just be made in empty cells but also in cells with existing entries What happens in this case depends on whether you have checked the option Entries in the cell create a new lesson or not The figure below demonstrates changing a cell in the matrix in column Mat Teacher Aristoteles is to take the subject not for six but for seven periods If the selection field in question is not marked ente ring 7 Arist means lesson number 30 is modified immediately Otherwise a new lesson number 105 is created Caution e As the original lesson number 30 L No Per is notchanged one weekly period 3076 must be entered for teacher Aristotoles in this case in order to make up the 5 hours v Mat Gz Entries in the cell create a new Entries in the cell create a new O lesson ago SiArist lesson 30 Ga 1 4iNew 17 sult SiNew ul No P L No Per L No Per y Mat Gz zm o HI yo SiArist 9 4New 1Me i ziar E SiNew 4f 4New a Aare affect only the first line L No Per Planning Tools 63 If the code is not activated changes in will only affect the lesson in th
306. ues gt C Marked m Students C Ignore fi H1 Groups CI Marked m _ Change T C Ignore i Interruption C Lock Male CI Lock Time range CI Don t Print N Time Requests 16 Female 26 Students 17 9 From Class 4 Nobel Full name Time range 3 12 From 23 1 1st half of the Year Full name 1 2 To Text Ady Description Statistical Made Name Full name Marked m Lock x Ignore i Exercises 4 2 33333 1 000 2b Sport Sport 4 2 33333 1 000 2a TE 1 st half of the Year oO oO Ol 1739 12 1 000 1 000 1b 2 2nd half ofthe Yea O oO O 42 286 0 500 eT olia 1010 1 000 1010 0 990 33333 1 000 3a r SF FHS HS NNN NN Date Mo 17 9 2007 No lessons Legend Breaks fa wj Calendar week 38 Public Holiday EES School year Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo pmt 17 18 class 4 considers the interruption of the lessons group General data Values for Count only school days Value calculation School year Number of days 286 Number of weeks 41 Lessons Number of days 189 Number of weeks 38 Duration Eff time range 5 If a master data element of a
307. ule allows a special format for each output of the Static HTML function to be specified for the display of the timetable This chapter describes the special settings that can be made for HTML pages By default all settings made in the timetable are included in the HTML output This applies to all the elements that can be seen in the timetable subject teacher room but also to colour settings and fonts for those elements The following steps describe how to define additional settings gt Start gp Untis and load the demo gpn file gt Open the class timetable via Timetable Classes gt Click the lt Timetable Settings gt icon gt Activate the HTML tab Here you have the opportunity to influence the minimum height and width of a timetable period the column width of the line labels and the alignment of the contents 1a Class 1a Gauss O Left aigned Left aligned Centred Centred O Right signed Right sligned formatting colora xen Oo background C Allow word sapping In addition to these settings the option Extended formatting coloured background allows you to specify that the background colours are also to be included in the timetable In addition to including the background colours this setting also results ina more precise alignment of the the individual timetable fields within the Application Notes 303 Teachers N Rooms Subjects Students List All View
308. up factor of 0 5 for each week would ensure that the the lessons are valued equally despite the Count only school days option o oO E o 0 o O ad strne odde 179 286 179 266 0 500 0 500 straight numbered week odd numbered week If you select the One week option from lt Settings gt you will find that lesson number 18 and lesson number 40 are only displayed in alternate weeks Settings erste tented codes Show total Students M Students F o Total Students Min Students Max Student Course YIA JOR m Home Room st we Les Groups Statistical Code Total for Hugo 1 6 00 4 4 4 0 4 o 64 4 18 2 2 54 2 i 2 Hugo Hugo L No 2 Periods week Alias name Subject Group Teacher Room Students M For element Subject R3a Home Room L_ Students F 0 Hugo Classfes oddwe Les Groups L pa Students Min Hugo Sas 6 0 Periods week eieh Students Max 8 000 Value units week Text _ Student Course R2a Ra 17 9 28 6 17 9 28 6 Dax YH De OUA Cs FRO Lessons Timetable Codes Values x U x U x U Total for Hugo 40 50 51 57 2 Hugo 2 Hugo 2 Hugo Hl 3b Ra 2 000 2 i Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetabl
309. ut Minutes Print C Full name 0A 12 23 34 45 56 67 7 8 845 940 1035 11 30 1225 13 20 1415 855 9350 1045 1140 1235 1330 1425 77 2 77 77 Te Hugo 77 Ander 29 800 Monday Tuesday Wednesd Thursday Friday Gauss Saturday 7 246 gp Untis Break Supervision Manual scheduling dialogue and enter the corresponding corridor name in the desired supervision Please note that you are always kept informed of the supervisions that are still to be scheduled Break Supervisions Coridor Teacher Minutes 625 Vacant 67 0 one ps a as e e7 pa 8s s4 1035 130 12235 1320 1415 80 85 950 1045 1 40 1235 1330 14 25 wesdan l ursday A Friday aturday Teacher Suggestion The teacher suggestion feature helps you to find a teacher for a certain supervision The following example is illustrated in the Demo6 gpn file First delete all entered supervisions by clicking twice on the lt Delete Supervisions gt button The first click deletes the supervisions for the selected supervision Deletin i 7 W g area the second click deletes all supervisions Supervisions Position the cursor on the supervision Monday 0 1 In principle it does not matter if the supervision is vacant or allocated Manual scheduling 247 Now open lt Teacher Suggestion gt This window displays all those teachers who could take the current super
310. vantes coma tineta biir 2 EUon fool DEMO For demo and test only etable 2008 2009 Valid from 10 October Status 25 07 2007 10 09 V Vertical navigation bar the compt Element All z Calendar week 28 8 Type Sub Cla Calendar week 28 8 Type Sub Cla Type Element Substitutic Substitutic Break Supervisic Substitute Substitutic Cancellec i Andersen Aristotle inte When the Vertical navigation bar box is checked you can also Bapa adjust the width For this use the Width of the navigation bar field Curie If you have the Course Scheduling or Student Timetable modules you can use the List students by class check box to have students grouped by class Element selection tab You can limit what is output using the Element selection tab Standard Static HTML Substitutions Timetable Element selection Navigation Include Elements zE particular department o Department In the Exclude Elements section you can specify whether elements with code N do not print or with a special statistical code should be excluded from export Data protection In many schools sensitive data e g teacher timetables must be protected from unauthorised access This requirement necessitates that all data which need a In
311. verlap the shortest limitation is valid E Element class teacher L Lesson LG Lesson group Factor priority Line value fixed value calculated values all important for value calculation TSC Teacher subject or class factor FV Fixed value LV Linevalue GF Group factor 148 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Multi week Timetable gp Untis Multi Week Timetable Overview ExamplesExamples Overview If you make no additional settings gp Untis will create a timetable for one week It is implicitly understood that this timetable is repeated on a weekly basis with the exception of public and school holidays There are many reasons why this is increasingly seldom the case in daily school life Educational and organisational factors mean that the timetable cannot be repeated exactly week for week and that it is subject to various time constraints gp Untis provides you with three basically different tools for dealing with these various cases A Time limitations from to Courses or individual lessons can be time limited by entering a date i e the lesson does not begin until some time after the start of the school year and or finishes some time before the end of the official school year Interruptions in the lessons courses are not possible with this method A typical example of this would be final year examination classes where lessons normally finish some weeks prior to the offic
312. verview for the subjects GA for teacher Anderson According to the plan entered in the Target per year field under lessons teacher Gauss should teach 260 periods in these subjects during the year whereas a total of 256 have been scheduled i e a difference of 4 periods below target The term in which the lessons have been scheduled is indicated next to the lesson number HA Andersen Periods 1 9 2003 3 7 2004 secant Blass perweek Titre Lan Flan j HH 1M7 Woz Fred Fr 2 hd o aA GA GA GA GA GA GA GA 10903 3M 4 Woes WWe B Th 2 hoe Hox fra T I ra 71640 n3w a 3m a E E a EE Ca Terms and Cover Planning The cover planning module always accesses the currently active timetable There is therefore no problem with advancing lessons across term boundaries When a change is being made to the timetable during the school year it can happen that the lesson scheduler and the substitution planner both wish to work with the database at the same time If you do not have the gp Untis multi user version you can use terms to allow the lesson planner and substitution planner to work simultaneously Terms 185 Let us assume that a timetable change must be made from 11 02 onwards The lesson planner creates a new term beginning on 11 02 With the gp Untis multi user version the substitution planner can for example create substitutions on 06 02 while the lesson planner makes changes to the timetable in
313. vision The list is sorted according to minus points that result a Teacher from the weighting you define If for example the Lesson in corridor Suggestion before break parameter has a high weighting relative to the other factors the teachers concerned willbe ranked g higher the weighting parameters are described Mikaa in detail on the following pages Coridor Teacher The individual columns of each teacher row Bas Minutes 420 Vacent 420 indicate whether a condition applies or not C Minutes Thus the Less before column is checked if the teacher is teaching in the lesson before ie this break Conditions weighted Unimportant are not displayed 2 23 3 4 as 56 6 7 3 8 45 9 40 10 35 11 30 1225 13 20 14 15 855 9 50 1045 11 40 1235 13 30 Clicking the button lt Apply gt or double Monday mm 2777 clicking the corresponding row allocates J fea mO m the teacher to the supervision 3 Teacher Suggestion A mfx Points Minutes Max mii Less be Less af Comdor Comdor Before Ist per After las Consec Suj Bef blockin After ble NTP pri NTP aft a v ei P d d d a M oO d M oO Pi M oO d M oO d M oO O M d M oO O d gooo 248 gp Untis Break Supervision Automatic scheduling ae Settings Weighting Unimportant N N Scheduling Supervisions Automatically In addition to manual scheduling supervisions can be scheduled automatically Weighting S
314. w Departments Descriptions Alias Names School Holidays Reduction reasons Reasons of absence Display Master Data Corridors Cor FAD x 4 Preparatory Input A number of preparatory inputs must be made before you can begin with break supervision scheduling The following section describes the necessary steps Master Data Preparatory inputs must be made in the master data for corridors rooms teachers and subjects in order for break supervision scheduling to be effected Corridors Thecorridors are the actual break supervision areas This is where supervision takes place Enter the corridors just like all other master data classes teachers etc You only need to assign a short anda long name Entrance area South corridor 1st floor or Schoolyard are typical examples of corridors The schoolyard is Strictly soeaking not a corridor but it can well be a break supervision area Rooms Up to two corridors can be assigned to every room When optimising break supervision in accordance with the weighting parameters that you set gp Untis will favour those teachers who have lessons in nearby rooms before or after the corridor supervision in question Open the rooms master data window Master Data Rooms and activate both corridor fields Enter the corridor or corridors that are nearest the room Please note that when assigning corridors you can use the wildcards fo
315. with the following formula 1 00 Yearly value 100 number of school weeks number of schooldays number of schooldays in the weekly timetable Percentage Factor yearly values Some schools are not so interested in how many periods a teacher takes but in the proportion of the planned lessons taught Examples 111 The Percentage Factor yearly values has been designed ale Calculation specifically to convert yearly values into percentages You can enter it on the Value Calculation tab under Settings Miscellaneous This value is only used when the Yearly Values box has been checked 100000 Yearly Values C Count only school days Yearly value 100 Only the first two decimal places are used with percentage factor for yearly values lf a full teaching commitment entails 750 value units this will result in a percentage factor for the year of 100 750 0 13 Please open the Demo2 gpn file and enter a yearly percentage factor of 0 13 in the appropriate field under Settings Miscellaneous Now open the teacher master data On the Values tab you can now see the teacher s yearly work in percent In this example teacher Gauss fulfils 74 0 of his her planned value Class teacher and subject factors are not included in this calculation If you now enter the extent of the teaching commitment in percent in the Plan Year field full teaching commitment is 100 the Actu
316. xport 259 293 Export Directory 293 Technical Description 309 316 gp Untis Index Delete Output Folder 263 Deleting Weekly Periods Year Planning in Terms 199 Demo Files Restrictions 225 Department Data Location 224 Department Directory 281 Department Files 222 226 Department Processing Manual Planning 219 Master Data Lessons 217 Optimisation 219 Printing 222 Department Timetable Cover Planning 233 Effects on other Modules 233 Export 223 Export Individual Departments 224 gp Untis MultiUser 235 Import 228 Import Individual Departments 230 Import Master Data 230 Merge Lessons 232 Toolbar 216 Departments Assign to Classes 214 Assign to Lessons 215 Assign to Master Data 216 Create 214 Definition 214 Details Window 54 75 119 Diagnosis Multi Week Timetable 169 Directories Tab 281 Distribute Department Data 222 Distribute Periods Evenly Year Planning in Terms 203 Double Period 69 E E Mail 259 Attachments 288 Attachments to all Teachers 289 Authentication 284 Class Timetable 285 Include Additional Attachments 288 Log File 284 Mail System 283 MAPI 283 Only Teacher Timetables with Changes 287 Send 284 Send Class Timetable 285 Sending Substitution Data 286 Sending Timetables 282 Settings 283 Simple MAPI 283 SMTP 283 284 Substitution Messages 290 Teacher Timetable 285 Timetable Date 286 untis_mail log 284 Wildcards 287 Element Roll Up 29 67 Excel 53 Excluding Lessons from Planning Year Planning in
317. y February 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 agog March 2223 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 April 2 29 30 May 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 June T 131415 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 26 27 28 General data Values for Count only school days Value calculation School year Number of days 286 Number of weeks 41 Number of interruptions 0 Lessons Number of days 189 Number of weeks 38 Duration L Group 18 Tip Display time limitations in lessons It is often not immediately clear when using subject groups where a time limitation actually originates Using lt Grid adjustment gt it is therefore possible for all lesson views to display the time limitation in the grid view e source of each time limitation is indicated in parentheses I means a time limitation arising from the lessons c points to a time limitation due one of the classes and g means atime limitation due to a group of lessons Lo che Per Teach Subje Class Subjec Home Doub From To Value Eff tine range rows heme b k h k b m h beg Ria 0 333 1 10 15 10 c Ria 1 1 210 2 2 0 439 2 10 2 2 1 Pet 0 1 0 222 1 1 1 2 g 4 420 17 9 25 6 A concrete example will show how the use of lesson groups influences or casa value calculation Class teacher and subject factors will be overridden E without Teacher Factor in the process V without Class Factor 134 gp Untis Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Value
318. y Plan Periods Lessons Overhead Lessons Supplement Plan Details 1 Page Element Details Lessons 3 Column width Yearly work 2006 2007 1 600 000 1 000 290 500 100 1505 500 Cancel Lessons Spork 2b 24 117 500 Crib 287 100 His 3a 66 100 Bio 4 86 1700 Ko 4 74900 Sportk 1a 1b 116 300 CO 148 236 800 1 004 800 Additional Duty Theater group 40 00 Adiministratian 70 00 Skill enhancement 180 00 10 Yearly Plan Pernod Coaching 050 50 Lessons Total 290 500 Lessons Oyerhead 0 500 Yearly Plan 0 verhead 180 000 Valu e Ove read 110 000 From absences 0 000 Total 290 500 Gruber Petters Software Yearly work tasks The teachers yearly work can be output sorted by tasks The number of periods per teacher is listed for each task additional duty as well as a total for each task and a grand total at the bottom of the list This list called Yearly work Task can be output and printed by accessing report selection via Reports Selection Administration Gauss 60 00 Rub 70 00 Total 150 000 Lesson overhead Gauss 264 02 Mobel 0 00 Rub 465 61 Total 729 6390 Theater group Gauss 40 00 Rub 40 00 Total 80 000 Training Gauss 0 00 Rub 180 00 Total 160 000 Total Total 1 139 630 Report selection ala x EC Loading Statistics E Classes E Teachers E Rooms BC Free Periods E Classes E Teachers E Rooms E Students ECJ Subject Periods Repo

User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents